Pioneer SX-LX70SW Home Theater System Operating instructions

Show HTML Add to My manuals
179 Pages

advertisement

Pioneer SX-LX70SW Home Theater System Operating instructions | Manualzz
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 1 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
Operating Instructions
®
®
Audio Multi-channel Receiver Subwoofer SX-LX70SW
Satellite Speaker
SSP-LX70ST
HDD/DVD Recorder
SDVR-LX70D
Accessory Box
AS-LX70
HDD/DVD Recorder Home Cinema System
A00 Cover_anki_EU_hdd.fm 2 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午後5時39分
Thank you for buying this Pioneer product.
Please read through these operating instructions so that you will know how to operate your model properly.
After you have finished reading the instructions, put them in a safe place for future reference.
IMPORTANT
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
"dangerous voltage" within the product's
enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric
shock to persons.
CAUTION:
TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR
BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the appliance.
D3-4-2-1-1_En-A
WARNING
This equipment is not waterproof. To prevent a fire
or shock hazard, do not place any container filled
with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or
flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain
D3-4-2-1-3_B_En
or moisture.
Operating Environment
Operating environment temperature and humidity:
+5 ºC to +35 ºC (+41 ºF to +95 ºF); less than 85 %RH
(cooling vents not blocked)
Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in
locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or
strong artificial light)
D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En
This product complies with the Low Voltage Directive
2006/95/EC and EMC Directive 2004/108/EC.
D3-4-2-1-9a_A_En
WARNING
Before plugging in for the first time, read the following
section carefully.
The voltage of the available power supply differs
according to country or region. Be sure that the
power supply voltage of the area where this unit
will be used meets the required voltage (e.g., 230 V
D3-4-2-1-4_A_En
or 120 V) written on the rear face.
WARNING
To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked
flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the
D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En
equipment.
WARNING
To prevent injury, the receiver subwoofer must be
securely attached to the floor in accordance with this
operating instructions.
CAUTION
This product is a class 1 laser product, but this
product contains a laser diode higher than Class 1.
To ensure continued safety, do not remove any covers
or attempt to gain access to the inside of the product.
Refer all servicing to qualified personnel.
The following caution label appears on your unit.
Location: inside of the HDD/DVD Recorder
D3-4-2-1-8_B_En
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 3 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC
outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed
and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and
mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of
this unit should be performed only by qualified
service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the
cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make
sure it is properly disposed of after removal.
The equipment should be disconnected by removing
the mains plug from the wall socket when left
unused for a long period of time (for example, when
D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En
on vacation).
CAUTION
The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not
completely shut off all power from the AC outlet.
Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect
device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from
the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore,
make sure the unit has been installed so that the
power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC
outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard,
the power cord should also be unplugged from the
AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time
(for example, when on vacation).
D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En
This product is for general household purposes. Any
failure due to use for other than household purposes
(such as long-term use for business purposes in a
restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which
requires repair will be charged for even during the
K041_En
warranty period.
VENTILATION CAUTION
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat
radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and
10 cm at each side).
WARNING
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for
ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the
product, and to protect it from overheating. To
prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be
blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers,
table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the
D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En
equipment on thick carpet or a bed.
POWER-CORD CAUTION
Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the
plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power
cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a
short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a
piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the
cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other
cords. The power cords should be routed such that they
are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord
can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check
the power cord once in a while. When you find it
damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized
service center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En
If you want to dispose this product, do not mix it with general household waste. There is a separate collection system for used
electronic products in accordance with legislation that requires proper treatment, recovery and recycling.
Private households in the member states of the EU, in Switzerland and Norway may return their used electronic products free of charge to
designated collection facilities or to a retailer (if you purchase a similar new one).
For countries not mentioned above, please contact your local authorities for the correct method of disposal.
By doing so you will ensure that your disposed product undergoes the necessary treatment, recovery and recycling and thus prevent potential
negative effects on the environment and human health.
K058_A_En
Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified
service personnel.
IMPORTANT: THE MOULDED PLUG
This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 5 amp fuse is fitted in this plug. Should the
fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 5 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.
Check for the ASTA mark
or the BSI mark
on the body of the fuse.
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If you lose the fuse cover the plug
must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover can be obtained from your local dealer.
If the fitted moulded plug is unsuitable for your socket outlet, then the fuse shall be removed and the plug cut off and disposed of
safely. There is a danger of severe electrical shock if the cut off plug is inserted into any 13 amp socket.
If a new plug is to be fitted, please observe the wiring code as shown below. If in any doubt, please consult a qualified electrician.
IMPORTANT: The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:
Blue : Neutral Brown : Live
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in
your plug, proceed as follows ;
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the
letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the
letter L or coloured RED.
How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse.
D3-4-2-1-2-2_B_En
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 4 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
Section One
Contents
Section One
05 Getting started
What’s in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Using the Auto MCACC setup for optimal
surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
01 Speaker Setup Guide
06 Listening to your system
Safety precautions when setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Home theater sound setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Standard surround setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Front surround setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Preparing the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Using the supplied speaker bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
When not using the supplied speaker bases . . . . . . 7
Connect the speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Additional notes on speaker placement . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Effective Sound (for optimum sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Auto listening mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Listening in surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Center image setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Using Advanced Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Using Front Stage Surround Advance . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Listening in stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Genre Sync Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Using the Sound Retriever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Listening with MCACC Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Using Midnight, Loudness and
Quiet listening modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Adjusting the bass and treble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Adjusting sound delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
02 Connecting up
Receiver subwoofer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Side panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Back of display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
HDD/DVD Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Basic connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
03 Controls and displays
Display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
HDD/DVD Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Common Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Inserting a CA module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Operating the receiver subwoofer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Operating the built-in FM/AM tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
LCD touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Operating the supplied HDD/DVD Recorder . . . . . 20
Operating Pioneer plasma televisions and TVs . . . . 22
Operating a Pioneer Blu-ray Disc player . . . . . . . . . 24
Operating a Pioneer DVD player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Putting the batteries in the remote control . . . . . . . . 26
Using the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
04 Before you start
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Basic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Operating the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Using the LCD touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Watching a DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Listening to a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Watching a title recorded on the HDD . . . . . . . . . . 29
Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
4
En
07 Listening to the radio
Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Improving poor FM reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Improving poor AM sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Changing the noise cut mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Memorizing stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Listening to station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Using RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Displaying RDS information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Searching for RDS programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
08 Surround sound settings
Using the Sound Setup menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Channel level setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Speaker distance setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Dynamic Range Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Dual mono setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Using the Virtual Surround Back mode . . . . . . . . . 39
LFE Attenuate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Adjusting the channel levels using the test tone. . . . 39
09 Other connections
Connecting auxiliary components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Connecting for digital audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Connecting an analog audio component . . . . . . . . 40
Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Listening to an external audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Connecting external antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
About control out connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
HDMI mode setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
About HDMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 5 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
Section One
10 HDMI Control
Making the HDMI Control connections . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the HDMI options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the HDMI Control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Auto Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio input settings from Plasma televisions
(TV Input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before using synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronized amp mode operations . . . . . . . . . . .
Canceling synchronized amp mode. . . . . . . . . . . .
44
45
45
46
46
46
46
46
46
11 Additional information
Dimming the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the sleep timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up the remote to control your TV . . . . . . . . .
TV Preset code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resetting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47
47
47
48
48
Installation and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Surround sound formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dolby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displayed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
48
48
49
49
49
50
50
51
51
52
53
Section Two
Operating instructions for HDD/DVD
Recorder (SDVR-LX70D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
What’s in the box
Please confirm that the following items are all supplied.
Accessory box (AS-LX70):
• Remote control (page 18)
Receiver subwoofer (SX-LX70SW) box:
• Cleaning cloth
• AA/LR6 alkaline batteries x4 (page 26)
• Power cords x2 (page 13)
Speakers (SSP-LX70ST) box:
• Display unit (page 16)
• Speakers (front/center x2, surround x2) (page 6, 11)
• AM loop antenna (page 11)
• Speaker cables x6 (page 11)
• FM wire antenna (page 11)
• Speaker bases x4 (page 6)
• Microphone (for Auto MCACC setup) (page 30)
• Non-skid pads x16 (page 6, 7)
• HDMI cables x2 (page 13, 42, 44)
• Screws x4 (page 7)
• Control cable (page 13)
• Display cable (page 11)
• Optical digital cable (page 13)
• iPod cable (page 41)
• G-LINK™ cable (page 63)
• RF antenna cables x2 (page 13)
• These operating instructions
• Warranty card
5
En
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 6 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
01
Speaker Setup Guide
Chapter 1
Speaker Setup Guide
Front surround setup
Safety precautions when setting up
When assembling the speakers, lay them down flat on
their side to avoid accidents or injury. Make sure to use a
stable surface when assembling, setting up, and placing
the speakers.
This setup is ideal when rear surround speaker
placement isn’t possible or you want to avoid running
long speaker cables in your listening area. Use this setup
together with the Front Stage Surround Advance modes
in page 33.
Surround (L)
Surround (R)
Front/center (R)
Front/center (L)
Home theater sound setup
Depending on the size and characteristics of your room,
you can place your speakers in one of two ways using this
system.
Receiver
subwoofer
Standard surround setup
This is a standard multichannel surround sound speaker
setup for optimal 5.1 channel home theater sound.
Listening position
Front/center (R)
Front/center (L)
Preparing the speakers
Receiver
subwoofer
This unit comes with speaker bases that can be used to
adjust the speakers to the design of the room in which
they are placed.
Listening position
Using the supplied speaker bases
Surround (L)
Surround (R)
1 Attach the non-skid pads to the speaker bases, as
shown below.
Use the adhesive side of the pads to attach them to the
base of each speaker base.
Non-skid pads x 16
Each speaker base
6
En
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 7 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
Speaker Setup Guide
01
2 Attach the speaker bases.
Place the speaker atop a supplied speaker base, and fix
the base in place by using one of the supplied screws.
• The supplied speaker bases come in two different
shapes. You can determine the correct base for a
speaker by checking if the screw’s location lines up
correctly when the speaker is placed atop the base.
(There are specific bases for the front/center (L) and
surround speaker (R), and for the front/center (R) and
surround speaker (L), with two of each type included.)
Speaker
Connect the speaker system
Refer to Connecting up to connect the speakers properly.
After connecting everything, place the speakers as
shown in the diagram above for optimal surround sound.
After placing the speakers, run the Auto MCACC setup
(page 30) to complete your surround sound setup.
Additional notes on speaker placement
• Install the main front left and right speakers at an
equal distance from the TV.
• When using the Standard surround setup, install the
surround speakers slightly above ear level for
optimum effect.
Screw
• When using the Front surround setup, separate the
left and right speakers by about 1.5 m for optimum
effect.
Speaker base
Precautions:
When not using the supplied speaker bases
• Attach the non-skid pads to the base of each of
the front/center and surround speakers (as shown).
Use the adhesive side of the pads to attach them to the
base of each speaker.
• Do not place the speaker on an unstable surface, as
doing so may cause the speaker to fall and cause
damage or bodily injury.
• All speakers supplied with this system are
magnetically shielded. However, depending on the
installation location, colour distortion may occur if a
speaker is installed extremely close to the screen of a
television set. If this happens, turn the power switch
of the television set OFF, and turn it ON after 15 min
to 30 min. If the problem persists, place the speaker
system away from the television set.
• For safety, make sure that there is no exposed bare
speaker wire outside of the speaker terminals.
• Do not connect the supplied speakers with any other
amplifier. This may result in malfunction or fire.
Non-skid pads x 16
Front/center and surround speakers
• Do not connect any speakers other than those
supplied to this system.
• The speaker system grill cannot be removed. Do not
try to forcibly remove it since doing so may damage
the grille.
• When cleaning the cabinet, use the provided
cleaning cloth.
Do not allow alcohol, thinner, benzene, or
insecticides to come into contact with the surface,
since finish discoloration may occur.
Also, when using chemically impregnated cleaning
cloths, follow their precautions carefully.
7
En
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 8 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
02
Connecting up
Chapter 2
Connecting up
Receiver subwoofer
HDMI
OUT
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1
SYSTEM
Rear panel
Side panel
HDMI
OUT
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1
ANTENNA
L
AM LOOP
OUT 1 OUT 2
CONTROL
R
IN 2
IN 1
R
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
FM
UNBAL 75 Ω
ANALOG
AUDIO IN
R
FRONT
L
CENTER
L
FRONT
R
L
SURROUND
SUBWOOFER
AC IN
SPEAKERS (8 Ω)
SYSTEM
1
2
3
4
5
6
Rear panel
1 HDMI OUT connector
Connect to a television that has an HDMI terminal.
2 HDMI IN connectors (x3)
Use high-quality audio/video connection with compatible
HDMI devices. Connect the included HDD/DVD recorder
to HDMI IN 1.
7
8
9
10
4 CONTROL OUT jacks (x2)
Connect the supplied HDD/DVD recorder to the CONTROL
OUT 1 jack with the supplied control cable. You can
connect another component to the other Control Out jack.
5 DIGITAL OPTICAL IN jacks (x2)
To listen to optical digital audio, change the input to
Digital 1 or Digital 2.
To select this input, choose HDMI 1 to HDMI 3.
When the digital output jacks of your TV are connected to
these jacks, set ‘TV Input’ (see page 46).
3 SYSTEM connector
Connect to the display unit.
6
AM LOOP antenna terminal
7
FM antenna socket
Side panel
• There is a cover over the connectors on the side
panel.
A. When making connections, lift the two hooks and
remove the cover.
B. Once connections are finished, line up the three
positions and place the cover back in its original
position.
B
8 ANALOG AUDIO IN jacks
Handle sound from an external component by using
stereo audio code. To listen to analog audio, change the
input to Analog.
When the analog output jacks of your TV are connected
to these jacks, set ‘TV Input’ (see page 46).
9 SPEAKERS terminals
Match the colours of the speaker cords to their respective
connectors.
10 AC IN – Power inlet
A
Important
• You must connect the supplied HDD/DVD recorder
with a control cable. If not, the HDD/DVD recorder
may not operate properly.
8
En
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 9 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
Connecting up
02
Back of display unit
2 F.AUDIO input
To listen to audio from an external component, connect
with a stereo mini-plug cable. Once connected, the input
automatically changes to Front Audio In.
DISPLAY UNIT
SYSTEM
F.AUDIO
iPod
MCACC
SETUP MIC
3 iPod input terminal
Use to connect your Apple iPod as an audio source.
1
2
3
When you connect an iPod, the input automatically
changes to iPod.
4
1 SYSTEM connector
Connect to the receiver subwoofer.
4 MCACC SETUP MIC jack
Use to connect the supplied microphone for the Auto
MCACC setup (see page 30).
HDD/DVD Recorder
Front panel
Rear panel
ANTENNA
IN
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
AC IN
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
G-LINK CONTROL
OUT
ANTENNA(DIGITAL)
IN
HDMI OUT
COAXIAL
DV IN
5V
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
30 mA
10 11
1
USB
IN
OUT
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Rear panel
1 ANTENNA IN (RF IN)/OUT
Connect your TV antenna to the ANTENNA IN (RF IN)
jack. The signal is passed through to the ANTENNA OUT
jack for connection to your TV.
2 AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector
Audio/video input/output SCART-type AV connector for
connecting to a VCR, or other equipment with a SCART
connector. The input accepts video, S-Video and RGB.
See AV2/L1 In on page 155 for how to set this up.
3 AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector
Audio/video output SCART-type AV connector for
connecting to a TV or other equipment with a SCART
connector. The video output is switchable between video,
S-Video and RGB. See AV1 Out on page 154 for how to set
this up.
4 G-LINK™
Use to connect the supplied G-LINK™ cable to enable
GUIDE Plus+® to control an external satellite receiver,
etc.
5 CONTROL IN
Connect to the CONTROL OUT 1 jack of the receiver
subwoofer.
12
9
6 ANTENNA (DIGITAL) IN/OUT
Connect your DTV antenna to the ANTENNA (DIGITAL)
IN jack. The signal is passed through to the ANTENNA
(DIGITAL) OUT jack for connection to your TV.
7 HDMI OUT
Connect to the HDMI IN 1 jack of the receiver subwoofer.
8 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (COAXIAL)
Coaxial digital audio jack for connecting to Dolby Digital/
DTS/MPEG decoder or other equipment with a digital input.
9
AC IN – Power inlet
Front panel
On the front panel there is a flip-down cover that hides
more connections.
10 DV IN
A DV input i.LINK connector, suitable for connecting a
DV camcorder.
11 USB port (Type B)
USB port for connecting a PictBridge-compatible printer
or PC.
12 USB port (Type A)
USB port for connecting a digital camera, keyboard or
other USB device.
9
En
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 10 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
02
Connecting up
Basic connections
Receiver subwoofer
Display unit
HDMI
OUT
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1
DISPLAY UNIT
SYSTEM
F.AUDIO
iPod
MCACC
SETUP MIC
SYSTEM
INPUT
Rear panel
Side panel
1
ANTENNA
L
AM LOOP
R
SYSTEM
R
Display cable
FM
UNBAL 75 Ω
R
FRONT
L
CENTER
L
FRONT
R
L
SURROUND
SUB
SPEAKERS (8 Ω)
ANALOG
AUDIO IN
4
2
AM loop antenna
FM antenna
3
CL
FL
FR
CR
Front/center
speaker (R)
Front/center
speaker (L)
Listening position
Surround
speaker (R)
Surround
speaker (L)
SL
Important
• When connecting this system or changing
connections, be sure to switch power off and
disconnect the power cord from the wall socket.
After completing all connections, connect the power
cords to the wall socket.
10
En
SR
WARNING
• Pioneer bears no responsibility for accidents
resulting from faulty assembly or installation,
insufficient mounting strength of walls, mounting
fixtures (or other building fixtures), misuse or natural
disasters.
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 11 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
Connecting up
02
1 Connect the display unit to the receiver subwoofer.
Plug the display cable into the connector on the rear of
the display unit, then plug the other end of the display
cable into SYSTEM connector on the receiver subwoofer.
4
Connect each speaker.
• Each speaker cable has a colour-coded connector at
one end and two wires at the other end.
Colour-coded wire
(Connect to speaker)
Caution
Colour-coded connector
(Connect to receiver subwoofer)
• Do not attempt to attach the display unit to the wall.
2
Assemble the AM loop antenna.
a
b
c
a. Bend the stand in the direction indicated by the
arrow.
b. Clip the loop onto the stand.
c. If you want to fix to a wall or other surface, perform
step b after first securing the stand with screws.
It is recommended that you determine the reception
strength before securing the stand with the screws.
3
• Twist and pull off the protective shields on each wire.
• Connect the wires to the speaker. Each speaker in the
illustration can be identified by means of the colourcoded indicator provided on the rear-surface model
label. Match the colour-coded wire with the colour
indicator on the model label, then insert the colourcoded wire into the red (+) side and the other wire
into the black (–) side.
Black (–) Red (+)
Colour-coded wire
Connect the AM and FM antennas 1.
a. Connect one wire of the AM loop antenna to each AM
antenna terminal2.
For each terminal, press down on the tab to open;
insert the wire, then release to secure.
2
3
1
b. Push the FM antenna3 plug onto the center pin of the
FM antenna socket.
• Connect the other end to the colour-coded speaker
terminals on the side of the receiver subwoofer. Make
sure to insert completely.
Be careful when inserting the speaker plug, as it
must be inserted in the proper direction when being
plugged into one of the terminals. Please make sure
to connect correctly.
Note
1 • Keep antenna cables away from other cables, the display unit, receiver subwoofer and HDD/DVD recorder.
• If reception with the supplied antenna is poor, see Improving poor FM reception and Improving poor AM sound on page 35 or Connecting
external antennas on page 42.
• Do not attach any antenna other than the provided loop antenna, or an external antenna as described on page 43.
2 • Don’t let it come into contact with metal objects and avoid placing near computers, television sets or other electrical appliances.
• If radio reception is poor, you may be able improve it by re-inserting each antenna wire into the opposite terminal.
• For best reception, do not untwist the AM loop antenna wires or wrap them around the loop antenna.
3 To ensure optimum reception, make sure the FM antenna is fully extended and not coiled or hanging at the rear of the unit.
11
En
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 12 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
02
Connecting up
Antenna wall outlet or
indoor antenna
Antenna wall outlet
RF antenna cable
RF antenna cable
ANTENNA
(DIGITAL) IN
ANTENNA
IN
8
ANTENNA
IN
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
AC IN
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
G-LINK CONTROL
OUT
ANTENNA(DIGITAL)
IN
HDMI OUT
COAXIAL
IN
OUT
5V
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
30 mA
CONTROL
IN
ANTENNA
OUT
HDMI
OUT
HDD/DVD Recorder
5
Receiver subwoofer
Rear panel
Side panel
HDMI
OUT
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1
ANTENNA
L
AM LOOP
OUT 1 OUT 2
CONTROL
IN 1
IN 2
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
R
FM
UNBAL 75 Ω
SYSTEM
ANALOG
AUDIO IN
or
6
7
From digital audio
output (optical)
From Audio output
To HDMI input
RF antenna cable
To Antenna in
TV
-
12
En
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 13 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
Connecting up
Caution
• These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS LIVE
voltage. To prevent the risk of electric shock when
connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables,
disconnect the power cord before touching any
uninsulated parts.
• Do not connect any speakers other than those
supplied to this system.
• Do not connect the supplied speakers to any
amplifier other than the one supplied with this
system. Connection to any other amplifier may result
in malfunction or fire.
02
7 Connect an audio cable from your TV to the
receiver subwoofer.
• To listen to TV audio on this unit, you must connect
the TV’s audio output to an audio input jack on this
unit. You can connect by either a digital (optical) or
analog audio cable. For digital audio, connect to
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1 on the receiver subwoofer.
To use the HDMI Control function when you are
connected to a supported Pioneer plasma television,
you must connect via HDMI.
• You must first set ‘TV Input’ to switch the audio from
a plasma television with the HDMI Control function
or to switch the input source of this unit to TV audio
and operate your TV with the supplied remote control.
For more information, see Operating Pioneer plasma
televisions and TVs on page 22 and Audio input
settings from Plasma televisions (TV Input) on
page 46.
• After connecting the plugs, pull lightly on the cables
to make sure that the ends of the cables are securely
connected to the terminals. Poor connections can
create noise and interruptions in the sound.
• If the cables’ wires happen to be pushed out of the
terminals, allowing the wires to come into contact
with each other, it places an excessive additional load
on the amp. This may cause the amp to stop
functioning, and may even damage the amp.
5 Connect the HDD/DVD recorder to the receiver
subwoofer.
a. Plug the control cable into the CONTROL OUT 1 jack
on the side of the receiver subwoofer.
Plug the other end of the cable into the CONTROL IN
jack on the rear of the HDD/DVD recorder.
b. Plug the HDMI cable into the HDMI IN 1 jack on the
rear of the receiver subwoofer.
Plug the other end of the cable into the HDMI OUT
jack on the rear of the HDD/DVD recorder.
8
Connect a TV antenna.
• Connect the TV antenna from your TV to the
HDD/DVD recorder. See Connecting a TV antenna on
page 62 to connect the antenna.
9
Connect the power cord.1
• Connect each power cord to the AC inlet on the HDD/
DVD recorder and the receiver subwoofer. Connect
each power cord to a wall socket in the following
order: 1. HDD/DVD recorder 2. Receiver subwoofer 3.
TV.
• Run the cords that are connected to the side panel of
the receiver subwoofer over the back side of the unit,
and replace the cover on the side panel.
Note that unless the control cable is connected, you
can’t use the remote control with the HDD/DVD recorder.
6
Connect the receiver subwoofer to your TV.
• Connect the HDMI OUT jack on receiver subwoofer
to an HDMI input on your TV.
• You can have audio from the receiver subwoofer, as
well as audio and video from the HDD/DVD recorder,
output to your TV by connecting with a single HDMI
cable.
Note
1 • Do not use any power cord other than the one supplied with this system.
• Do not use the supplied power cord for any purpose other than connecting to this system.
• After connecting this unit to an AC outlet, a 15-second initialization process begins. You cannot carry out any operations during initialization.
The HDMI indicator on the display unit blinks during initialization, and you can turn this unit on once it has stopped blinking.
13
En
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 14 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
Controls and displays
03
Chapter 3
Controls and displays
Display unit
1
2
3
Top buttons
4
5
1 STANDBY/ON
Press to switch the receiver subwoofer on/into standby.
2 INPUT SELECTOR (page 40)
Press repeatedly to select one of the external audio
inputs (HDMI 1 to HDMI 3, Digital 1, Digital 2, Analog,
iPod or Front Audio In).
3 VOL +/– buttons
Use to adjust the volume.
4
POWER ON indicator (Blue)
5 Front panel display
See below for details.
6
IR remote sensor (page 26)
7 HDMI indicator (Red)
Lights when this receiver subwoofer is connected to
HDMI (HDCP) compatible component.
Also lights during initialization, after you plug this unit
into an AC outlet.
14
En
6
7
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 15 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
Controls and displays
03
Display
1
2
DIRECT STEREO F.S.SURR.
ADV.SURR. 2PRO LOGIC
3
4
5
6
7
LOUDNESS MIDNIGHT DNR DIALOG HDMI THROUGH
QUIET
TONE S.RTRV MCACC
2DIGITAL
DTS 96/24
DSD PCM
8
1 DIRECT
Lights when Direct Sound is selected (i.e. Effective
Sound is off) (page 31).
2
10
9
8
STEREO
Lights when the Stereo mode is selected or when a
stereo source is being played back in the Auto
listening mode (page 33).
DTS
Lights during playback of a DTS source (page 31).
DTS 96/24
Lights during playback of a DTS 96/24 decoding
(page 31).
F.S.SURR.
Lights when one of the Front Stage Surround
Advance listening modes is selected (page 33).
DSD3PCM
Lights during DSD (Direct Stream Digital) to PCM
conversion with SACDs.
ADV.SURR.
Lights when one of the Advanced Surround listening
modes is selected (page 32).
4 Sound processing indicators
Lights when any of the Loudness, Midnight, Quiet or tone
controls feature is selected (page 34).
5 S.RTRV
Lights when Sound Retriever is active (page 33).
6 HDMI THROUGH
Lights when HDMI Mode is set to Through Mode.
7 MCACC
Lights when MCACC Effect is switched on (page 34).
Blinks during Auto MCACC Setup (page 30).
Digital format indicators
2 DIGITAL
Lights during playback of a Dolby Digital source
(page 31).
Listening mode indicators
3 2 PRO LOGIC II
Lights during Dolby Pro Logic II decoding (page 32).
11
PCM
Lights during playback of PCM signals.
9
Character display
10 Tuner indicators
Lights when a broadcast is being received.
Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is being received
in auto stereo mode.
Lights when FM mono reception is selected.
Lights when in one of the RDS display or search
modes.
11
Lights when sleep timer is active (page 47).
15
En
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 16 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
Controls and displays
03
HDD/DVD Recorder
8
HDD
DVD
EPG
HDMI
Top of the unit
STANDBY/ON
DV IN
USB
OPEN/
CLOSE
1
2
3
4
PLAY
STOP
5
REC
STOP REC
6
7
• The image above represents when the front door is open.
1 STANDBY/ON
Press to switch the recorder on/into standby.
REC
Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the
recording time in 30 minute blocks.
2 Front panel inputs
See Front panel on page 9 for more information on these.
3 COMMON INTERFACE slot
Slot for CA module and smart card used to decode
scrambled D.TV channels. See Common Interface on
page 17.
4
STOP REC
Press to stop recording.
7 Front panel display
See Display on page 16 for details.
8
Disc tray
DVD indicator
Lights when the DVD drive is selected.
5 OPEN/CLOSE
Press to open/close the disc tray.
6
HDD indicator
Lights when the hard disk (HDD) is selected.
PLAY
Press to start or restart playback.
EPG indicator
Lights when the EPG data is downloading.
STOP
Press to stop playback.
HDMI indicator
Lights when this recorder is connected to HDMI
(HDCP) compatible component.
Display
1
2
3
4
5
L R
8
7
6
1 Lights during playback; blinks when playback is paused.
2 Lights when copying.
3 Lights during recording; blinks when recording is paused.
16
En
4
(page 98)
Lights when a timer recording has been set.
(Indicator blinks if the timer has been set to DVD but
there isn’t a recordable disc loaded, or the timer has
been set to HDD but the HDD is not recordable.)
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 17 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
Controls and displays
NTSC
Lights when the video output signal format is NTSC.
(page 155)
Indicates which channels of a bilingual broadcast
are recorded.
VPS/PDC (page 98)
Lights when receiving a VPS/PDC broadcast during a
VPS/PDC-enabled timer recording.
5
03
Common Interface
To receive scrambled D.TV channels you will need a CA
module and smart card provided by your service provider.
Different CA modules support different encryption
systems. This recorder is designed to work with modules
that support the DVB standard. Contact your service
provider to obtain the right kind of CA module.
Recording quality indicators (page 95)
Note that neither CA modules nor smart cards are
supplied or sold by Pioneer.
XP
Lights when the recording mode is set to XP (high
quality).
Inserting a CA module
SP
Lights when the recording mode is set to SP
(standard play).
The Common Interface card slot is located on the inside
of the cover of the recorder’s front panel.
1 Push down on the PUSH OPEN tab to access the
Common Interface.
LP/SLP
Lights when the recording mode is set to LP (long
play) or SLP (super-long play).
EP/SEP
Lights when the recording mode is set to EP
(extended play) or SEP (super-extended play).
MN
Lights when the recording mode is set to MN
(manual recording level) mode.
6
2 Insert the CA module into the card slot as far as
it will go.
Character display
7 R/RW
Lights when a recordable DVD-R or DVD-RW disc is
loaded.
8
PL (page 118)
Lights when a VR mode disc is loaded and the
recorder is in Play List mode.
V
Lights when an unfinalized Video mode disc is loaded.
The Common Interface card slot accepts Type I and Type
II PC Cards (PCMCIA cards).
17
En
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 18 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
03
Controls and displays
1 RECEIVER
Switches the receiver subwoofer to On/Standby.
Remote control
• For more information on using the remote control,
see Operating the remote control on page 28.
Operating the receiver subwoofer
This section explains how to operate the remote control
for the receiver subwoofer. Note that the controls change
when you have chosen the input function for separate
connected devices, such as an HDD/DVD recorder.
2
RECEIVER
1
SOURCE
TV
CTRL
3
TV
3
2
4
FM/AM
TV
Switches the TV to On/Standby.
TV CTRL
Switches the remote control to the TV operating mode
(no effect on the current input source of this unit).
3 SOURCE
Switches the power for the selected component to On/
Standby (page 28).
4 Input select buttons
Change the input for this unit. You will also need to press
one of these buttons when operating another connected
component via this remote control.
HDMI 1 to HDMI 3
Switch input from HDMI 1 to HDMI 3. To operate the
HDD/DVD recorder, press the button for the
connected input, then press the HDD/DVR button on
the LCD touch screen.
HDMI
1
2
LINE
TV
Switches to the input selected at TV Input setup
(page 46).
FM/AM (page 35)
Switches between FM and AM bands.
LINE (page 41)
Press repeatedly to select one of the receiver
subwoofer’s audio inputs (Digital 1, Digital 2,
Analog, iPod or Front Audio In).
5
PAGE
TOP MENU
MENU
6
DISC
NAVIGATOR
7
HOME
MENU
8
RETURN
9
SETUP
6
GUIDE
10
RCV
INFO
VOL
11
MUTE
12
5 LCD touch screen
Displays the buttons used to control external
components such as a receiver subwoofer, HDD/DVD
recorder, plasma television, Blu-ray disc player and DVD
player. The current operating mode is displayed at the top
of the remote control’s screen.
Although the LCD touch screen disappears if you do not
perform any operations for a while, it appears when the
screen is touched or a button on the remote control is
pressed.
6 Other component button
Use to operate an HDD/DVD recorder or other connected
component.
7 /// (cursor buttons) and ENTER
Use to control receiver functions.
8 SETUP
Use to access the menu system for surround sound
setup, tuner settings and so on (page 35, 37, 44, 47).
RECEIVER
9 RETURN
Use to cancel settings.
18
En
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 19 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
Controls and displays
03
10 RCV
Use to switch to the receiver subwoofer operating mode
when this unit is in the other operating modes. Press
again to return to the previous operating mode.
11 VOL +/–
Use to adjust the volume of the receiver subwoofer.
12 MUTE
Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been
muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).
20 SLEEP
Press to set the sleep timer (page 47).
21 EXIT
Cancel settings and exit the RECEIVER screen.
Operating the built-in FM/AM tuner
TOP MENU
MENU
DISC
NAVIGATOR
1
LCD touch screen
HOME
MENU
2
RECEIVER
13
14
SURR
ADV.
SURR
F.S.
SURR
GENRE SOUND
RTRV DIRECT
3
1 /// (cursor buttons) and ENTER
Use to control FM/AM tuner functions.
16
2 SETUP
Use to access the menu system or tuner settings.
18
3 RETURN
Use to cancel settings.
15
17
TEST SOUND
MCACC TONE
19
20
SLEEP
21
EXIT
RETURN
SETUP
LCD touch screen
FM/AM
13 SURR
Use to select a Surround mode (page 31).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
5
DISP
0
CLEAR
6
-
TUNE
+
7
-
ST
+
ADV.SURR
Use to change the audio setting to Pioneer’s original
Advanced Surround mode (page 32).
4
F.S.SURR
Use to select a Front Stage Surround Advance mode
(page 33).
14 GENRE
Use to listen to audio in Genre Sync mode (page 33).
(This button is displayed only when the RECEIVER screen
is shown during HDD/DVD recorder operation.)
15 SOUND RTRV
Press to restore CD quality sound to compressed audio
sources (page 33).
16 DIRECT
Use to switch on/off the Effective Sound mode (page 33).
17 MCACC
Starts the Auto MCACC setup (page 30).
18 TEST TONE
Use to output the test tone (for speaker setup) (page 39).
19 SOUND
Press to access the sound menu, from which you can
adjust bass and treble, etc.
4
Number buttons
Use to directly choose a preset radio station.
CLEAR
Press to clear an entry and start again.
5 DISP
Use to display RDS information (page 36).
6 TUNE +/–
Use to find radio frequencies.
7 ST +/–
Use to select a station preset.
19
En
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 20 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
03
Controls and displays
Operating the supplied HDD/DVD Recorder
RECEIVER
SOURCE
TV
4 MENU (page 104)
Press to display the disc menu if a DVD-Video, finalized
DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or finalized DVD+R/+RW disc
is loaded.
CTRL
1
When in the GUIDE Plus+® system, use to jump directly
to the Menu bar.
5 /// (cursor buttons) and ENTER
Use to navigate all on-screen displays. Press ENTER to
select the currently highlighted option.
2
PAGE
MENU
TOP MENU
3
4
While watching D.TV press ENTER to display the Channel
List screen.
DISC
NAVIGATOR
5
HOME
MENU
6
8
9
6 HOME MENU
Press to display the Home Menu, from which you can
navigate many functions of the system.
RETURN
7
SETUP
GUIDE
7 RETURN
Press to go back one level in the on-screen menu or
display.
Also press to exit the MHEG application.
10
INFO
1 SOURCE
Switches the power for the HDD/DVD recorder to
On/Standby.
2 PAGE </>
Switch between pages on the LCD touch screen when
multiple pages are present.
3 TOP MENU (page 104) / DISC NAVIGATOR
(page 106, 118)
Press to display the top menu if a DVD-Video or finalized
DVD-R/-RW (Video) disc is loaded, or the Disc Navigator
screen.
8 GUIDE Plus+® Action buttons
Use when an EPG screen is displayed or when tuned to a
data channel of a digital broadcast. The function of each
button will be described on-screen, and changes
depending on the screen being displayed.
9 GUIDE
Press to display the EPG screen; press again to exit.
10 INFO
While watching D.TV, press to display information
banner.
LCD touch screen
HDD/DVR 1/3
JUKE
BOX
P.LIVE
TV
/
/
15
CM
BACK
CM
SKIP
16
REC
REC STOP
REC MODE
11
14
18
19
HDD/
DVD
HELP
TIMER TIMER
REC ON/OFF
HDD/DVR 2/3
12
13
21
22
17
20
23
24
18
25
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A.TV/
D.TV
0
CLEAR
TV/
DVD
INPUT
11 HDD/DVD
Press to select the hard disk (HDD) or DVD for recording
and playback.
20
En
TEXT
27
+
CH
HELP
HDD/DVR 3/3
28
DISP
29
O.T.
COPY
26
-
12 JUKEBOX (page 134)
Press to display the Jukebox screen of the HDD/DVD
recorder, from where you can copy music to the HDD for
playback.
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 21 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
Controls and displays
13 P.LIVE TV (page 96)
Press to start recording the current TV channel, but with
playback paused, effectively pausing the broadcast.
03
21 Number buttons
Use the number buttons for track/chapter/title
selection; channel selection, and so on.
14 Playback controls (page 103)
Press to start playback.
Press to stop playback.
Press to pause playback or recording.
/ , /
(page 108, 109)
Press to start reverse or forward scanning. Press
again to change the speed.
While paused, press and hold to start slow-motion
playback. Press repeatedly to change the playback
speed.
While paused, press to advance a single frame in
either direction.
When GUIDE Plus+® is displayed, use to display the
previous/next day.
/
Press to skip to the previous or next title/chapter/
track; or to display the previous or next menu page.
When GUIDE Plus+® is displayed, use to display the
previous/next page.
15 CM BACK (commercial back)
Press repeatedly to skip progressively backward
through the video playing.
CM SKIP (commercial skip)
Press repeatedly to skip progressively forward
through the video playing.
16 Recording controls (page 95)
REC
Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the
recording time in blocks of 30 mins.
When the red action button is visible in a GUIDE
Plus+® screen, use for One-Button-Record.
STOP REC
Press to stop recording.
CLEAR
Press to clear an entry and start again.
22 A.TV/D.TV
Press to switch between analog TV antenna input and
digital TV antenna input. The A.TV and D.TV indicators
on the front panel show which is selected.
23 TV/DVD
Press to switch between ‘TV mode’, in which you get the
picture and sound from the TV’s tuner, and ‘DVD mode’,
in which you get picture and sound from the system’s
tuner (or an external input).
24 INPUT (page 100)
Press to change the HDD/DVD recorder input to use for
recording.
25 TEXT
Press to display Teletext information (in European
countries except the UK) or to start the MHEG application
display (UK only) if available during digital broadcasts.
26 CHANNEL +/– (page 93)
Press to change the channel of the built-in TV tuner.
27
(AUDIO) (page 94, 111)
Press to change the audio language or channel.
(When the recorder is stopped, press to change the
tuner audio.)
(SUBTITLE) (page 111)
Press to display/change the subtitles included in
multilingual DVD-Video discs.
While watching D.TV, press to change the D.TV
subtitles.
(ANGLE) (page 112)
Press to switch camera angles on discs with multiangle scenes.
28 DISP (page 112)
Displays/changes the on-screen information displays.
29 O.T. COPY (page 127)
Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing
title to DVD or the HDD.
17 REC MODE (page 95)
Press repeatedly to change the recording mode (picture
quality).
18 HELP
Press for help on how to use the current GUI screen.
19 TIMER REC (page 75, 98)
Press to set a timer recording.
20 TIMER ON/OFF
This button cannot be used for the supplied HDD/DVD
recorder.
21
En
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 22 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
Controls and displays
03
Operating Pioneer plasma televisions and TVs
First, refer to Setting up the remote to control your TV on page 47 for information about setting up your TV’s presets.
Note that certain buttons may not work with some TVs.
TELETEXT-related buttons can only be used with Pioneer plasma televisions.
1
SOURCE
TV
CTRL
1
2
1
8
PAGE
MENU
2
3
9
16
6
17
19
18
8
9
20
22
TV/
DTV
0
23
INF0
EXIT
11
+
6
SETUP
10
GUIDE
5
RETURN
7
INFO
INPUT
MUTE
26
13
25
LCD touch screen
TV CTRL
Switches the remote control to the TV operating
mode (no effect on the current input source of this
unit).
Teletext mode: Selects a page.
5 HOME MENU
Display the HOME MENU screen.
6 RETURN
Restores the previous menu screen.
7 Colour (RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE) buttons
Teletext mode: Selects a page.
13
-
12
TV
Switches the TV to On/Standby.
4 /// (cursor buttons) and ENTER
Use to navigate all on-screen displays. Press ENTER to
select the currently highlighted option.
TV VOL
MUTE
-
12
3 PAGE </>
Switches pages on the LCD touch screen.
24
+
+
TV VOL
P
-
2 SOURCE
Switches the power for the TV to On/Standby.
22
PDP 2/2
14
21
4
HOME
MENU
4
7
DISC
NAVIGATOR
En
3
15
TOP MENU
1
2
PDP 1/2
3
5
Shown when not set to
a Pioneer plasma television.
TV 1/2
RECEIVER
8 Number buttons
TV/External input mode: Selects a channel.
9 TV/DTV (For Pioneer plasma televisions only)
Switches between the analog TV and DTV input modes.
10 P +/–
TV/External input mode: Selects a channel.
11 INPUT
Selects an input source of the TV.
12 MUTE
Mutes the sound.
13 TV VOL +/–
Sets the volume.
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 23 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
Controls and displays
03
The following only apply to Pioneer plasma
televisions:
14
Jumps to Teletext subtitle page.
15
Displays hidden characters.
16
Selects the Teletext mode (all TV image, all TEXT image,
TV/TEXT image).
17
Displays the channel information.
18
TV/External input mode: Freezes a frame from a moving
image.
Press again to cancel the function.
19
Selects the screen size.
20
Displays an Index page for the CEEFAX/FLOF format.
Displays a TOP Over View page for the TOP format.
21
Teletext mode: Stops updating Teletext pages. Press
again to release the hold mode.
22
Teletext mode: Switches Teletext images. (full/upper half/
lower half)
23 INFO
24 EXIT
Press to exit the channel information
25
Teletext mode: Selects a page.
26
Sets the sound multiplex mode.
23
En
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 24 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
Controls and displays
03
Operating a Pioneer Blu-ray Disc player
RECEIVER
SOURCE
TV
CTRL
BD 2/2
BD 1/2
1
9
2
10
MENU
3
5
6
5
6
7
8
9
/
/
CLEAR
0
ENTER
DISP
14
PLAY
MODE
11
RETURN
SETUP
15
VIDEO
ADJ
ZOOM
12
7
1 SOURCE
Switches the power for a Blu-ray disc player to
On/Standby.
DISP
12
10 Playback controls
Press to start or resume playback.
2 PAGE </>
Switch between pages on the LCD touch screen when
multiple pages are present.
Press to stop playback (you can resume playback by
pressing ).
3 TOP MENU / DISC NAVIGATOR
Press to display the top menu of a BD-ROM or DVD-Video
disc.
Press to pause playback; press again to restart.
When playing a DVD-R/-RW disc, press to display/exit the
Disc Navigator.
4 MENU
BD-ROM: Press to display/hide the pop-up menu.
DVD-Video: Press to display the disc menu (if there is one).
5 /// (cursor buttons) and ENTER
Use to navigate on-screen displays and menus. Press
ENTER to select an option or execute a command.
, Press to start reverse/forward scanning.
, Press to jump to the start of the previous/next
chapter/track.
/ , /
Use for slow motion and step frame.
11 ZOOM
Press to zoom the screen when displaying a still image.
6 HOME MENU
Press to display the player’s Home Menu, access most of
the player’s functions.
12 DISP
Press to display information.
7 RETURN
Press to return to a previous screen.
13 Number buttons
Use to enter title, chapter or track numbers, etc.
8 Colour (RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE) buttons
Use to navigate BD-ROM menus.
ENTER
Press to select an option or execute a command.
LCD touch screen
CLEAR
Press to clear a numeric entry, etc.
9
(AUDIO)
Press to select the audio channel or language.
14 PLAY MODE
Press to change the Play Mode (repeat play, for example).
(SUBTITLE)
Press to select a subtitle display.
15 VIDEO ADJ
Press to display the Video Adjust screen.
(ANGLE)
Press to change the camera angle during BD-ROM
or DVD-Video movie multi-angle scene playback.
24
4
8
En
3
4
DISC
NAVIGATOR
HOME
MENU
2
13
PAGE
TOP MENU
1
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 25 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
Controls and displays
03
Operating a Pioneer DVD player
RECEIVER
SOURCE
TV
CTRL
1
DVD 1/2
DVD 2/2
8
2
/
MENU
3
4
DISC
NAVIGATOR
5
HOME
MENU
6
10
RETURN
SETUP
ZOOM
DISP
11
13
7
1 SOURCE
Switches the power for a DVD player to On/Standby.
2 PAGE </>
Switch between pages on the LCD touch screen when
multiple pages are present.
3 TOP MENU
Press to display the top menu of a DVD-Video disc.
4 MENU
Displays a DVD disc menu – this varies with the disc and
may be the same as the ‘top menu’.
5 /// (cursor buttons) and ENTER
Moves the cursor around the screen. Press ENTER to select
the current menu option.
6 HOME MENU
Display/exit the on-screen display.
7 RETURN
Returns to the previously displayed menu screen.
LCD touch screen
8
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CLEAR
0
ENTER
9
PAGE
TOP MENU
/
9
PLAY
MODE
DISP
11
Playback controls
Press to start or resume playback.
Press to stop playback (you can resume playback by
pressing ).
Press to pause playback; press again to restart.
/ , /
Press to start reverse or forward scanning. Press
again to change the speed.
While paused, press and hold to start slow-motion
playback. Press repeatedly to change the playback
speed.
While paused, press to advance a single frame in
either direction.
/
Press to skip to the previous or next title/chapter/
track/folder; or to display the previous or next menu
page.
(AUDIO)
Press to select the audio channel or language.
10 ZOOM
Press to zoom the screen when displaying a still image.
(SUBTITLE)
Press to select a subtitle display.
11 DISP
Press to display information.
(ANGLE)
Press to change the camera angle during DVD-Video
movie multi-angle scene playback.
12 Number buttons
Use to enter title, chapter or track numbers, etc.
ENTER
Press to select an option or execute a command.
CLEAR
Press to clear a numeric entry, etc.
13 PLAY MODE
Press to change the Play Mode (repeat play, for example).
25
En
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 26 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
Controls and displays
03
Putting the batteries in the remote
control
1 Open the battery compartment cover on the
back of the remote control.
2 Insert four AA/LR6 alkaline batteries into the
battery compartment following the indications
(,) inside the compartment.
3
Using the remote control
Please keep in mind the following when using the remote
control:
• Make sure that there are no obstacles between the
remote and the remote sensor on the unit.
• Remote operation may become unreliable if strong
sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the unit’s
remote sensor.
• Remote controllers for different devices can interfere
with each other. Avoid using remotes for other
equipment located close to this unit.
• Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the
operating range of the remote.
• Use within the operating range in front of the remote
control sensor on the display unit, as shown.
Close the cover.
Caution
Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such
as leakage and bursting. Please observe the
following:
30
30
• Don’t mix new and old batteries together.
• Don’t use different kinds of battery together —
although they may look similar, different batteries
may have different voltages.
• Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each
battery match the indications in the battery
compartment.
• Remove batteries from equipment that isn’t going to
be used for a month or more.
• When disposing of used batteries, please comply with
governmental regulations or environmental public
instruction’s rules that apply in your country /area.
WARNING
• Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or
other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or
near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak,
overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the
life or performance of batteries.
26
En
7m
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 27 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
Before you start
04
Chapter 4
Before you start
Switching on
The HDD/DVD recorder and receiver subwoofer have separate power switches. The power switch for the receiver
subwoofer is located on the display unit.
Turn the receiver subwoofer ON.
RECEIVER
SOURCE
TV
CTRL
HDMI
1
2
3
TV
Turn the HDD/DVD Recorder ON (only in the HDD/DVR mode).
Selected HDD/DVR mode.
(See next page for details.)
LINE
FM/AM
HDD/DVR 1/3
HDD/
DVD
JUKE
BOX
P.LIVE
TV
/
/
CM
BACK
CM
SKIP
STANDBY/ON
Receiver
subwoofer
REC
REC STOP
REC MODE
HELP
TIMER
REC
TIMER
ON/OFF
Display Unit
PAGE
MENU
TOP MENU
DISC
NAVIGATOR
Remote Control
STANDBY/ON
DV IN
USB
OPEN/
CLOSE
PLAY
STOP
REC
STOP REC
HDD/DVD Recorder
The table below shows what needs to be switched on for
various system functions:
Setting up
DVD playback
On
On
After connecting and installing the HDD/DVD recorder
and receiver subwoofer, complete the steps below to set
the system up for use.
CD playback
On
On
HDD/DVD recorder
HDD playback
On
On
Radio
On
Off
Timer recording
Off
On
Function
Display unit
HDD/DVD recorder
• Set the date and time, TV channel tuning and the type
of TV in the Setup Navigator (page 68).
Receiver subwoofer
• Complete the Auto MCACC setup to optimize the
surround sound (page 30).
27
En
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 28 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
04
Before you start
• When the desired source cannot be found, or when
you have a component not manufactured by Pioneer
connected, press RCV to put the remote control into
Receiver mode. The input for this unit remains
unchanged.
Basic operation
This manual is split into two parts, one covering using the
receiver subwoofer, the other using the HDD/DVD
recorder. Below are some common operations and
where to find them explained in this manual.
Note
Operating the remote control
To temporarily control the receiver while listening to
audio from a connected component on this unit,
press RCV. The selected input will not change, and
the remote changes to Receiver mode. To return to
the previous operating mode, press RCV once more.
The supplied remote control can control not only the
receiver subwoofer and HDD/DVD recorder, but also
other Pioneer products such as Blu-ray disc players, DVD
players, and plasma televisions.
To operate these components, orient the remote control
toward the display unit.
Operating the receiver subwoofer
RCV Press to display the RECEIVER screen.
•
The RECEIVER screen is shown on the remote control’s
LCD screen, and the remote is switched to Receiver
mode.
Using the LCD touch screen
Depending on the type of connected component you are
operating (such as an HDD/DVD recorder), there may be
multiple pages of information for the LCD touch screen.
When the component you would like to control is not
displayed, press PAGE to scroll to the page where the
component you would like to control is located.
• When no operations are carried out for over 10
seconds, the display on the LCD touch screen of the
remote control is automatically turned off. To have
the display shown once again, either touch the LCD
or press a button on the remote control.
RECEIVER
SURR
ADV
SURR
F.S.
SURR
Choosing and operating a source component
HDMI
FM/AM
LINE
TV
1
1
2
3
Press to cycle through connected components.
The selected component changes, and the LCD screen
on the remote control changes to that of the appropriate
component.
• To select input for Digital 1, Digital 2, Analog, Front
Audio In, or iPod, press the LINE button until the
desired input function is shown on the display unit.
2 Choose the input source you are using when you
have selected HDMI 1 to HDMI 3 or LINE.
The LCD screen changes to that for the selected
component, and you can then operate the desired
component.
HDD/
DVR
BD
DVD
HDD/
DVR
BD
DVD
Watching a DVD
Remember that when using the remote to control the
supplied HDD/DVD recorder, you should point the
remote towards the display unit, not the recorder itself.
RECEIVER
1
Switch on the receiver subwoofer.
2 Set the remote control to HDD/DVR mode.
The LCD screen changes to that for the HDD/DVD
recorder, and you can then operate the desired
component (see Choosing and operating a source
component above).
SOURCE
3
Switch on the HDD/DVD recorder.
TV
4
Switch on your TV.
Turn on your TV and make sure that it is set to the HDMI
video input.
TV
5
HDD/
DVD
OPEN/
CLOSE
Press to select DVD.
6
Press on the HDD/DVD recorder to open
the disc tray.
EXIT
HDMI input
28
En
EXIT
LINE input
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 29 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
Before you start
7 Load a disc.
Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc
tray guide to align the disc (if you’re loading a doublesided DVD disc, load it with the side you want to play
face-down).
04
Watching a title recorded on the HDD
RECEIVER
1
Switch on the receiver subwoofer.
2 Set the remote control to HDD/DVR mode.
See Choosing and operating a source component on
page 28.
SOURCE
3
Switch on the HDD/DVD recorder.
TV
8
Press to start playback.
/
/
5
HDD/
DVD
Switch on your TV.
Press to select HDD.
Start playback of the HDD title (page 104).
Press to stop playback.
You can resume playback from the same
point by pressing . (Press again to
cancel the resume function.)
7
RECEIVER
Pauses playback, or restarts playback
when paused.
Listening to the radio
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly
to increase the scanning speed.
VOL
RECEIVER
6
See Basic playback on page 103 for more on playing
discs.
9
4
Adjust the volume.
VOL
Adjust the volume.
RECEIVER
1
Switch on the receiver subwoofer.
2 Set the remote control to FM/AM mode.
See Choosing and operating a source component on
page 28.
3 Tune to a station (page 35).
The LCD screen changes to that for the radio, and you
can then operate the desired component.
Listening to a CD
VOL
RECEIVER
1
Switch on the receiver subwoofer.
4
RECEIVER
Adjust the volume.
2 Set the remote control to HDD/DVR mode.
See Choosing and operating a source component on
page 28.
SOURCE
3
Switch on the HDD/DVD recorder.
4
HDD/
DVD
Press to select DVD.
5
Load a CD and start playback (page 104).
6
RECEIVER
VOL
Adjust the volume.
29
En
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 30 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
05
Getting started
Chapter 5
Getting started
1 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP
MIC jack on back of the display unit.
Important
•
RCV Press to set the remote control to receiver
control mode in order to operate the receiver
subwoofer (make sure that the LCD displays the
RECEIVER screen, as shown below).
RECEIVER
SURR
ADV
SURR
F.S.
SURR
Using the Auto MCACC setup for
optimal surround sound
The Multichannel Acoustic Calibration (MCACC) system
measures the acoustic characteristics of your listening
area, taking into account ambient noise, and testing for
channel delay and channel level. After you have set up
the microphone provided, the system uses the
information from a series of test tones to measure
standing wave and reverb, optimizing the speaker
settings and equalization (MCACC Effect) for your
particular room.1
Important
• The test tones used for Auto MCACC setup are loud;
however, do not turn the volume down during setup
as this may result in a sub-optimal setup.
• Make sure the microphone and speakers are not
moved during the MCACC setup.
2 Place the microphone at your normal listening
position.
Place it about ear height, and make sure it is level by
using a table or chair.
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers
and the microphone.
RECEIVER
If the receiver subwoofer is off, press 3
RECEIVER to turn the power on.
4 MCACC Press MCACC.
Try to be as quiet as possible after pressing MCACC. The
volume increases automatically and the system outputs
a series of test tones.
• To cancel Auto MCACC setup before it has finished,
press MCACC. The unit will continue to use the
previous settings.
• If the ambient noise level is too high, Noisy! blinks in
the display for five seconds. To exit and check the
noise levels2, press MCACC, or to try again, press
ENTER when Retry shows in the display.
• If you see an Error MIC! or Error Speaker! message
in the display, there may be a problem with your mic
or the speaker connections. To try again, press
ENTER3.
When the MCACC setup is complete, the volume level
returns to normal, Complete4 shows in the display, and
MCACC Effect is activated.5
• Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this unit
upon completion of the Auto MCACC setup.
Note
1 You only need to use the Auto MCACC setup once (unless you change the placement of your speakers or your room layout).
2 • If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto MCACC setup (too much ambient noise, echo off the walls, obstacles blocking the speakers from the microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check for household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan, etc.), that may be
affecting the environment and switch them off if necessary.
• Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of the mic. If this seems to be happening, switch off the TV during Auto MCACC setup.
3 If this doesn’t work, press MCACC, turn off the power, and check the problem indicated by the Error message, then try the Auto MCACC setup
again.
4 If Complete doesn’t appear, it is likely an error occurred during the setup. Please check all connections and try again.
5 See Listening with MCACC Effect on page 34 to switch on/off MCACC Effect.
30
En
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 31 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
Listening to your system
06
Chapter 6
Listening to your system
• Stereo Playback in Surround
Outputs audio from the surround speakers while
directing vocal sound to the front channels. You can
play back stereo sources like CDs in seamless,
comfortable surround sound.
This effect is available when you play back stereo
sources in the Auto listening mode (see below).
Important
•
RCV Press to set the remote control to receiver
control mode in order to operate the receiver
subwoofer (make sure that the LCD displays the
RECEIVER screen, as shown below).
RECEIVER
SURR
ADV
SURR
F.S.
SURR
The Effective sound mode can be turned off (activating
Direct mode) by doing the following:
• DIRECT Press to switch to Direct Sound.
Press this button to switch between Effective Sound and
Direct Sound.
• When Direct Sound is selected, the DIRECT indicator
lights.
Effective Sound (for optimum sound)
With the uniquely shaped high-quality speakers supplied
with this unit, the Effective Sound mode enables the
following Pioneer exclusive audio technologies designed
to maximize the real experience of sound originally
inherent in movies and music.
Turn on the Effective Sound mode under normal
circumstances to maximize the capabilities of this unit.
• Dialogue Enhancement
Clarifies dialogue in movies to make it stand out from
other background sounds.
• Dynamic Range Compression
Resuscitates detailed sound susceptible to ambient
noise to create an acoustic environment where you
feel as if you are right in the action.
• Original Channel Balance & Channel Mix
Since the orientation of the supplied speaker units is
uniquely designed, channels are mixed down and
balanced in a special manner. Also, the optimum
balance is automatically achieved according to the
contents being played back.
• Frequency Characteristic Correction
Realizes the playback characteristic optimized for
long hours of listening in addition to the added
features of the supplied speaker units.
Auto listening mode
The Auto listening mode is the simplest way to listen to
any source as it was mastered: the output from the
speakers mirrors the channels in the source material.
If you set up the system for Front surround (page 6), the
Front Stage Surround modes will give the best results
(see page 33).
•
SURR
Press to select the Auto listening mode.
Listening in surround sound
You can listen to stereo or multichannel sources in
surround sound. Surround sound is generated from
stereo sources using one of the Dolby Pro Logic or DTS
Neo:6 decoding modes.1
If you set up the system for Front surround (page 6), the
Front Stage Surround modes will give the best results
(see page 33).
• SURR Press repeatedly to select a listening mode.
The choices that appear in the display will vary according
to the type of source that’s playing.2
Note
1 After the surround back signals of the 6.1/7.1-channel audio represented by DTS-ES are properly decoded, the original virtual surround back
function outputs the surround back signals in combination with surround signals.
2 You cannot select a mode other than Auto and Stereo while playing back DTS-HD, DTS-Express, or Dolby TrueHD (176.4 kHz/192 kHz). Also,
you cannot select DTS Neo:6 for Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby TrueHD (below 96 kHz).
31
En
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 32 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
06
Listening to your system
• Panorama – Extends the front stereo image to
include the surround speakers for a ‘wraparound’
effect.
With two channel sources, you can select from:
• Auto – Auto listening mode (see page 31)
• 2PL II Movie (Dolby Pro Logic II Movie) – 5.1
channel surround sound, especially suited to movie
sources
• 2PL II Music (Dolby Pro Logic II Music) – 5.1
channel surround sound, especially suited to music
sources; see Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings below
• 2PL II Game (Dolby Pro Logic II Game) – 5.1
channel surround sound, especially suited to video
games
• 2Pro Logic (Dolby Pro Logic) – 4.1 channel
surround sound for use with any two-channel source
• Neo:6 Cinema – 6.1 channel sound, especially suited
to movie sources
• Neo:6 Music – 6.1 channel sound, especially suited to
music sources; see Center image setting on page 32
• Stereo – See Listening in stereo on page 33.
With multichannel sources, you can select (according to
format):
• Auto – Auto listening mode (see page 31)
• StandardDecode – Listening in Dolby Digital or DTS
surround decoding. Plays back multichannel
sources like Dolby Digital, DTS, and multichannel
PCM with the most standard decoder.
ENTER
3
confirm.
Adjust the setting, then press ENTER to
Center image setting
When listening to two channel sources in Neo:6 Music
mode (see page 31), you can also adjust the center image
effect.
Adjusts the center image to create a wider stereo effect
with vocals.2
1
SOUND
Press when Neo:6 Music mode is active.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Center Image’ then press ENTER.
ENTER
3
Adjust the setting, then press ENTER to
confirm.
• Adjust the effect from 0 (all center channel sent to
front right and left speakers) to 10 (center channel
sent to the center speaker only).
• Stereo – See Listening in stereo on page 33.
Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings
Using Advanced Surround
When listening in Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode (see
above), there are three settings you can adjust: Center
Width, Dimension, and Panorama.
The Advanced Surround effects can be used with any
multichannel or stereo source for a variety of additional
surround sound effects. These modes are designed to
provide optimum listening effect when using the
Standard surround setup described on page 6.
1 SOUND Press when Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode is
active.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Center Width’, ‘Dimension’ or
‘Panorama’ then press ENTER.
• Center Width1 – Provides a better blend of the front
speakers by spreading the center channel between
the front right and left speakers, making it sound
wider (higher settings) or narrower (lower settings).
• Dimension – Adjusts the depth of the surround
sound balance from front to back, making the sound
more distant (minus settings), or more forward
(positive settings).
ADV
• SURR Press to select an Advanced Surround mode.
The ADV.SURR. indicator lights when one of these
modes is chosen. You cannot switch between modes for
some audio streams.3
Press repeatedly to select:
• Action – Designed for action movies with dynamic
soundtracks
• Drama – Designed for movies with lots of dialog
• Sci-Fi – Designed for science fiction with lots of
special effects
• Mono Film – Creates surround sound from mono
soundtracks
Note
1 As this product uses a dual center speaker system, you should normally use the C.Width 3 setting.
2 As this product uses a dual center speaker system, you should normally use the C.Image 3 setting.
3 You cannot use this function for the following audio streams:
• Dolby TrueHD: over 88.2 kHz
• DTS-HD: over 88.2 kHz or with the channel format of 2/0
• DTS-Express: with the channel format of 2/0
32
En
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 33 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
Listening to your system
• Ent.Show – Suitable for musical sources
• Expanded – Creates an extra wide stereo field
• TV Surround – Provides surround sound for both
mono and stereo TV sources
• Advanced Game – Suitable for video games
• Sports – Suitable for sports programs
• Classical – Gives a large concert hall-type sound
• Rock/Pop – Creates a live concert sound for rock
and/or pop music
• Unplugged – Suitable for acoustic music sources
• Ext.Stereo – Gives multichannel sound to a stereo
source, using all of your speakers
Using Front Stage Surround Advance
The Front Stage Surround Advance modes are effective
when you are using the Front surround speaker setup as
described on page 6.
F.S.
SURR
•
Press to select a Front Stage Surround
Advance mode.
The F.S.SURR indicator lights.
Press repeatedly to select Focus 5.1ch, Wide 5.1ch or
Extra Power. You cannot select a mode other than Extra
Power for some audio streams.1
• Focus 5.1ch – Use to provide a rich surround sound
effect directed to the center area where the left and
right speakers sound projection converges.
• Wide 5.1ch – Use to provide a surround sound effect
to a wider area than Focus 5.1ch mode.
• Extra Power – Outputs stereo sound (in the case of
multi-channel sources, down-mixed stereo sound)
from the surround speakers for powerful stereo effect.
06
Genre Sync Mode
Only when you have this unit connected to the supplied
HDD/DVD recorder and are using the HDMI Control
function, you can make use of the Genre Sync Mode to
have the listening mode automatically change to that
which best matches the genre of the contents playing
from the recorder.2
• Set the HDMI Mode to AMP Mode (page 43).
• GENRE Press when listening to media contents
from a recorder.
The most appropriate listening mode is selected and
shown in the display. When the related genre could not
be determined, No Genre or Can’t use may be displayed
and the listening mode remains unchanged.
Tip
• Mainly used with Jukebox and MP3 sources.
• To use this function, you must have an HDMI Controlcompatible Pioneer HDD/DVD recorder connected via
HDMI, and have the HDMI Control function set to On.
Using the Sound Retriever
When audio data is removed during the MP3 or WMA
compression process, sound quality often suffers from
an uneven sound image. The Sound Retriever feature
employs new DSP technology that helps bring CD quality
sound back to compressed two channel audio by
restoring sound pressure and smoothing jagged artifacts
left over after compression.
Tip
Listening in stereo
You can listen to any source — stereo or multichannel —
in stereo. When playing a multichannel source, all
channels are downmixed to the front left/right speakers
and the subwoofer.
• SURR Press repeatedly until STEREO shows in the
display.
• This feature is effective when used together with the
Jukebox function of the HDD/DVD recorder.
SOUND
• RTRV Press while listening to a stereo source 3.
Press repeatedly to switch between:
• Retriever On — Switches the Sound Retriever on.
• Retriever Off — Switches the Sound Retriever off.
Note
1 You cannot use this function for the following audio streams:
• Dolby TrueHD: over 88.2 kHz
• DTS-HD: over 88.2 kHz or with the channel format of 2/0
• DTS-Express: with the channel format of 2/0
2 This function is available only for a Pioneer HDMI Control-compatible HDD/DVD recorder.
3 This setting cannot be used with multichannel sources. Also, in case of SACD, DTS-HD, DTS-Express, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, and
PCM (192 kHz/176.4 kHz), even stereo sources cannot be used.
33
En
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 34 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
Listening to your system
06
Listening with MCACC Effect
Adjusting the bass and treble
Listen to sound using the corrected acoustic field
settings obtained by MCACC.
Use the bass and treble controls to adjust the overall tone.
1
1
SOUND
SOUND
ENTER
2
ENTER
2
Press to open the sound menu.
Press to open the sound menu.
Select ‘Tone’ then press ENTER.1
Select ‘MCACC Effect’ then press ENTER.
ENTER
3
ENTER
3
Switch ’MCACC On’ or ‘MCACC Off’ then
press ENTER to confirm.
• When MCACC Effect is off, equalization, channel
delay, channel level and standing wave are set to off.
• When MCACC Effect is off, the channel delay and
channel level can be adjusted manually and the
settings stored separately from when MCACC Effect
is on.
• MCACC Effect is set to on automatically after Auto
MCACC setup is used.
Using Midnight, Loudness and Quiet
listening modes
The Midnight listening feature allows you to hear
effective surround sound of movies at low volume levels.
Select ‘Bass/Treble’ then press ENTER.
• Selecting Bass/Treble cancels the Midnight,
Loudness and Quiet listening modes. These modes
cannot be used at the same time.
ENTER
4
Use the / buttons to select ‘Bass’ or
’Treble’; use the / buttons to adjust the sound
then press ENTER to confirm.
• Bass and Treble can be adjusted from -6dB to +6dB.
• When the Bass or Treble is set to something other
than 0dB, the TONE indicator lights.
Adjusting sound delay
The Loudness listening feature can be used to get good
bass and treble from music sources at low volume levels.
Some monitors have a slight delay when showing video,
so the soundtrack will be slightly out of sync with the
picture. By adding a bit of delay, you can adjust the sound
to match the presentation of the video.
The Quiet listening feature reduces excessive bass or
treble in a sound source.
There are a total of 60 steps (levels) that you can adjust,
with a total range of 200 msec.
1
SOUND
ENTER
2
Press to open the sound menu.
1
SOUND
Press to open the sound menu.
ENTER
Select ‘Tone’ then press ENTER.1
ENTER
3
Select ‘Midnight’, ‘Loudness’ or ‘Quiet’
then press ENTER to confirm.2
• To cancel the Midnight, Loudness or Quiet listening
modes, select Bass/Treble.
2
Select ‘Sound Delay’ then press ENTER.
ENTER
3
Select the length of the delay in sound,
then press ENTER to confirm.
• This option is deactivated and not displayed if you
have AutoDelay set to On in HDMI Setup (see Setting
the Auto Delay on page 46).
Note
1 While playing back DTS-HD (over 88.2 kHz) or Dolby TrueHD (over 88.2 kHz) audio streams, you cannot select Tone if a mode other than Bass/
Treble is selected.
2 While playing back DTS-HD (over 88.2 kHz) or Dolby TrueHD (over 88.2 kHz) audio streams, you cannot select a mode other than Bass/Treble.
34
En
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 35 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
Listening to the radio
07
Chapter 7
Listening to the radio
Important
•
ENTER
To listen to the radio, press the FM/AM button
to set the remote control to FM/AM control mode. The
LCD screen on the remote control changes to the
FM/AM screen.
FM/AM
FM/AM
1
2
3
Listening to the radio
3
ENTER.
Choose ‘FM Auto/Mono’ then press
ENTER
4
Select ’FM Mono’ then press ENTER.
The mono indicator ( ) lights when the tuner is in mono
reception mode.
Select FM Auto above to switch back to auto-stereo
mode (the stereo indicator (
) lights when receiving a
stereo broadcast).
Improving poor AM sound
The tuner can receive both FM and AM broadcasts, and
lets you memorize your favorite stations so you don’t have
to manually tune in every time you want to listen.
The simplest way to improve the sound quality of AM
radio is to make sure that the TV in the room is switched
off. Also try changing the position and direction of the
AM loop antenna.
1 FM/AM Switch to the tuner, then press repeatedly to
select the FM or AM band.
The display shows the band and frequency.
Changing the noise cut mode
TUNE
+ Tune to a frequency.
2
There are three tuning modes — manual, auto, and highspeed:
If you find that the AM sound quality is bad even after
trying the above, you may be able to improve it using a
different noise cut mode. Just choose the one that
sounds best.
1
SETUP
Press after tuning to an AM radio station.
• Manual tuning – Press TUNE +/– repeatedly to
change the displayed frequency.
ENTER
• Auto tuning – Press and hold TUNE +/– until the
frequency display starts to move, then release. The
tuner will stop on the next station it finds. Repeat to
keep searching.
• High-speed tuning – Press and hold TUNE +/– until
the frequency display starts to move rapidly. Keep the
button held down until you reach the frequency you
want. If necessary, fine tune the frequency using the
manual tuning method.
Improving poor FM reception
If you’re listening to an FM station in stereo but the
reception is weak, you can improve the sound quality by
switching to mono.
1
SETUP
Press after tuning to an FM radio station.
2
Select ‘Tuner Setup’ then press ENTER.
ENTER
Choose ‘Noise Cut’ then press ENTER.
3
ENTER
Select a Noise cut mode (1, 2 or 3) then
4
press ENTER.
Memorizing stations
You can save up to 30 station presets so that you always
have easy access to your favorite stations without having
to tune in manually each time.
1 Tune to an FM or AM radio station.
Select mono or auto-stereo reception (FM) or the Noise
Cut mode (AM) as necessary. These settings are saved
along with the preset.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Tuner Setup’ then press ENTER.
2
SETUP
Press SETUP.
ENTER
3
Select ‘Tuner Setup’ then press ENTER.
35
En
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 36 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
Listening to the radio
07
Displaying RDS information
ENTER
4
Choose ‘ST.Memory’ then press ENTER.
You can display the different types of RDS information
available.2
ENTER
5
Select the station preset you want then
press ENTER.
DISP
•
Display the RDS information.
Each press changes the display as follows:
• Radio Text (RT) – Messages sent by the radio station.
For example, a talk radio station may provide a phone
number as RT.
Listening to station presets
1
2
Make sure the tuner function is selected.
-
ST
• Program Service Name (PS) – The name of the radio
station.
+
Select a station preset.
• Alternatively, use the number buttons to select a
preset directly.
• Program Type (PTY) – This indicates the kind of
program currently being broadcast.
• Search – PTY search (see below)
• Current tuner frequency
Using RDS
Radio Data System (RDS) is a system used by most FM
radio stations to provide listeners with various kinds of
information — the name of the station and the kind of
show they’re broadcasting, for example.
One feature of RDS is that you can search by type of
program. For example, you can search for a station that’s
broadcasting a show with the program type, Jazz.
You can search the following program types:1
News – News
Affairs – Current Affairs
Info – General Information
Sport – Sport
Educate – Educational
Drama – Radio plays, etc.
Culture – National or regional
culture, theater, etc.
Science – Science and
technology
Varied – Usually talk-based
material, such as quiz shows or
interviews
Pop M – Pop music
Rock M – Rock music
Easy M – Easy listening
Light M – ‘Light’ classical music
Classics – ‘Serious’ classical
music
Other M – Music not fitting
above categories
Weather – Weather reports
Finance – Stock market reports,
commerce, trading, etc.
Children – Programs for children
Social – Social affairs
Religion – Programs concerning
religion
Phone In – Public expressing
their views by phone
Travel – Holiday-type travel
rather than traffic
announcements
Leisure – Leisure interests and
hobbies
Jazz – Jazz
Country – Country music
Nation M – Popular music in a
language other than English
Oldies – Popular music from the
’50s and ’60s
Folk M – Folk music
Document – Documentary
Searching for RDS programs
You can search for a program type listed above.
1
FM/AM
Press to select the FM band.3
2 DISP Press repeatedly until ‘Search’ appears in the
display.
3
Select the program type you want to hear.
ENTER
4
Start the search.
The system searches the station presets for a match. If it
finds one, searching stops for five sec.
5 If you want to keep listening to the station, press
ENTER within the five seconds.
If you don’t press ENTER, searching resumes.
Note
1 In addition, there are three other program types, Test, Alarm, and No Type. Alarm and Test are used for emergency announcements. You
can’t search for these, but the tuner will switch automatically to this RDS broadcast signal. No Type appears when a program type cannot be
found.
2 • If any noise is picked up while displaying the RT scroll, some characters may be displayed incorrectly.
• If you see No Radio Text Data in the RT display, it means no RT data is sent from the broadcast station. The display will automatically switch
to the PS data display (if no PS data, the frequency is displayed).
• In the PTY display, No Data or No Type may be shown. In this case, the PS display is shown after a few seconds.
3 RDS is only possible in the FM band.
36
En
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 37 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
Surround sound settings
08
Chapter 8
Surround sound settings
1
Important
•
RCV Press to set the remote control to receiver
control mode in order to operate the receiver
subwoofer (make sure that the LCD displays the
RECEIVER screen, as shown below).
SETUP
Press SETUP.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Sound Setup’ then press ENTER.
ENTER
RECEIVER
SURR
ADV
SURR
F.S.
SURR
3
Select ‘ChannelLevel’, then press ENTER.
4
Use the / buttons to select a channel
or the / buttons to adjust the level of that
channel.
• You can adjust the level of each channel by ±10 dB.2
Using the Sound Setup menu
From the Sound Setup menu you can access all the
surround sound settings of the system.
5
During setup, the speakers are represented by the
following letters:
• L – Front left speaker
• C – Center speaker
• R – Front right speaker
• SR – Surround right speaker
• SL – Surround left speaker
• SW – Subwoofer
Channel level
ENTER
Press once when you’re finished.
• If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will
overwrite the settings you have made here.
Speaker distance setting1
The Auto MCACC feature (see page 30) should give you
the best surround sound setup. However you may find
that by further adjustment of the speaker distance
settings you can improve the surround sound in your
listening room.
Set the distance of each speaker from your normal
listening position.
setting1
The Auto MCACC feature (see page 30) should give you
the best surround sound setup. However you may find
that by further adjustment of the channel levels you can
improve the surround sound in your listening room.
ENTER
1
SETUP
Open the ‘Sound Setup’ menu.
ENTER
This method of setting the channel levels allows you to
listen to a source and adjust the levels of each playback
channel.
2
A further method of setting the channel levels is to use
the test tone method. See Adjusting the channel levels
using the test tone on page 39 for more on this.
3
Use the / buttons to select a speaker
or the / buttons to adjust the distance.
Each speaker can be adjusted from 0.1 m to 9.0 m.
4
Select ‘Distance’ then press ENTER.
ENTER
Press ENTER when you’re finished.
• If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will
overwrite the settings you have made here.
Note
1 When this function is set while MCACC Effect is on, the value for the same function adjusted with the Auto MCACC feature is overwritten.
When MCACC Effect is off, the value set here is applied, regardless of the value adjusted with the Auto MCACC feature. (The Auto MCACC
setting is not overwritten.)
2 The range of adjustment is limited when the volume level is set over 51.
37
En
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 38 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
Surround sound settings
08
Dynamic Range Control1
Dual mono setting2
When watching Dolby Digital or DTS material at low
volume, low level sounds — including some of the dialog
— can be difficult to hear properly. Using one of the
Dynamic Range Control (DRC) settings can help by
bringing up the low level sounds, while controlling high
level peaks.
Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital
soundtracks should be played. You can also use this
setting to switch the audio channel on DVD-RW discs
recorded with bilingual audio.
Dynamic Range Control works only with Dolby Digital
soundtracks and some DTS soundtracks.
1
ENTER
SETUP
Open the ‘Sound Setup’ menu.
ENTER
2
ENTER
1
SETUP
ENTER
2
Select ‘Dual Mono’, then press ENTER.
Open the ‘Sound Setup’ menu.
Select ‘D.R.C.’, then press ENTER.
3
Select a setting.
Select one of the following:
• CH1 Mono – Only channel 1 is played
• CH2 Mono – Only channel 2 is played
3
Select a setting.
Select one of the following:
• D.R.C. Auto – Only available for Dolby TrueHD
signals. Select D.R.C. High or D.R.C. Mid for signals
other than Dolby TrueHD.
• CH1/CH2 – Both channels are played through the
front speakers
4
ENTER
Press to exit.
• D.R.C. High – Dynamic range is reduced (loud
sounds are reduced in volume while quieter sounds
are increased)
• D.R.C. Mid – Mid setting
• D.R.C. Off – No dynamic range adjustment (use
when listening at higher volume)
4
ENTER
Press to exit.
Note
1 This setting is effective for the speaker output. A similar adjustment feature is available on the HDD/DVD recorder — see Audio DRC on
page 156.
2 This setting is effective for the speaker output. A similar adjustment feature is available on the HDD/DVD recorder — see Switching audio channels on page 111.
38
En
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 39 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
Surround sound settings
08
Using the Virtual Surround Back mode
This mode allows you to hear a virtual surround back
channel through your surround speakers. You can
choose to listen to sources with no surround back
channel information, or if the material sounds better in
the format (for example, 5.1) for which it was originally
encoded, you can have the receiver only apply this effect
to 6.1 encoded sources like Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES.1
ENTER
1
Adjusting the channel levels using
the test tone
If you prefer, you can set the channel levels using a test
tone as a reference, rather than playing a source (see
Channel level setting on page 37). A test tone is played
through each speaker in turn, allowing you to adjust the
level as it plays.
You can also adjust the channel levels for surround
sound using test tone.
Open the ‘Sound Setup’ menu.
SETUP
TEST
ENTER
2
Select ‘Virtual SB’, then press ENTER.
3
Select a setting.
Select one of the following:
• Vir.SB On – Virtual Surround Back is always used (for
example, on 5.1 encoded material)
• Vir.SB Auto – Virtual Surround Back is automatically
applied to 6.1 encoded sources (for example, Dolby
Digital EX or DTS-ES), DTS Neo:6 or Advanced
Surround mode
• Vir.SB Off – Virtual Surround Back mode is switched
off
4
ENTER
Press to exit.
LFE Attenuate
Some Dolby Digital and DTS audio sources include ultralow bass tones.
Set the LFE attenuator as necessary to prevent the ultralow bass tones from distorting the sound from the
speakers.
1 TONE Carry out tone testing.
The test tone is output from each speaker in turn.
Adjust the volume level below 50.
2
Adjust the channel level of a tune while it
is playing.
The aim is to adjust the levels so that you hear the test
tone at the same volume from each speaker. You can
adjust the level of each channel by ±10 dB.
• You can adjust the overall volume of test tone output
using the VOL +/– buttons (this does not affect the
channel level settings).
• Because of the ultra low frequencies the subwoofer
produces, it may sound quieter than it really is. We
suggest adjusting the subwoofer level while listening
to a source. See the method described in Channel
level setting on page 37.
3 ENTER Press to exit test tone setup once you have
finished.
• If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will
overwrite the settings you have made here.
The LFE is not limited when set to 0dB, which is the
recommended value. When set to -5dB, -10dB, -15dB or
-20dB, the LFE is limited by the respective degree. When
Off is selected, no sound is output from the LFE channel.
ENTER
1
SETUP
Open the ‘Sound Setup’ menu.
ENTER
2
Select ‘LFE ATT’, then press ENTER.
ENTER
3
confirm.
Adjust the setting then press ENTER to
Note
1 Depending on the input signal and the listening mode, the Virtual Surround Back mode may not be effective.
39
En
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 40 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
09
Other connections
Chapter 9
Other connections
Important
• When making or changing connections on the side
panel of this unit, be sure to switch power off and
disconnect the power cord from the wall socket.
After completing all connections, connect the power
cord to the wall socket.
You can also use the OPTICAL IN 1 jack to connect
external components when not using it for sound input
from a TV.
Connecting an analog audio component
You can use the ANALOG AUDIO IN jacks to connect an
analog audio component, such as a tape player.
Receiver subwoofer
Connecting auxiliary components
You can connect both analog and digital external audio
sources to this system. Digital audio sources include
digital satellite receivers, CD recorders, etc.
Side panel
We recommend using an HDMI cable to connect
sources that have HDMI terminals. For more information
see Connecting using HDMI on page 42.
L
R
To listen to audio from a TV, connect the TV’s audio cable
to one of the inputs on this unit.
Connecting for digital audio
This system has optical-type digital inputs. Use these to
connect external components, such as your MD or CD
recorder.
ANALOG
AUDIO IN
From Audio output
Tape player, MD, DAT, etc.
You can use the F.AUDIO input jack on the display unit
to easily playback audio from a digital audio player or PC.
Use a stereo mini-plug cable to connect a source to the
display unit.
Receiver subwoofer
• When you connect a cable to the F.AUDIO jack, this
unit’s input automatically switches to Front Audio In.
Side panel
Display unit
IN 1
IN 2
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
DISPLAY UNIT
SYSTEM
F.AUDIO
From digital audio
output (optical)
iPod
MCACC
SETUP MIC
F.AUDIO
MD, CD Recorder, etc.
• Connect the OPTICAL IN 2 jack on the side panel
to the optical output of an external playback
component.
These include digital components such as an MD player,
digital satellite, or a game system.
40
En
From analog
audio output
Digital audio player, etc.
Stereo mini-plug cable
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 41 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
Other connections
09
Connecting an iPod
You can use the iPod jack on the display unit to playback
music from an iPod. All operations can be carried out via
the iPod. Use the supplied iPod cable to connect an iPod
to this unit.
• When you connect an iPod, this unit’s input
automatically switches to iPod.
• Certain iPod models have connectors that are not
compatible with this unit.
Display unit
DISPLAY UNIT
SYSTEM
F.AUDIO
iPod
Listening to an external audio source
To listen to audio from a connected external component
on this unit, choose its input function on the remote
control. Some Pioneer products can be controlled via this
remote.
1 If the system isn’t already on, press RECEIVER
to switch on.
Also make sure that the external source (TV, satellite
receiver, etc.) is switched on.
LINE Select an audio input source.
2
Input sources are cycled through as shown below:
MCACC
SETUP MIC
Digital 1
Front Audio In
Digital 2
Analog
iPod
iPod
The LCD screen changes to that of the selected input
source.
iPod R
iPod cable
iPod
Music
>
Extras
>
Settings
>
Shuffle Songs
Backlight
3 Press the button for the appropriate connected
component.
When a connected component is not displayed on the
screen, or when you have connected a component not
manufactured by Pioneer, press RCV button to put the
remote control on the receiver subwoofer operation
screen.
4
If necessary, start playback of the external source.
MENU
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries.
41
En
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 42 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
09
Other connections
Connecting external antennas
About control out connections
For an external AM antenna, use 5 to 6 meters of vinylinsulated wire and set up either indoors or outdoors.
Leave the loop antenna connected.
Many Pioneer components support CONTROL
connections, by which you can use the remote controls
of any connected components by aiming them at the
sensor of just one component.
For an external FM antenna, use a PAL connector to hook
up an external FM antenna.
external FM antenna
Receiver subwoofer
When you use a remote control, the control signal is
passed along the chain to the appropriate component.
If you choose to use this feature, you must make sure that
you also have at least one set of HDMI or analog audio
jacks connected to another component for grounding
purposes.
• Using a cable with mono mini-plugs on either
side (sold separately), connect the CONTROL IN jack
on another Pioneer component to the CONTROL OUT
jack on the receiver subwoofer.
This will allow you to control the other component by
pointing its remote at the display unit supplied with this
receiver subwoofer.
Side panel
ANTENNA
AM LOOP
FM
UNBAL 75 Ω
AM Loop antenna
Connecting using HDMI
external AM antenna
PAL connector
Indoor antenna
(vinyl-coated Wire)
(5 m to 6 m)
Outdoor antenna
If you have an HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped
component, you can connect it to this receiver using a
commercially available HDMI cable.1
The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital
video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio that the
connected component is compatible with, including
DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, SACD, Blu-ray Disc, Video CD/
Super VCD, CD and MP3, etc.
Receiver subwoofer
HDMI
T
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1
HDMI
OUT
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1
SYSTEM
Rear panel
From HDMI output
HDMI/DVI-equipped component
Note
1 • An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High Bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a separate adaptor (DVI HDMI) to do so. A DVI connection, however, does not support
audio signals. Consult your local audio dealer for more information.
• This unit has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) Version 1.3a. Depending on the component you have
connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers. Also, when using a component with HDMI version 1.0, it is not possible to
output copy-controlled DVD-Audio CPPM sources from the HDMI connection.
• This unit supports SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio. To take advantage of these formats, however, make sure that
the component connected to this unit also supports the corresponding format.
42
En
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 43 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
Other connections
1 Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI IN 1 to 3
interconnect on this receiver subwoofer to an HDMI
output on your HDMI component.
Once this receiver subwoofer is properly connected to
your HDMI component, the HDMI indicator (red) lights
up on the display unit when you watch HDMI contents
2 Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI OUT
interconnect on this receiver subwoofer to an HDMI
interconnect on a HDMI-compatible display.
• The arrow on the cable connector body should be
facing right for correct alignment with the connector
on the player.
3 Use the HDMI 1 to 3 button to select the HDMI input
you’ve connected to (for example, HDMI 2).
You can also use the display unit INPUT SELECTOR to
carry out this operation.
• Set the HDMI Mode in HDMI mode setting below to
Through Mode if you want to hear HDMI audio
output from your TV or plasma television (no sound
will be heard from this receiver).
• If the video signal does not appear on your TV or
plasma television, try adjusting the resolution
settings on your component or display.
HDMI mode setting
09
ENTER
4
Adjust the setting then press ENTER to
confirm.
• AMP Mode – Output an HDMI audio signal from this
unit.
• Through Mode – Output an HDMI audio signal from
a TV or plasma television.
The HDMI THROUGH indicator lights.
About HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) supports
both video and audio on a single digital connection for
use with DVD players, DTV, set-top boxes, and other AV
devices. HDMI was developed to provide the
technologies of High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection (HDCP) as well as Digital Visual Interface
(DVI) in one specification. HDCP is used to protect digital
content transmitted and received by DVI-compliant
displays.
HDMI has the capability to support standard, enhanced,
or high-definition video plus standard to multi-channel
surround-sound audio. HDMI features include uncompressed digital video, a bandwidth of up to 2.2 gigabytes
per second (with HDTV signals), one connector (instead
of several cables and connectors), and communication
between the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.
Specifies the routing of the HDMI audio signal out of this
receiver subwoofer (amp) or through to a TV or plasma
television. You cannot use a number of sound functions
of this unit when HDMI Mode is set to Through Mode.
Important
•
1
Press to set the remote control to receiver
control mode in order to operate the receiver
subwoofer (make sure that the LCD displays the
RECEIVER screen).
RCV
SETUP
Press SETUP.
ENTER
2
Select ‘HDMI Setup’ then press ENTER.
ENTER
3
Select ‘HDMI Mode’, then press ENTER.
43
En
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 44 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
10
HDMI Control
Chapter 10
HDMI Control
By connecting this unit to an HDMI Control-compatible
Pioneer plasma television or the HDD/DVD recorder with
an HDMI cable, you can control this unit from the remote
control of a connected plasma television, as well as have
the connected plasma television automatically change
inputs in response to operations carried out on this unit.
Refer to the operating instructions for your plasma
television for more information about which operations
can be carried out by connecting via HDMI cable.
• You cannot use this function with components that
do not support HDMI Control.
Making the HDMI Control connections
You can use synchronized operation for a connected
plasma television and up to three other components
(including a maximum of two recorders or players).
Be sure to connect the plasma television’s audio cable to
the audio input of this unit.
• If you use a commercially available HDMI cable,
check whether the cable supports the HDMI 1.3
standard. Otherwise, the HDMI Control function may
not operate properly.
• We cannot guarantee this unit will work with HDMI
Control-compatible components other than those
made by Pioneer.
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
AC IN
Important
•
ANTENNA(DIGITAL)
IN
OUT
5V
RCV Press to set the remote control to receiver
control mode in order to operate the receiver
subwoofer (make sure that the LCD displays the
RECEIVER screen, as shown below).
RECEIVER
SURR
ADV
SURR
F.S.
SURR
HDMI OUT
COAXIAL
30 mA
HDD/DVD Recorder
SDVR-LX70D
HDMI
OUT
Receiver subwoofer
Rear panel
Side panel
HDMI
OUT
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1
ANTENNA
L
AM LOOP
IN 1
IN 2
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
SYSTEM
R
FM
UNBAL 75 Ω
ANALOG
AUDIO IN
or
From digital audio
output (optical)
To HDMI input
HDMI Control-compatible
Pioneer plasma television
44
En
From Audio output
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 45 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
HDMI Control
10
• Connect the plasma television directly to this unit.
Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or
an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can cause
operational errors.
Important
• When connecting this system or changing
connections, be sure to switch the power off and
disconnect the power cord from the wall socket.
After completing all connections, connect the power
cords to the wall socket.
• After connecting this unit to an AC outlet, a 15-second
initialization process begins. You cannot carry out
any operations during initialization. The HDMI
indicator on the display unit blinks during
initialization, and you can turn this unit on once it has
stopped blinking.
HDMI Control-compatible
Pioneer plasma television
HDMI input
HDMI cable
HDMI output
Other amps
or AV converter
• To get the most out of this function, we recommend
that you connect your HDMI component not to a
plasma television but rather directly to the HDMI
terminal on this unit.
HDMI input
HDMI cable
HDMI OUT
Setting the HDMI options
Receiver subwoofer
• Only connect components you intend to use as a
source to the HDMI input of this unit. Interrupting a
direct connection with other amps or an AV converter
(such as an HDMI switch) can cause operational errors.
You must adjust the settings of this unit as well as HDMI
Control-compatible connected components in order to
make use of the HDMI Control function. For more
information see the operating instructions for each
component.
Setting the HDMI Control mode
Choose whether to set this unit’s HDMI Control function
On or Off. You will need to set it to Control On to use the
HDMI Control function.
• When using a TV not manufactured by Pioneer, put
this setting to Control Off.
HDMI Control-compatible
Pioneer plasma television
HDMI input
1
SETUP
Press SETUP.
HDMI cable
HDMI OUT
ENTER
Receiver subwoofer
2
Select ‘HDMI Setup’ then press ENTER.
ENTER
3
Select ‘HDMI Ctrl’, then press ENTER.
HDMI IN
HDMI output HDMI cable
Other amps or AV converter
ENTER
4
Adjust the setting then press ENTER to
confirm.
• Control On – Enables the HDMI Control function.
When this unit’s power is turned off and you have a
supported source begin playback while using the
HDMI Control function, the audio and video output
from the HDMI connection are output from the
plasma television.
• Control Off – The HDMI Control is disabled.
Synchronized operations cannot be used. When this
unit’s power is turned off, audio and video of sources
connected via HDMI are not output.
45
En
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 46 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
HDMI Control
10
Setting the Auto Delay
Important
This feature automatically corrects the audio-to-video
delay between components connected with an HDMI
cable. The audio delay time is set depending on the
operational status of the display connected with an HDMI
cable. The audio delay time is automatically adjusted
according to the video delay time.
Before using synchronization
1
Once you have finished all connections and settings, you
must:
SETUP
Press SETUP.
1
ENTER
2
Select ‘HDMI Setup’ then press ENTER.
ENTER
3
Select ‘Auto Delay’, then press ENTER.
ENTER
4
Select ‘A.Delay On’ or ‘A.Delay Off’ then
press ENTER to confirm.
Tip
• This feature is only available when the connected
display supports the automatic audio/video
synchronizing capability (‘lip-sync’) for HDMI or
HDMI Control. If you find the automatically set delay
time unsuitable, set A.Delay to Off and adjust the
sound delay settings manually (page 34).
Audio input settings from Plasma televisions
(TV Input)
To listen to audio from a plasma television on this device,
you will need to connect an audio cable other than an
HDMI cable. From this menu, set the audio input to that
which you would like to connect. Press TV on the remote
control to switch this unit to the input source selected
here. This setting is changed to the selected input and
the audio from the plasma television is output from this
device.
Select from inputs Digital 1, Digital 2 and Analog.
1
SETUP
• You must set this setting to activate the HDMI Control
function.
Press SETUP.
Put all components into standby mode.
2 Turn the power ON for all components, with the
power for the plasma television being turned on
last.
3 Choose the HDMI input to which the TV is
connected to this unit, and see if video output from
connected components displays properly on the
screen or not.
Synchronized amp mode
Synchronized amp mode begins once you carry out an
operation for the plasma television. For more
information, see the operating instructions of your
plasma television.
Synchronized amp mode operations
By connecting a component to this unit with an HDMI
cable you can use synchronized amp mode, which allows
you to synchronize the following operations:
• Displays on the plasma television when you mute or
adjust the volume of this unit.
• The input of this unit is automatically changed when
playback occurs on a connected component.
• Even if you change this unit’s input to a device that is
not connected by HDMI, the synchronized amp mode
remains in effect.
• By pressing GENRE when listening to a source from
a supplied HDD/DVD recorder, the most appropriate
listening mode is automatically selected (page 33).
Canceling synchronized amp mode
ENTER
2
Select ‘System Setup’ then press ENTER.
ENTER
3
Select ‘TV Input’, then press ENTER.
ENTER
4
confirm.
46
En
Adjust the setting then press ENTER to
If you cancel synchronized amp mode while connected
via HDMI to a plasma television or while you are watching
a TV programme, the power for this unit is turned off.
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 47 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
Additional information
11
Chapter 11
Additional information
Important
•
RCV Press to set the remote control to receiver
control mode in order to operate the receiver
subwoofer (make sure that the LCD displays the
RECEIVER screen, as shown below).
After selecting Sleep On, you can press SLEEP again to
check how much time is left. Each line indicates
approximately 12 minutes (remaining):
Sleep --- --
RECEIVER
SURR
ADV
SURR
F.S.
SURR
Dimming the display
You can choose to dim the display of the display unit if you
find it too bright.1
1
SETUP
Press SETUP.
You can use the supplied remote to control your TV. To be
able to use this feature you first have to program the
remote with a maker code from the table on the following
page.
1
TV
Set the input to TV.
2 Press and hold the TV button and press SETUP.
The TV preset screen is shown on the remote control, and
the current maker code is displayed on the LCD screen.
TV PRESET
ENTER
2
Setting up the remote to control your TV
Select ‘System Setup’ then press ENTER.
ENTER
3
Select ‘Dimmer’ then press ENTER.
ENTER
4
Select ‘Dimmer Light’ or ’Dimmer Dark’
then press ENTER to confirm.
Maker code
351
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CLEAR
0
ENTER
Number buttons
ENTER
EXIT
Setting the sleep timer
The sleep timer switches off the receiver subwoofer after
a specified time so you can fall asleep without worrying
about it.2
• SLEEP Press to select an option.
Choose between the following options:
• Sleep On – Switches off after about an hour
• Sleep Off – Cancels the sleep timer
3 Use the number buttons to input the maker code
for your TV, and press ENTER.
See the table on the next page for the list of maker codes.
If there is more than one code given for your make, input
the first one in the list.
• If the maker’s name of your TV doesn’t appear in the
table, you will not be able to use this remote to control
your TV.
4 Point the remote towards your TV and press
SOURCE to check that the remote works with your
TV.
If the remote is set up correctly, the TV should switch off.
If it doesn’t and there is another code given for your
maker, repeat step 1 with a new code.
Note
1 The display of the display unit dims when the sleep timer is set, regardless of this setting.
2 The display of the display unit dims when the sleep timer is set. The HDD/DVD recorder does not automatically switch off with the sleep timer.
47
En
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 48 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
11
Additional information
TV Preset code list
Resetting the system
Please note that there are cases where only certain functions
may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code, or
the codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the
model that you are using.
Use this procedure to reset all system settings to the
factory default.
Manufacturer Code(s)
2 Press and hold INPUT SELECTOR then press the
STANDBY/ON button on the display unit.
The next time you switch on, all the system settings
should be reset.
AIWA 006
AKAI 009, 010
ALBA 011
BESTER 015
BLAUPUNKT 016, 017
BLUE SKY 018
BRANDT 019
BUSH 022
CLATRONIC 023
DAEWOO 035, 036, 037
DUAL 039,040
FERGUSON 048, 048, 050
FIRSTLINE 051
FISHER 053
FRABA 054
FUNAI 056, 058, 059
GOLDSTAR 070
GOODMANS 071, 072, 073
GRUNDIG 074, 075, 076
ICE 084
IRRADIO 085
ITT 086, 087
JVC 093, 094, 095, 096
KENDO 098
LOEWE 103, 104, 105
MARK 116
MATSUI 117, 118
MEDION 119
MITSUBISHI 123, 124, 125
MIVER 127
NEC 130
NOKIA 086, 087, 132, 133, 134, 135, 136
NORDMENDE 137, 138, 139
OCEANIC 135, 136
OKANO 140
ONWA 141
PANASONIC 146, 147
PHILIPS 155
PHONOLA 157
RADIO 163
RADIOLA 168
SABA 176, 177, 178, 179, 180
SAMSUNG 185, 186
SANYO 190, 191, 192, 193, 194
SCHNEIDER 199, 200, 201, 202
SHARP 208, 209
SIEMENS 212
SONY 215
TATUNG 221
TELEFUNKEN 222, 223, 224, 225
THOMSON 226, 227
THORN 228
TOSHIBA 231, 232
UNIVERSUM 235
W.HOUSE 239
WATSON 244
YAMAHA 245, 246, 247, 248, 249
PIONEER 001, 002
48
En
1
Switch the system on.
Installation and maintenance
Hints on installation
We want you to enjoy using this system for years to come,
so please bear in mind the following points when
choosing a location:
Do...
Use in a well-ventilated room.
Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table, shelf or
stereo rack.
Don’t...
Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or humidity,
including near radiators and other heat-generating
appliances.
Place on a window sill or other place where the system will
be exposed to direct sunlight.
Use in an excessively dusty or damp environment.
Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other component in
your stereo system that becomes hot in use.
Use near a television or monitor as you may experience
interference — especially if the television uses an indoor
antenna.
Use in a kitchen or other room where the system may be
exposed to smoke or steam.
Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with cloth — this may
prevent proper cooling of the system unit.
Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large enough
to support all four of the system unit’s feet.
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 49 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
Additional information
Surround sound formats
Below is a brief description of the main surround sound
formats you’ll find on DVDs, satellite, cable and terrestrial
broadcasts, and video cassettes.
Dolby
The Dolby technologies are explained below. See
www.dolby.com for more detailed information.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital audio coding system
widely used in cinemas, and in the home for DVD and digital
broadcast soundtracks. It can deliver up to six discrete audio
channels, comprising five full range channels and a special
LFE (low frequency effects) channel used mainly for deep,
rumbling sound effects; hence the term “5.1-channel” Dolby
Digital.
In addition to the format features above, Dolby Digital
decoders offer downmixing for compatibility with mono,
stereo and Dolby Pro Logic audio from a number of bit rates
and channels. Another feature, called Dialog Normalization,
attenuates programs based on the average level of dialog in
a program relative to its peak level (also known as Dialnorm)
in order to achieve uniform playback level.
Dolby Pro Logic II and Dolby Surround
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is an improved version of the Dolby Pro
Logic II (and Dolby Pro Logic) decoding system. Using the
innovative “steering logic” circuit, this system extracts
surround sound from sources as follows:
• Dolby Pro Logic – 4.1 channel sound (mono surround)
from any stereo source
• Dolby Pro Logic II – 5.1 channel sound (stereo
surround) from any stereo source
With two channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is
generated by bass management in the receiver.
Dolby Surround is an encoding system which embeds
surround sound information within a stereo soundtrack,
which a Dolby Pro Logic decoder can then use for enhanced
surround listening with greater sound detail.
Dolby Digital Plus
11
Digital, the multi-channel audio standard for DVD and HD
broadcasts worldwide, Dolby Digital Plus was designed for
the next-generation A/V receivers but remains fully
compatible with all current A/V receivers.
Dolby Digital Plus delivers multi-channel audio programs of
up to 7.1 channels (*) and supports multiple programs in a
single encoded bitstream with the maximum bit rate
potential of up to 6 Mbps and the maximum bit rate
performance of up to 3 Mbps on HD DVD and 1.7 Mbps on
Blu-ray Disc, and it outputs Dolby Digital bitstreams for
playback on existing Dolby Digital systems. Dolby Digital
Plus can accurately reproduce the sound originally intended
by directors and producers.
It also features multi-channel sound with discrete channel
output, interactive mixing and streaming capability in
advanced systems. Supported by High-Definition Media
Interface (HDMI), a single-cable digital connection is
possible for high-definition audio and video.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is the next-generation lossless encoding
technology developed for high-definition optical discs in the
upcoming era. Dolby TrueHD delivers tantalizing sound that
is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, unlocking the true
high-definition entertainment experience on high-definition
optical discs in the next generation. When coupled with highdefinition video, Dolby TrueHD offers an unprecedented
home theater experience with stunning sound and highdefinition picture.
It supports bit rates of up to 18 Mbps and records up to 8 fullrange channels (*) individually with 24-bit/96 kHz audio. It
also features extensive metadata including dialogue
normalization and dynamic range control. Supported by
High-Definition Media Interface (HDMI), a single-cable
digital connection is possible for high-definition audio and
video.
* HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc standards currently limit their
maximum number of audio channels to eight, whereas
Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD support more than
eight audio channels.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”,
“Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
DTS
The DTS technologies are explained below. See
www.dtstech.com for more detailed information.
Dolby Digital Plus is the next-generation audio technology
for all high-definition programming and media. It combines
the efficiency to meet future broadcast demands with the
power and flexibility to realize the full audio potential
expected in the upcoming high-definition era. Built on Dolby
49
En
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 50 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
11
Additional information
DTS Digital Surround
DTS 96/24
DTS Digital Surround is a 5.1-channel audio coding system
from DTS Inc. now widely used for DVD-Video, DVD-Audio,
5.1 music discs, digital broadcasts, and video games. It can
deliver up to six discrete audio channels, comprising five full
range channels, including an LFE channel. Higher sound
quality is achieved through the use of a low compression
rate, and high rates of transmittance during playback.
DTS 96/24 is an extension of the original DTS Digital
Surround which offers high quality 96 kHz/24-bit audio using
a DTS 96/24 decoder. This format is also fully backward
compatible with all existing decoders. This means that DVD
players can play this software using a conventional DTS 5.1
channel decoder.
DTS-EXPRESS
DTS-ES
DTS-ES (the ES stands for Extended Surround) is a decoder
that is capable of decoding both DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 and
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 encoded sources. DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
gives ‘true’ 6.1 channel sound, with a completely separate
(discrete) surround back channel. DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 has a
surround back channel matrixed into the surround left/right
channels. Both sources are also compatible with a
conventional DTS 5.1 channel decoder.
DTS Neo:6
DTS Neo:6 can generate 6.1 channel surround sound from
any matrixed stereo source (such as video or TV) and from 5.1
channel sources. It uses both the channel information
already encoded into the source, as well as its own
processing to determine channel localization (with two
channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is generated by
bass management in the receiver). Two modes (Cinema and
Music) are available using DTS Neo:6 with two channel
sources.
DTS-EXPRESS is a low-bitrate encoding technology
supporting up to 5.1 channels with fixed data transfer rates.
This format is incorporated with sub audio on HD DVD and
secondary audio on Blu-ray Disc while boasting the potential
applicability to upcoming broadcasts and memory audio
contents.
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is a technology that delivers master
audio sources recorded in a professional studio to listeners
without any loss of data, preserving audio quality. DTS-HD
Master Audio adopts variable data transfer rates, facilitating
data transfer to the maximum rate of 24.5 Mbps in the
Blu-ray disc format, 18.0 Mbps in the HD-DVD format, which
by far exceeds that of a standard DVD. These high data
transfer rates enable lossless transmission of 96 kHz/24-bit
7.1-channel audio sources without deteriorating the quality
of the original sound. DTS-HD Master Audio is an
irreplaceable technology that can reproduce sound faithfully
as intended by the creator of music or movies.
“DTS” is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. and “DTS-HD
Master Audio” is a trademark of DTS, Inc.
Troubleshooting
Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with
this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other
components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks
listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.
• If the system does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the plug from
the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.
• If there is no sound or no multichannel sound from the SDVR-LX70D HDD/DVD recorder, try setting the recorder’s
audio-related settings back to their defaults — see The Initial Setup menu on page 152.
General
50
En
Problem
Remedy
The power does not turn on, or
switches off suddenly (an error
message may be displayed at
startup). Or, the display
disappears suddenly and no
sound is output (with the
POWER ON indicator (Blue)
and the HDMI indicator (Red)
lit up).
• Leave the unit plugged in, wait for one minute, then switch back on.
• Make sure there are no loose strands of wire touching the unit. This could cause the
system to shut off automatically.
• Check that the speakers are connected correctly.
• Make sure there is enough space for ventilation around the receiver subwoofer.
• Make sure the voltage of the mains power source is correct for the model.
• Try reducing the volume level.
• If the problem persists, take it to your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your
dealer for servicing.
• Do not block the air intake opening on the bottom as well as the air exhaust opening on
the back of this unit.
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 51 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
Additional information
Problem
Remedy
No sound is output when an
input function is selected.
• When playing back a source on the supplied HDD/DVD recorder, make sure that the
settings for Audio Out (page 155), and the HDMI Output under Audio Output Setting
(page 159) are all at their default values.
• If you’re using the line input, make sure the component is connected correctly and the
volume level of your external component (i.e. a portable player, etc.) is adjusted (see
Connecting auxiliary components on page 40).
• Turn up the volume.
• No audio is output from the speakers connected to this unit if HDMI Mode is set to
Through Mode (page 43).
• No audio is output if a DVI component is connected via HDMI.
• Press MUTE on the remote control to turn muting off.
No sound from surround
speaker.
• Refer to Channel level setting on page 37 to check the speaker levels.
• Check that you haven’t selected the Stereo mode (see Listening in surround sound on
page 31).
• Connect the speakers properly (refer to Connecting up on page 8).
• Verify the audio output and HDMI settings of your external component when connecting
an external component via an optical digital cable or HDMI cable.
11
Can’t operate using the remote • Replace the batteries (Putting the batteries in the remote control on page 26).
control.
• Operate within 7 m, 30° of the remote sensor ( Using the remote control on page 26).
• Remove any obstacles or operate from another position.
• Avoid exposing the remote sensor on the front panel to direct light.
• For operating the HDD/DVD recorder, make sure that the control cable and HDMI cable
are connected (page 13).
• For operating the other Pioneer component connected to the CONTROL OUT jack of this
receiver subwoofer, make sure that the control cable and either an HDMI or analog audio
cable are connected (page 42).
Tuner
Problem
Remedy
Considerable noise in radio
broadcasts.
• Connect the AM antenna (refer to Connecting up on page 8) and adjust the direction and
position for best reception. You may also connect an additional internal or external AM
antenna (refer to Connecting external antennas on page 42).
• Fully extend the FM wire antenna, position for best reception, and secure to a wall. You
may also connect an outdoor FM antenna (see Connecting external antennas on page 42).
• Turn off other equipment that may be causing the noise or move it further away.
Auto tuning does not pick up
some stations.
• The radio signal is weak. Auto tuning will only detect radio stations with a good signal.
For more sensitive tuning, connect an outdoor antenna.
HDMI
Symptom
Remedy
No picture or sound.
• This receiver is HDCP-compatible. Check that the components you are connecting are
also HDCP-compatible.
• Depending on the connected source component, it’s possible that it will not work with
this receiver (even if it is HDCP-compatible).
• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your
monitor, please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for
support.
No sound, or sound suddenly
ceases.
• Check that the HDMI Mode setting is set to AMP Mode/Through Mode.
• If the component is a DVI device, use a separate connection for the audio.
• Check the audio output settings of the source component.
51
En
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 52 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
11
Additional information
Displayed Messages
52
En
Message
Description
192kHz PCM
SACD
DTS-HD
DTS Express
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby D+
These messages are displayed when you operate a function incompatible with the audio
source being played back.
No MIC
Displays when you press MCACC when the MCACC setup mic is not connected.
Muting
Displays when you press TEST TONE or MCACC while this unit is muted.
2ch Only
An operation is prohibited because it is only applicable to 2 channel sources, while the
current source is a multichannel source.
Exit
Appears when a menu is automatically exited after a set period of inactivity.
HDMI Through
Displays when you change the Listening Mode, the volume level, or some sound settings
when the HDMI Mode is set to Through Mode.
Unknown
The genre information for contents being played back on the HDD/DVD recorder cannot be
obtained.
No Genre
There is no genre set for contents being played back on the HDD/DVD recorder.
HDMI C.ERR 2C*
The connected component is not compatible with synchronized genre mode.
Can’t use
• You tried to use Genre Sync Mode for a source component that does not support this
function.
• The source component is in a situation where Genre Sync Mode cannot be used.
• You tried to use Genre Sync Mode when the input source of this unit is a source other
than HDMI.
• The operation is forbidden due to the surround settings.
• When the volume level is over 51, some functions are restricted.
HDMI C.ERR 1**
Check if the HDMI cable is properly connected. If the cable is properly connected, this unit
may be damaged. In such an event, please contact a Pioneer-authorized service center or
your nearest dealer.
Noisy!
Background noise is too high to complete MCACC setup successfully.
Error MIC!
An error occurred during MCACC setup because the microphone is not connected or is
not connected properly.
Error Speaker!
An error occurred during MCACC setup because the speakers are not connected or are
not connected properly.
Over Temp
Try lowering the volume. If this problem is not fixed by removing and inserting the power
cable, this unit may be damaged. In such an event, please contact a Pioneer-authorized
service center or your nearest dealer.
OC Error1
OC Error2
Check whether the speaker cables are short-circuited. If the error message continues to be
displayed, contact your Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer for servicing.
*** BackUpERR
Contact your Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer for servicing.
01SX-SW70SW_EN.book 53 ページ 2007年7月17日 火曜日 午後8時28分
Additional information
11
SSP-LX70ST Satellite Speaker
Specifications
(Front/center speakers x2, Surround speakers x2)
•
SX-LX70SW Audio Multi-channel Receiver Subwoofer
•
Amplifier section
RMS Power Output (8 channel output):
Front, Center, Surround (6 channel). . . 50 W per channel
(1 kHz, 10 % T.H.D., 8 Ω)
Dual Subwoofer (2 channel) . . . . . . .100 W (50 W+ 50 W)
(100 Hz, 10 % T.H.D., 8 Ω)
•
FM tuner section
Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Ω, unbalanced
•
AM tuner section
Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 kHz to 1602 kHz
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loop antenna
Front/center speakers
Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed-box bookshelf type
(magnetically shielded)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 cm 1-way system
Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 cm cone type x3
Nominal impedance
Front channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Ω
Center channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Ω
Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Hz to 20 kHz
Maximum input power
Front channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 W
Center channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 W
Dimensions . . . .122.5 mm (W) x 89.5 mm (H) x 104 mm (D)
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5 kg
•
Surround speakers
Enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Bass-reflex floor type
(magnetically shielded)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 cm 1-way system
Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 cm cone type x2
Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Ω
Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Hz to 500 Hz
Maximum Input Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 W x2
Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed-box bookshelf type
(magnetically shielded)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 cm 1-way system
Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 cm cone type x2
Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Ω
Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Hz to 20 kHz
Maximum input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 W
Dimensions . . . .122.5 mm (W) x 89.5 mm (H) x 104 mm (D)
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.44 kg
•
Accessories
•
Subwoofer section
Input/Output section
HDMI terminal
input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 pin x3
output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 pin (5 V, 100 mA)
Other connector
System connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 pin
Audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Optical x2 (Digital)
RCA (2 pin) (Analog)
Control output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini jack x2
Display unit
System connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 pin
Front Audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Mini jack
MCACC input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Mini jack
iPod input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 pin (12 V, 420 mA)
•
Miscellaneous
Power requirements . . . . . . . AC 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 W
Power consumption in standby
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.39 W (HDMI Control ON)
0.29 W (HDMI Control OFF)
Dimensions . . . . . . 245 mm (W) x 409 mm (H) x 600 mm (D)
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.8 kg
•
Accessory box (AS-LX70):
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
AA/LR6 alkaline batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Power cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Microphone (for Auto MCACC setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
HDMI cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Control cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Display cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Optical digital cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
iPod cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
G-LINK™ cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
RF antenna cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
These operating instructions
•
Receiver subwoofer (SX-LX70SW) box:
Cleaning cloth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
•
Satellite Speakers (SSP-LX70ST) box:
Speaker cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Speaker bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Non-skid pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Note
• Specifications and design subject to possible
modification without notice, due to improvements.
53
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 54 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Section Two
HDD/DVD Recorder
SDVR-LX70D
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 55 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Section Two
Contents
01 Before you start
07 Playback
Symbols used in this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Disc/content format playback compatibility . . . . . . . 57
About the internal hard disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Disc Navigator with recordable discs
and the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Disc Navigator with
playback-only discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanning discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Play Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying and switching subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching DVD and DivX soundtracks . . . . . . . . . .
Switching audio channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying disc information on-screen . . . . . . . . . .
02 Recorder connections
Connecting a TV antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Easy connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver . . . . .
Connecting an external decoder box (1) . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting an external decoder box (2) . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a DV camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plugging in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
62
62
63
64
65
65
66
67
67
03 Getting started
Switching on and setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
For users receiving digital broadcast services . . . . . 70
Setting up the GUIDE Plus+® system . . . . . . . . . . . 71
04 Using the GUIDE Plus+ electronic programme
guide
The GUIDE Plus+ system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the GUIDE Plus+ system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . .
74
74
76
83
05 Using the digital electronic programme guide
The Digital EPG system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Digital EPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting timer programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other useful EPG functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
85
86
86
90
06 Recording
About DVD recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
About HDD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Recorded audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Restrictions on video recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Using the built-in A.TV and D.TV tuners . . . . . . . . . . 93
Setting the picture quality/recording time . . . . . . . . 95
Basic recording from the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
About timer recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Timer recording FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Simultaneous recording and playback
(Chase Play). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Recording from an external component . . . . . . . . . 100
Playing your recordings on other DVD players . . . . 101
Initializing recordable DVD discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
DVD-RW Auto Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
103
103
106
107
108
109
109
109
111
111
111
112
112
08 Playing and recording from a DV camcorder
Playing from a DV camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Recording from a DV camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
About DV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
09 Editing
Editing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
The Disc Navigator screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
10 Copying and backup
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
One Touch Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Copy Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using disc backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
127
127
128
132
11 Using the Jukebox
Copying music to the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying files via USB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing music from the Jukebox . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the display style of the Jukebox . . . . . . .
Copying albums/tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing the HDD Jukebox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
134
135
137
139
139
139
12 The PhotoViewer
Locating JPEG picture files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the display style of the PhotoViewer. . . .
Playing a slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reloading files from a disc or USB device . . . . . . .
Importing files to the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting multiple files or folders. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying files to a DVD-R/-RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying selected files to a DVD-R/-RW . . . . . . . . .
Editing files on the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
140
141
141
142
142
143
143
144
144
146
55
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 56 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Section Two
13 The Disc Setup menu
Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Initialize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Finalize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Optimize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Initialize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
14 The Video Adjust menu
Setting the picture quality for TV and
external input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Setting the picture quality for disc playback . . . . . . 150
15 The Initial Setup menu
Using the Initial Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Selecting other languages for language options . . . 162
Using Software Update (Digital tuner) . . . . . . . . . . 162
16 Additional information
Minimum copying times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Manual recording modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
If the picture freezes and the front panel and
remote control buttons stop working . . . . . . . . . . . 169
On-screen displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Front panel displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Country/Area code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Handling discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Cleaning the pickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Cleaning the recorder’s exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Moving the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Resetting the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Specifications (SDVR-LX70D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
56
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 57 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Before you start
01
Chapter 1
Before you start
Symbols used in this manual
The following icons are provided to help you quickly
identify which instructions you need for which kind of
disc.
HDD
HDD
DVD
Any type of DVD disc (recordable or
playback only), finalized or not.
DVD-Video
Disc/content format playback
compatibility
Compatible media
• DVD-RW ver. 1.1 / 1x / 1x to 2x, ver. 1.2 / 2x to 4x / 2x
to 6x
• DVD-R ver. 2.0 /1x / 1x to 4x / 1x to 8x / 1x to 16x,
ver. 2.1 / 1x to 8x / 1x to 16x
• DVD+RW 1x to 2.4x / 1x to 4x / 3.3x to 8x
• DVD+R 1x to 2.4x / 1x to 4x / 1x to 8x / 1x to 16x
Commercially produced DVD, finalized
Video mode DVD-R/-RW.
DVD (Video)
Video mode DVD-R/-RW (unfinalized)
DVD (VR)
VR mode DVD-R/-RW
DVD+R
DVD+R
DVD+RW
DVD+RW
DVD-RAM
DVD-RAM
• DVD-RAM ver. 2.0 / 2x, ver. 2.1 / 2x / 2x to 3x / 2x to 5x,
ver. 2.2 / 2x / 2x to 3x / 2x to 5x
• DVD-R DL ver. 3.0 / 2x to 4x / 2x to 8x
• DVD+R DL 2.4x / 2.4x to 8x
Note that older models of DVD recorders and DVD writers
may reject DVD-RW ver. 1.2 discs and/or corrupt the data
on the disc. If you want to share DVD-RW discs between
this recorder and an older recorder/writer, we
recommend using ver. 1.1 discs.
The following table shows older Pioneer DVD recorders’
limited compatibility with DVD-RW ver. 1.2 discs.
Model
CD
Video CD
Audio CD
Video CD
DVR-7000
DVR-3100/DVR-5100H
Playable
Yes*1,2,3
*1
Yes
Recordable
No
No
*1
Super VCD
Super VCD
Discs should be finalized in this recorder before playing. Unfinalized
VR mode and Video mode discs may not play.
Cannot read the CPRM information will show in the display when
you load a disc. However, this will not affect playback.
*3
Copy-once protected disc titles will not play.
*2
WMA/MP3
WMA or MP3 files
DivX
DivX files
ALL
All of the above
Readable file system
This recorder can play DVDs recorded under the
following file systems1: ISO 9660*, UDF 1.02, UDF 1.50,
UDF 2.00, UDF 2.01.
* ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. Romeo and Joliet file
systems are both compatible with this recorder.
Note
1 • Depending on the recording technique used, even files recorded in compatible file systems may not play correctly.
• MP3/WMA/DivX files can be played back when recorded onto a DVD that contains no video titles and uses the UDF 1.02, UDF 1.50, UDF 2.01
or ISO 9660 file systems.
57
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 58 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
01
Before you start
HDD/DVD Recording and playback compatibility
This recorder can play and record all widely-used DVD disc types, and additionally provides HDD functionality. The
table below shows some specific compatibility differences between the different disc types.
HDD
Marks used in this manual
HDD
DVD-R
DVD (VR)
DVD-RW
DVD (Video)
*1
DVD (VR)
DVD (Video)
*1
*2
DVD+R
DVD
+RW
DVD
-RAM
DVD+R
DVD+RW
DVD-RAM
*13, 16
Logos
Re-recordable/Erasable
*3
*3
*3
*14
Editing of recorded programmes
*4
*4
*4
*4
Recording of Copy-once protected
material
*12
Playback in other players/recorders
n/a
*5
*7
*6
*6, 15
*8
*9
16:9 and 4:3 programme recording
*10, 11
*11
*11
*11
Notes to table
Using DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs
*1 Must be initialized for VR mode recording (page 147).
*2 Must be initialized for Video mode recording (page 147).
*3 Erasable, but free space does not increase.
*4 Cannot erase sections, edit chapters or use playlist editing.
*5 Must be compatible with DVD-R (VR) playback.
*6 Finalize using this recorder (may not playback in some units)
(page 101).
*7 Must be compatible with DVD-RW (VR) playback.
*8 Must be compatible with DVD+RW playback.
*9 Must be compatible with DVD-RAM playback.
*10 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off
(page 158).
*11 Only when the recording mode is not set to LPCM.
*12 CPRM-compatible discs only.
*13 Take the disc out of the cartridge before use. Only Panasonic and
Maxell discs have been tested to work reliably with this recorder. Discs
from other makers may become unusable when recorded or edited.
*14 Erasing a title does not increase the available recording time, nor
increase the number of recordable titles left.
*15 Must be compatible with DVD+R playback.
*16 Depending on the disc, it may have to be initialized before it can be
recorded (page 147). In this case, initialization will take about an hour.
DVD-R DL (Dual-Layer) and DVD+R DL (Double-Layer)
discs contain two recordable layers on a single side,
giving about 1.8 times the recording capacity of a
conventional single-layer disc. This recorder can record
to both DVD-R DL and DVD+R DL discs.
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing
Corporation.
En
*6
*12
Chase play
Bilingual broadcast recording of
both audio channels
58
*12
• If you intend to play DVD-R DL (Video mode) or
DVD+R DL discs recorded on this recorder on other
DVD recorders/players, you must finalize them. (Note
that some DVD recorders/players may not play even
finalized DL discs.)
• This logo indicates that the disc is a DVD-R DL or
DVD+R DL disc:
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 59 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Before you start
01
Correct operation has been confirmed for DL discs:
• DVD-R DL ver. 3.0/2x to 4x
Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim)
• DVD-R DL ver. 3.0/2x to 8x
Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim)
That’s
JVC
• DVD+R DL 2.4x
Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim)
RICOH
• DVD+R DL 2.4x to 8x
Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim)
RICOH
A DualDisc is a new two -sided disc, one side of which
contains DVD content –video, audio, etc. –while the other
side contains non-DVD content such as digital audio
material.
The non-DVD, audio side of the disc is not compliant with
the CD audio specification and therefore may not play.
It is possible that when loading or ejecting a DualDisc,
the opposite side to that being played will be scratched.
Scratched discs may not be playable.
The DVD side of a DualDisc plays in this product. DVD
-Audio content will not play.
For more detailed information on the DualDisc
specification, please refer to the disc manufacturer or
disc retailer.
Other disc compatibility
In addition to DVD, this recorder is compatible with a
wide range of disc types (media) and formats. Playable
discs will generally feature one of the logos on the disc
and/or disc packaging shown below. Note however that
some disc types, such as recordable CD (and DVD), may
be in an unplayable format — see below for further
compatibility information.
CD-R
This recorder cannot record CD-R or CD-RW discs.
• Readable formats: CD audio, Video CD/Super VCD,
ISO 9660 CD-ROM* containing MP3, WMA, JPEG or
DivX files
* ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD physical format:
Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Joliet file
systems are both compatible with this recorder.
• Multi-session playback: Yes (except CD audio and
Video CD/Super VCD)
• Unfinalized disc playback: CD audio only
Compressed audio compatibility
• Compatible media: DVD-ROM, DVD-R/-RW, DVD+R/
+RW, DVD-RAM, CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, USB
About DualDisc playback
Audio CD
CD-R/-RW compatibility
CD-RW
• Compatible formats: MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3),
Windows Media Audio (WMA)
• Sampling rates: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz
• Bit-rates: Any (128 kbps or higher recommended)
• Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 playback: Yes
• VBR WMA playback: No
• WMA encoder compatibility: Windows Media Codec
8 (files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be
playable but some parts of the specification are not
supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice and VBR)
• DRM (Digital Rights Management)1 file playback: No
• File extensions: .mp3, .wma (these must be used for
the recorder to recognize MP3 and WMA files – do
not use for other file types)
• File structure: The recorder can load up to 99 folders/
999 files at one time (if there are more files/folders that
this on the disc then more can be reloaded)
WMA (Windows Media™ Audio) content
This recorder can playback Windows Media Audio
content.
WMA is an acronym for Windows Media Audio and refers
to an audio compression technology developed by
Microsoft Corporation.
Windows Media is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Video CD
Super Video CD (Super VCD)
This product includes technology owned by Microsoft
Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a
license from Microsoft Licensing, Inc.
Note
1 DRM (digital rights management) copy protection is a technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by restricting playback, etc. of
compressed audio files on devices other than the PC (or other recording equipment) used to record it. For detailed information, please see the
instruction manuals or help files that came with your PC and/or software.
59
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 60 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
01
Before you start
• If you load a disc that contains DivX VOD content not
authorized for this recorder, the message
Authorization Error is displayed and the content
will not play.
DivX video compatibility
DivX is a compressed digital video format created by the
DivX® video codec from DivX, Inc. Keeping the same
terminology as DVD-Video, individual DivX video files are
called “Titles”. When naming files/titles on a disc prior to
burning, keep in mind that by default they will be played
in alphabetical order.
• Official DivX® Certified product.
• Resetting the recorder (as described in Resetting the
recorder on page 175) will not cause you to lose your
registration code.
JPEG file compatibility
• Compatible formats: Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2.2*
still image files
*File format used by digital still cameras
• Sampling ratio: 4:4:4, 4:2:2, 4:2:0
• Plays all versions of DivX video (including DivX 6)
with standard playback of DivX® media files.
• Horizontal resolution: 160 to 5120 pixels
• File extensions: .avi and .divx (these must be used for
the recorder to recognize DivX video files). Note that
all files with the .avi extension are recognized as
MPEG4, but not all of these are necessarily DivX video
files and therefore may not be playable on this recorder.
• Progressive JPEG compatible: No
®
®
• File structure: Up to 99 folders or 999 files.
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of
DivX, Inc. and are used under license.
• Vertical resolution: 120 to 3840 pixels
• File extensions: .jpg, .jpeg, .jpe, .jif, .jfif (must be used
for the recorder to recognize JPEG files – do not use
for other file types)
• File structure: The recorder can load up to 99 folders/
999 files at one time (if there are more files/folders that
this on the disc then more can be reloaded)
PC-created disc compatibility
®
DivX VOD content
DivX
In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand) content on
this recorder, you first need to register the recorder with
your DivX VOD content provider. You do this by
generating a DivX VOD registration code, which you
submit to your provider.
Some DivX VOD content may only be playable a fixed
number of times. When you load a disc containing this
type of DivX VOD content, the remaining number of plays
is shown on-screen and you then have the option of
playing the disc (thereby using up one of the remaining
plays), or stopping. If you load a disc that contains
expired DivX VOD content (for example, content that has
zero remaining plays), the message Rental Expired is
displayed.
If your DivX VOD content allows an unlimited number of
plays, then you may load the disc into your recorder and
play the content as often as you like, and no message will
be displayed.
Important
• DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM system. This
restricts playback of content to specific, registered
devices.
60
En
Discs recorded using a personal computer may not be
playable in this recorder due to the setting of the
application software used to create the disc. In these
particular instances, check with the software publisher
for more detailed information.
Discs recorded in packet write mode (UDF format) are
not compatible with this recorder.
Check the DVD-R/-RW or CD-R/-RW software disc boxes
for additional compatibility information.
Dolby Digital
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 61 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Before you start
DTS
01
• Do not block the rear vent/cooling fan.
• Do not use the recorder in excessively hot or humid
places, or in places that may be subject to sudden
changes in temperature. Sudden changes in
temperature can cause condensation to form inside
the recorder. This can be a cause of HDD failure.
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered trademarks of
DTS, Inc.
DVB
The Digital Video Broadcasting Project, or DVB for short,
is a set of open standards for digital broadcasting,
covering terrestrial, cable and satellite broadcasts.
Based around the MPEG-2 coding system, these open
standards ensure that compliant systems are able to
work together, independent of manufacturer.
DVB is extremely flexible, being able to deliver virtually
any kind of digital content to the home, including High
Definition and Standard Definition TV, broadband
multimedia content and interactive services.
DVB is a registered trademark of the DVB Project.
About the internal hard disk drive
The internal hard disk drive (HDD) is a fragile piece of
equipment. When used without the proper care or in the
wrong conditions, it is possible that recorded contents
may be damaged or lost entirely, in some cases making
even normal playback or recording impossible. Please
understand that in the event of repair or replacement of
the HDD or related components, all your HDD recordings
will be lost.
• While the recorder is switched on (including during
EPG download when the display shows EPG), do not
unplug from the wall socket or switch the electricity
off from the breaker switch.
• Do not move the recorder immediately after
switching it off. If you need to move the recorder,
please follow the steps below:
1 After the message POWER OFF is shown on the
front panel display, wait at least two minutes.
2 Unplug from the wall socket.
3 Move the recorder.
• If there’s a power failure while the recorder is on
there is a chance that some data on the HDD will be
lost.
• The HDD is very delicate. If used over time in an
improper manner or in an unsuitable environment, it
is possible that the HDD will fail. Signs of problems
include playback unexpectedly freezing and
noticeable block noise (mosaic) in the picture.
However, sometimes there will be no warning signs
of HDD failure. If the HDD fails, no playback of
recorded material will be possible. In this case it will
be necessary to replace the HDD unit.
Optimizing HDD performance
As you record and edit material on the HDD, the data on
the disk becomes fragmented, eventually affecting the
recorder’s performance. Before this happens, the
recorder will warn you that it is time to optimize the HDD
(which you can do from the Disc Setup menu; see
Optimize HDD on page 148).
Please use the recorder following the guidelines below to
protect against possible HDD failure.
The HDD should not be regarded as a place to store
recordings permanently. We recommend that you back up
your important recordings onto DVD discs in order to
protect against accidental loss.
Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept
responsibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any
inconvenience or loss of recorded material resulting from
HDD failure.
• Do not move the recorder while it is on (this includes
during EPG download when the display shows EPG).
• Install and use the recorder on a stable, level surface.
61
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 62 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
02
Recorder connections
Chapter 2
Recorder connections
Antenna
wall outlet
Connecting a TV antenna
ANTENNA
IN (RF IN)
This recorder has separate built-in TV tuners for
terrestrial digital and terrestrial analog TV broadcasts.
If you are ready to receive digital broadcasts now, use one
of the supplied RF antenna cables connect an antenna
(either an antenna wall outlet or indoor antenna) to the
ANTENNA (DIGITAL) IN connector. Next, connect the
other supplied RF antenna cable to connect an antenna
to the ANTENNA IN (RF IN) connector. Lastly, connect
the recorder to your TV from the ANTENNA OUT
connector.
Antenna wall outlet
or indoor antenna
Antenna wall outlet
ANTENNA
IN
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
AC IN
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
G-LINK CONTROL
OUT
ANTENNA(DIGITAL)
IN
HDMI OUT
COAXIAL
IN
OUT
5V
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
30 mA
ANTENNA
OUT
To antenna input
TV
We strongly recommend using an outdoor antenna for
better broadcast picture quality.
ANTENNA
IN (RF IN)
If, however, you want to use an indoor antenna, use one
with a signal amplifier rated at 5 V, 30 mA and set Aerial
Power to On in the Initial Setup menu (see page 153).
ANTENNA
(DIGITAL) IN
ANTENNA
IN
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
AC IN
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
G-LINK CONTROL
OUT
ANTENNA(DIGITAL)
IN
HDMI OUT
COAXIAL
IN
OUT
5V
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
30 mA
Easy connections
ANTENNA
OUT
• While we recommend using an HDMI connection
(see page 13), you can also connect easily by using a
SCART cable.
The setup described below is a basic setup that allows
you to watch and record TV programmes, and play discs.
Other types of connections are explained starting on the
following page.
To antenna input
TV
Important
Important
• If there is only one antenna outlet on your wall, use a
divider.
• Do not connect a component that can receive analog
signals to the ANTENNA (DIGITAL) OUT.
If your area is not yet served with terrestrial digital services,
connect your antenna’s output to the ANTENNA IN (RF
IN) connector using one of the supplied RF antenna
cables. Next, connect the recorder to your TV from the
ANTENNA OUT connector.
62
En
• The AV1 (RGB)-TV AV connector can output ordinary
(composite), S-Video or RGB video, plus stereo
analog audio. The AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
connector accepts ordinary, S-Video and RGB video
input, as well as stereo analog audio. See AV1 Out
and AV2/L1 In on page 155 for how to setup these
options.
• Before making or changing any rear panel
connections, make sure that all components are
switched off and unplugged from the wall outlet.
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 63 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Recorder connections
02
1
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
To antenna input
From antenna output
VCR
From SCART AV
connector
To recorder's
antenna input
3
• Record any channel by selecting it on the cable box,
satellite receiver or digital terrestrial receiver.
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
AC IN
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
G-LINK CONTROL
OUT
ANTENNA(DIGITAL)
IN
HDMI OUT
COAXIAL
IN
OUT
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
5V
If you have a cable box or satellite receiver with a built-in
decoder, connect it to this recorder and your TV as shown
on this page. If you are using a separate decoder box for
your cable/satellite TV, set up following the instructions
on the next page.
Using the setup on this page you can:
AV2 (INPUT 1/
DECODER)
ANTENNA
IN
Connecting to a cable box or satellite
receiver
30 mA
AV1 (RGB) - TV
2
• Change channels and set timer recordings on the
external receiver using the GUIDE Plus+® system
(via the G-LINK™ cable, and after setting up).
Important
To SCART AV
connector
TV
• Do not connect this recorder to your TV ‘through’
your VCR, satellite receiver or other component.
Always connect each component directly to your TV
or AV amplifier/receiver.
• When using the GUIDE Plus+ system to make a
timer recording from an external receiver, make sure
that the external receiver is switched on.
1 Connect your TV antenna to the recorder and TV.
See Connecting a TV antenna on page 62 for details.
• If you want to incorporate a VCR in your setup, connect
it before the recorder (i.e., between the antenna wall
outlet and the antenna input on the recorder).
2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the
AV1 (RGB)-TV AV connector on this recorder to the
SCART AV connector on your TV.
1
Satellite dish/
antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
To antenna input
From antenna output
Cable/Satellite
receiver
To recorder's
antenna input
3 Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2
(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV
connector on your VCR.
From SCART AV
connector
3
AV2 (INPUT 1/
DECODER)
4
ANTENNA
IN
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
AC IN
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
G-LINK CONTROL
Tip
OUT
ANTENNA(DIGITAL)
IN
HDMI OUT
COAXIAL
IN
OUT
5V
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
• This recorder has a ‘through’ function which allows
you to record a TV programme from the built-in TV
tuner in this recorder while watching a video playing
on your VCR (To use this feature when the recorder is
in standby, Power Save must be set to Off — see
Power Save on page 152).
30 mA
AV1 (RGB) - TV
2
To SCART AV
connector
TV
1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown.
See Connecting a TV antenna on page 62 for more on RF
antenna connections, including from this recorder to
your TV.
63
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 64 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
02
Recorder connections
2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the
AV1 (RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector
on your TV.
This enables you to watch discs.
3 Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2
(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV
connector on your cable box/satellite receiver.
This enables you to record scrambled TV channels.
4 Plug the supplied G-LINK™ cable to the G-LINK™
jack.
This enables you to control the tuner in the external
receiver using the GUIDE Plus+® system.
Position the IR transmitter end of the G-LINK™ cable so
that the IR receiver on your cable/satellite receiver will
pick up the control signals (see diagram).
• For timer recording to work properly on this recorder,
the VCR/satellite receiver/cable box must also be
switched on during recording.
• It is not possible to watch one TV programme and
record another using this setup.
SCART AV
connection
1
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
2
To antenna input
Decoder
VCR/Satellite receiver
/Cable box
From SCART AV
3 connector
AV2 (INPUT 1/
DECODER)
ANTENNA
IN
ANTENNA
IN
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
AC IN
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
G-LINK CONTROL
G-LINK CONTROL
IN
OUT
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
OUT
ANTENNA(DIGITAL)
IN
HDMI OUT
COAXIAL
IN
OUT
5V
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
30 mA
AV1 (RGB) - TV
G-LINK cable
4
See the manual that came with your cable/satellite
receiver if you’re not sure where the IR receiver is on the
front panel. Alternatively, experiment with the remote
control, operating it from very close range until you find
the place where the receiver responds.
To SCART AV
connector
TV
Tip
• This recorder has a ‘through’ function which allows
you to record a TV programme from the built-in TV
tuner in this recorder while watching a video playing
on your VCR (To use this feature when the recorder is
in standby, Power Save must be set to Off — see
Power Save on page 152).
Connecting an external decoder box (1)
If you have an external, dedicated decoder box for your
satellite or cable TV system, use the setup described on
this page. See above for how to connect the G-LINK™
cable.
Important
• Do not connect your decoder box directly to this
recorder.
• Information from the decoder (for example, relating
to pay TV services), is only viewable when this
recorder is off (in standby).
64
En
1 Connect the cable from the antenna/cable TV
outlet to the antenna input on your VCR/satellite
receiver/cable box.
2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect your
decoder to your VCR/satellite receiver/cable box.
See the manual for your decoder box for more detailed
instructions.
3 Use a SCART cable to connect your VCR/satellite
receiver/cable box to the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
AV connector on this recorder.
4 Use a SCART cable to connect the AV1 (RGB)-TV
AV connector to your TV.
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 65 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Recorder connections
02
Connecting an external decoder box (2)
Connecting using HDMI
If you only have a decoder, connect it to this recorder and
your TV as shown on this page.1
Connect the receiver subwoofer to this recorder using
the supplied HDMI cable (see page 13 for details).
The HDMI connector outputs uncompressed digital
video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio.
When connected to an HDMI component or HDCPcompatible DVI component, the HDMI indicator lights.
HDMI setup is generally automatic. There are however
settings you can change if you need to. See HDMI Output
(only available when an HDMI device is connected) on
page 159 for more information. Note that the HDMI
settings remain in effect until you change them, or
connect a new HDMI component.
Using the setup on this page you can:
• Record scrambled channels received using the
recorder’s built-in analog TV tuner.
Important
• Do not connect this recorder ‘through’ your VCR,
satellite receiver or cable box. Always connect each
component directly to your TV or other AV
component.
Important
Decoder
• An HDMI connection can only be made with DVIequipped components compatible with both DVI and
High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP).
If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will
need a DVI to HDMI adaptor cable. A DVI to HDCP
connection, however, does not support audio.
Consult your local audio dealer for more information.
From SCART AV
connector
3
AV2 (INPUT 1/
DECODER)
ANTENNA
IN
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
AC IN
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
G-LINK CONTROL
OUT
ANTENNA(DIGITAL)
IN
HDMI OUT
COAXIAL
IN
OUT
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
5V
30 mA
AV1 (RGB) - TV
2
To SCART AV
connector
TV
1 Connect your TV antenna to the recorder and TV.
See Connecting a TV antenna on page 62 for details.
2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the
AV1 (RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector
on your TV.
This enables you to watch discs.
3 Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2
(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV
connector on your decoder box.
This enables you to record scrambled TV channels.
• The HDMI connection is compatible with 32 kHz,
44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 96 kHz, 16 bit/20 bit/24 bit 2-channel
linear PCM signals, as well as Dolby Digital, DTS and
MPEG audio bitstream.
• If your connected component is only compatible with
Linear PCM, the signal is output as Linear PCM (DTS
audio is not output).
• If you have connected to a Pioneer plasma television,
please select the HDMI setup on the display (refer to
the supplied manual for more on this).
About HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) supports
both video and audio on a single digital connection for
use with DVD players and recorders, DTV, set-top boxes,
and other AV devices. HDMI was developed to provide the
technologies of High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP) as well as Digital Visual Interface (DVI) in
one specification. HDCP is used to protect digital content
transmitted and received by DVI-compliant displays.
HDMI has the capability to support standard, enhanced,
or high-definition video plus standard to multi-channel
surround-sound audio. HDMI features include
uncompressed digital video, a bandwidth of up to five
gigabits per second (Dual Link), one connector (instead
of several cables and connectors), and communication
between the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs.
Note
1 In order to use this setup, you will need to make the following settings from the Initial Setup menu:
• Set the AV2/L1 In setting to Decoder from the Initial Setup menu (see AV2/L1 In on page 155).
• From the Manual CH Setting screen, set the Decoder setting for the scrambled channels to On (see Manual CH Setting on page 154).
65
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 66 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
02
Recorder connections
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.
HDMI Control
By connecting the receiver subwoofer to an HDMI
Control-compatible Pioneer plasma television with an
HDMI cable, you can control this unit from the remote
control of a connected plasma television, as well as have
the connected plasma television automatically change
inputs in response to this unit starting playback.
Refer to the operating instructions for your plasma
television and HDMI Control on page 44 for more
information about which operations can be carried out by
connecting via HDMI cable.
Auto-select function
You can have a connected plasma television and the
receiver subwoofer automatically change inputs when
playback begins on this unit (including when you have a
GUI (such as Disc Navigator) set to display on this unit).
Certain connected plasma televisions may have their power
turned from off to on when using this function.
Simultaneous power function
You can have this unit turn on automatically when the
power for a connected plasma television is turned on. To
have this unit’s power turned off when a connected
plasma television is turned off, you must change the
simultaneous power function of your plasma television.
– Child lock settings (page 99).
– When you connect a SCART cable and an HDMI
cable to the same plasma television simultaneously.
• If you want to use an HDMI cable other than the
supplied HDMI cable, use the one that supports the
HDMI 1.3 specification. The HDMI Control functions
may not operate properly if you do not use an HDMI
cable that supports the HDMI 1.3 specification.
• Controls may not function properly in certain
situations, such as immediately after you have
connect an HDMI cable, turn this unit’s power off or
remove the power cable for this unit or the connected
component. If you experience any problems, set
HDMI Control to On for all connected units, and then
display the pictures stored on this unit on your
plasma television to improve the situations.
• We cannot guarantee this unit will work with HDMI
control-compatible components other than those
made by Pioneer.
Connecting a DV camcorder
You can connect a DV camcorder or DVD recorder with
DV output to the front panel DV IN jack.
Important
• This jack is for connection to DV equipment only. It is
not compatible with digital satellite receivers or DVHS video decks.
Unified language function
STANDBY/ON
By receiving language information from a connected
plasma television, you can have this unit’s language
settings automatically change to those of the plasma
television (language information can be received only
when no media is being played back and no recordings
are taking place, or when you choose not to display this
unit’s GUI displays).
DV IN
USB
OPEN/
CLOSE
PLAY
STOP
REC
STOP REC
DV IN
From DV output
DV camcorder
Important
• Depending on the type of plasma television, some
HDMI input terminals do not support the HDMI
Control function. For details, see the operating
instructions supplied with your plasma television.
• To use the following functions, set this unit’s HDMI
Control to Off (page 159).
– The timer recording to use VPS/PDC (page 98).
– When you want this unit to automatically switch off
upon completion of timer recording. (When HDMI
Control is set to On, this unit does not automatically
switch off if your plasma television is switched on
upon completion of timer recording.)
– When using the Video Control function of an
external component.
66
En
• Use a DV cable (not supplied) to connect the DV
jack of your DV camcorder to the front panel DV
IN jack of this recorder.
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 67 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Recorder connections
02
Using a USB hub
Connecting a USB device
• Use a hub compatible with USB 1.1 and/or 2.0.
Using the USB ports on the front of the recorder you can
connect USB devices such as digital cameras, printers,
keyboards and PCs. Please also see the instructions that
came with the device you want to connect before using.
• Use an independently powered hub (bus powered
hubs may not work reliably).
• In the event of unreliable operation with the hub, we
recommend plugging the device directly into the
recorder’s USB port.
STANDBY/ON
DV IN
USB
OPEN/
CLOSE
USB
(Type B)
PLAY
STOP
REC
STOP REC
USB
(Type A)
USB
USB
Digital Camera
PictBridge-compatible
Printer
• Operation may become unreliable if too many
devices are connected to the hub. In this case, try
unplugging some devices.
• If the power delivered through a hub is insufficient for
the devices connected, communication can become
unreliable. In this case, disconnect one or more
devices then perform a USB restart. (See Restart USB
Device on page 160.)
Using a USB printer
• Use a PictBridge-compatible printer.
Keyboard
PC
Using a USB keyboard
Important
• Do not use a PS/2 keyboard connected using a PS/2USB adapter.
• Some USB devices may not work with this recorder.
• When connecting a PC to this unit, make sure the
power is turned off on both the PC and this unit when
you connect them via USB.
• We recommend connecting USB devices when this
recorder is switched off (in standby).
JPEG file storage devices
• Digital still camera
• Memory card reader (any type of memory card)
• USB memory
The Mass Storage Class (MSC) device should be FATcompatible. Note that if the device is partitioned, this
recorder may not recognize it.
The Picture Transfer Protocol (PTP) can be used to
transfer up to a maximum of 4000 files.
WMA/MP3 file storage devices
Using a PC
• Note that you can connect a PC to this device via USB
to copy WMA and MP3 files. For more information,
see Connect PC on page 135. To use Connect PC with
this device, your PC must run either the Windows XP
Home Edition (SP2), Windows XP Professional (SP2)
or Windows Vista Home Premium operating system
and be able to run Windows Media Player 11. Even if
your PC can run Windows Media Player 11, we
cannot guarantee that it will function properly with
this device. For more details see the ‘Help’ section of
Windows Media Player 11.
Plugging in
After checking all the connections, plug in the recorder.
• Use the supplied power cable to connect this
recorder to a power outlet.
• Memory card reader (any type of memory card)
• USB memory
• PC (Use Connect PC function)
The Mass Storage Class (MSC) device should be FATcompatible. Note that if the device is partitioned, this
recorder may not recognize it.
Note that although multi-slot card readers can be used,
the recorder will only recognize the first card inserted. To
read another card, remove all the cards and insert the
card to be read again.
67
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 68 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Getting started
03
Chapter 3
Getting started
Important
4
ENTER
• To control the HDD/DVD recorder, change the HDD/
DVD recorder’s input function and put the remote
control in HDD/DVR mode. When the remote control
is in HDD/DVR mode, the HDD/DVR screen is
shown on the LCD.
k Setting
t Line Complete
System this setup before you
start using your recorder.
er Save
Start
P
p Navigator Cancel
Please use the Initial Setup if you
want to make more detailed settings.
• The HDD/DVR settings are listed on three separate
pages. To cycle between pages, use the PAGE button.
Switching on and setting up
When you switch the recorder on for the first time, you
can make several basic settings using the Setup
Navigator feature. This takes you through setting the
clock, the internal TV tuner and the video output.
If you’re using the recorder for the first time, we strongly
recommend you use the Setup Navigator before starting
to use the recorder.
1 Switch on your TV and set the video input to this
recorder.
• If you don’t want to use the Setup Navigator, press to select Cancel, then press ENTER to exit the Setup
Navigator.
ENTER
5
Select an Aerial Power setting1 for the
built-in digital tuner.
• On: power is always supplied to the connected aerial,
whether the recorder is on or in standby.
• Auto: power is only supplied when this recorder is on.
• Off: power is never supplied to the aerial.
ENTER
SOURCE
Switch on the recorder.
2
When you switch on for the first time, your TV should
display the Setup Navigator screen (If the Setup
Navigator doesn’t appear, you can also access it from the
Initial Setup menu; see page 152).
• If this recorder is connected to a compatible TV using
a fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable, the recorder will
take a few seconds to download country, TV screen
size and language information. (Check the manual
that came with your TV for compatibility information.)
ENTER
3
Start the Setup Navigator.
Choose a language (then press ENTER).
6
Select ‘Auto Scan’ to start scanning for
D.TV channels.
• Select Do not set if you want to skip D.TV channel
setup (because they have already been set up, for
example), then skip to step 8 below.
ENTER
7
Select your country.
The recorder starts scanning for new channels. After the
scan is complete the recorder will let you know how many
new channels were found.
• The country setting will apply to both the digital and
analog TV tuners.
• The clock will also be set automatically here if D.TV
channels are found.
Initial Setup
Basic
Language
Clock Setting
Digital Tuner
Input Line System
Analogue Tuner
Pow er Save
Video In/ O ut
HELPp
Audio In
EPG T
Audio O ut
Setup N
avig ator
• If no new channels were found a message appears
asking if you want to scan again. Check the aerial
connection before selecting Yes. (If you select No,
skip to step 8 below.)
Language
Re cording
Note
1 If the recorder does not accept the On or Auto setting (the highlight jumps back to Off), check that the antenna is properly connected and
that it is not shorted, then try making the setting again.
68
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 69 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Getting started
03
•
ENTER
8
Select the analog TV (A.TV) Auto Channel
Setting (‘Auto Scan’ or ‘Download from TV’), or ‘Do
not set’.
Set ‘Clock Set CH‘ to the channel preset number
that broadcasts a time signal, then move the
cursor down to ‘Start’ and press ENTER.
k Setting
Auto Channel Setting
Line System
er Save
English
Auto
Scan
P
Download from TV
Auto clock setting
Some TV channels broadcast time signals together
with the programme. This recorder can use these
signals to set the clock automatically.
k Setting
Auto Clock Setting
p Navigator Do not Set
Line System
Date
er Save
Time
P
• Select Do not set if you want to skip channel setup
(because they have already been set up, for example).
–– / –– / ––––
–– : ––
p Navigator
Clock Set CH
• You can only use the Download from TV feature if
this recorder is connected to your TV using a fullywired 21-pin SCART cable via the AV1 (RGB)-TV
connector, and if your TV supports this function
(check your TV’s instruction manual for more details).
Pr 1
Start
The recorder takes a short while to set the time. After
you see that it’s set, select Next to proceed.
k Setting
Auto Clock Setting
Line System
Date
er Save
Time
P
ENTER
•
Select your country.
MON 01 / 01 / 2007
11 : 20
p Navigator
Clock Set CH
Pr 1
Start
k Setting
Country Selection
Next
t Line System
er Save
Country
UK
If the time could not be set automatically, press
RETURN to go back to the previous screen and select
Manual.
P
• Auto-tuning channels
The Auto Scan option automatically scans and sets the
channel presets.
Tuning
32/99
Cancel
• Downloading channels from your TV
Use the Download from TV option to download all the
channels that your TV is tuned to.
Downloading
Pr 5
•
Manual clock setting
If no stations in your area are broadcasting time
signals, you can set the clock manually.
Use the / buttons to set your time zone.
You can set this by selecting a city or a time relative
to GMT.
1/2
k Setting
Manual Clock Setting
Line System
Time Zone
er Save
England
London
P
p Navigator
Summer Time
Off
32/99
Cancel
Press then use the / buttons to select ‘On’
or ‘Off’ for summer time, then press ENTER.
Select On if you are currently using summer time.
ENTER
9
Select ‘Auto’ for automatic time setting,
or ‘Manual’ to set the clock manually.
If the clock was already set from a D.TV channel in step 6,
this step is skipped.
1/2
k Setting
Manual Clock Setting
Line System
Time Zone
er Save
England
London
P
p Navigator
Summer Time
On
k Setting
Clock Setting
Line System
er Save
Auto
P
Manual
69
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 70 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
03
Getting started
Set the date (day/month/year) and time, then
press ENTER to make all the settings.
2/2
k Setting
Manual Clock Setting
Line
System
Date
er Save
ENTER
13
Select ‘Finish Setup’ to exit the Setup
Navigator, or ‘Go Back’ if you want to start again.
MON 01 / 01 / 2007
P
Time
p Navigator
k Setting
Setup is complete!
Line System
00 : 00
er Save
Time Zone
England
London
Summer Time
On
• Use the / buttons to change the value in the
highlighted field.
Finish Setup
p Navigator
That completes basic setup using the Setup Navigator.
• If there are blank channels with no station, you can
set these to skip using the manual channel setting.
See Manual CH Setting on page 154.
• Use the / buttons to move from one field to
another.
• You can go back to the previous screen in the Setup
Navigator by pressing RETURN.
ENTER
10
Select the EPG (Electronic Programme
Guide) type to use.
• GUIDE Plus+: Use the Gemstar GUIDE Plus+ EPG
(see also Setting up the GUIDE Plus+® system on
page 71 and Using the GUIDE Plus+ electronic
programme guide on page 74).
For users receiving digital broadcast
services
This unit can set its internal clock automatically from
digital broadcasts. However, depending on the
broadcaster, the clock information received may not be
accurate.
Use the following procedure (while the recorder is not
recording) to set the clock manually.
• Digital EPG: Use the SI EPG (programme information
broadcast together with digital channels).
• If no channels were found when scanning for digital
TV channels then this screen does not appear and the
EPG is set according to the country set in step 7
above.
ENTER
11
Select the TV screen type, ‘Wide (16:9)’ or
‘Standard (4:3)’.
k Setting
TV Screen Size
Go Back
HOME
MENU
1
SETUP
Press HOME MENU.
ENTER
2
Setting’.
3
Select ‘Initial Setup’ > ‘Basic’ > ‘Clock
Highlight the time setting.
4 ENTER Press to display the manual clock setting
screen.
Line System
er Save
Wide (16:9)
P
Standard (4:3)
5
Set the correct time.
p Navigator
12 ENTER Press to continue after reading the HDD
caution.
k Setting
In the event of HDD failure, recordings may
be lost or normal playback/recording may
Line
not System
be possible.
er Save
As recordings might be lost in case of a HDD
P failure, we recommend to use the HDD only
as temporary storage media.
p Navigator
Please copy recordings you want to keep
to recordable DVD.
Press ENTER to continue.
70
En
Return to automatic clock setting
• To return to the automatic clock setting, follow the
instructions for ‘Replace Channels’ (page 153).
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 71 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Getting started
Setting up the GUIDE Plus+® system
03
1
GUIDE
Display the GUIDE Plus+ setup menu.
This section is only applicable if you chose to use the
GUIDE Plus+ system as the EPG type in step 10 of the
Setup Navigator above.
The GUIDE Plus+® system* is a free, interactive onscreen television programming guide. The system offers
programme listings for all major channels, one-touch
recording, search by genre, recommendations according
to your profile and more.
For the GUIDE Plus+ system to function correctly, it is
important that you set the language and country
correctly in the Setup Navigator, and that you have
performed a scan for available channels, as these are all
used by the GUIDE Plus+ system. If any of these things
are not yet set, please run the Setup Navigator first (see
Switching on and setting up on page 68).
TV listings information is received via ‘Host Channels’. In
order to receive the correct TV listings information for
your country or region you need to set up the GUIDE
Plus+ system and ‘download’ the TV listings information.
The initial download can take up to 24 hours, but once
this is done, all future updates are automatic.
The language and country settings are already set to
whatever you selected in the Setup Navigator.
ENTER
2
Highlight ‘Postal Code’.
* GUIDE Plus+, SHOWVIEW, VIDEO Plus+, G-LINK are (1)
registered trademarks or trademarks of, (2) manufactured
under license from and (3) subject of various international
patents and patent applications owned by, or licensed to,
Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its related
affiliates.
Legal Notice
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS
RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLE FOR THE
ACCURACY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION
PROVIDED BY THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT SHALL
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS
RELATED AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNTS
REPRESENTING LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, OR
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE PROVISION OR USE OF ANY
INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT, OR SERVICES RELATING TO THE
GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM.
3
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
ENTER
(LCD page 2)
Enter your postal code.
71
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 72 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
03
Getting started
The system uses your postal code to identify which TV
listings data is correct for the area in which you live, so it
is important that you enter it correctly.
If your external receiver still doesn’t respond to the GLINK controller, please call customer support and report
the brand and model of your external receiver.
4 If you are using an external receiver (such as a
satellite receiver) with the supplied G-LINK cable,
complete this step, otherwise jump to step 5 below.
See also GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and troubleshooting on
page 83.
5 Identify the Host Channel for your country.
The TV listings information available in the GUIDE Plus+
system is distributed throughout Europe by selected
broadcasters called Host Channels. It is important that
the host (analog) channel for your country is correctly
identified in order to receive listings information (EPG
download).
Follow A, B or C below depending on your setup:
A If you are not using an external receiver, this
recorder will automatically scan all channels for the
Host Channel:
• Leave the recorder in standby overnight (do not leave
it switched on).
B If you are using an external receiver, you need to
identify the Host Channel from the table below:
• See Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver on
page 63 for more on using the supplied G-LINK cable.
• Select External Receiver 1, 2 or 3, then press
ENTER. (If you have just one external receiver, use
External Receiver 1. You can add further receivers in
2 and 3 if you need to.)
After pressing ENTER:
• Select your reception method (Terrestrial, Cable or
Satellite).
Country/
Region
Host
Channels
Austria
Eurosport
Belgium
RTL-TVI
France
Canal+
Germany
Eurosport
Italy
MTV
Netherlands
Eurosport
Spain
Tele 5
Switzerland
Eurosport
UK
ITV, Eurosport
Comments
Analog only
Analog only
• Select your provider (if applicable).
• Select the brand of your external receiver.
• Identify which input your external receiver is
connected to.
After completing these steps the recorder will try and
communicate with your external receiver and change the
channel via the G-LINK cable. If the channel was
successfully changed, select Yes to confirm.
If the channel did not change, select No. The GUIDE
Plus+ system will try other codes assigned to your
external receiver. If none of the codes changes the
channel successfully, tune your external receiver to the
Host Channel for your country (refer to step 5 below) and
leave it on overnight. The recorder needs to be in standby;
it will wake up automatically and download new codes
from the Host Channel. The next day, try this setup
process again:
• Press GUIDE to display the GUIDE Plus+ screen.
• Press to highlight the Menu bar, then use to
reach the Setup area and select Setup.
• Continue setting up from the start of this step again.
72
En
Analog only
ITV is analog only. Use Eurosport
if you are a SKY subscriber and
you no longer have an analog
terrestrial antenna.
• Tune your external receiver to the appropriate Host
Channel and leave the receiver on and the recorder in
standby overnight.
C If you use both an external receiver and this
recorder as sources, follow the instructions above for
setting up without an external receiver. Only if this is
unsuccessful try the external receiver method.
About EPG download
• EPG data can only be received when the recorder is
in standby. (When not using the recorder, therefore,
please switch it into standby.) If you’re using an
external receiver, leave this on when EPG data is
downloading.
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 73 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Getting started
• If you cannot receive any of the Host Channels (see
the above table) then you won’t be able to use the
GUIDE Plus+ system. In this case do not set the
postal code (or set Country to Other) in the GUIDE
Plus+ setup screen. (When GUIDE Plus+ service
starts in your area, set the postal code again.)
If digital broadcasts start in your area, please set the
EPG Type Select setting in the Initial Setup menu to
Digital EPG.
• Even if you can’t use the EPG functions where you
live, you can still set VIDEO Plus+ recordings and
manual recordings — see Setting a manual recording
on page 81.
• The front panel display shows EPG when receiving
data. If you power on the recorder during an EPG
download, the download is cancelled.
• EPG data may be received several times a day. All
updates are automatic.
• When downloading EPG data, the recorder may
sound as though it is on. This is normal.
03
• For any channel that you turn ON, the GUIDE Plus+
system will need to know how it is received (the
source) and on which programme number. The
source may be the built-in tuner of this recorder, or
an external receiver. The programme number is the
number on which the channel can be found on its
receiving device/source. The entry in the Editor
screen must match this number for correct recording
of that channel.
• The above is especially important for the ‘Host
Channel’. Please make sure that the Host Channel is
always switched ON.
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
2
(LCD page 2) Change the programme
numbers as you like.
Changing the programme numbers allows you to decide
the order in which the channels change when stepping
through them sequentially. You can do this to group
certain channels together, for example.
Checking the downloaded data the
following day
1
GUIDE
Display the GUIDE Plus+ screen.
Name
BBC1
BBC2
ITV
CH4
CH5
BBC3
ITV2
E4
UKGOL
On/Off
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Off
On
Source
D. TV
D. TV
D. TV
D. TV
D. TV
Ext. Rec. 1
D. TV
D. TV
D. TV
Prog. No.
001
002
003
004
005
007
006
014
017
3 When you’re done, press the BLUE Action button
(Home) to get back to the GUIDE Plus+ home screen.
• You can find detailed information on using the GUIDE
Plus+ system in the following chapter.
You should see a grid filled with channel logos and TV
listings information. Use the / buttons to review the
list. If you notice that there are channels missing, or that
there are channels in the list that you don’t get, go to the
Editor screen:
• Press repeatedly until the Menu bar is highlighted.
• Press until Editor is highlighted. The main area of
the screen now shows a list of channels. Those that
are turned ON are displayed in the grid; those that
are OFF are hidden. Use the /// buttons to
move down the list and turn channels ON or OFF as
necessary.
73
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 74 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
04
Using the GUIDE Plus+ electronic programme guide
Chapter 4
Using the GUIDE Plus+ electronic
programme guide
This chapter is only applicable if the EPG Type Select
setting made in the Setup Navigator (or the Initial Setup
menu) is set to GUIDE Plus+.
The GUIDE Plus+ system
The GUIDE Plus+ system is a free, interactive on-screen
television programming guide.1 The system provides
programme listings for all major channels, one-touch
recording, searching by genre, recommendations
according to your profile and more. The GUIDE Plus+
system is a convenient way to find out what’s on right
now or during the coming week, by channel or by genre.
The GUIDE Plus+ system also allows you to
automatically set your viewing and recording selections
quickly and easily.
In order to receive the correct TV listings information for
your country or region you need to set up the GUIDE
Plus+ system and ‘download’ the TV listings information.
If you haven’t already done this, please turn to Setting up
the GUIDE Plus+® system on page 71 before
proceeding.
Using the GUIDE Plus+ system
All the various features and areas are colour-coded for
ease of navigation. All screens (with the exception of
some setup screens) have the following common
elements:
3
1
4
5
2
6
1 Video window – Allows you to continue watching
the current programme while using the GUIDE
Plus+ system.
2 Information panels – Display programme
promotions or instructions on the GUIDE Plus+
system.
3 Action bar – Colour-coded Action buttons change
function depending on the area.
4 Information box – Shows short programme
descriptions or help menus.
5 Menu bar – Gives access to the various areas of the
GUIDE Plus+ system.
6 Grid – Shows TV listings information for the next
seven days by channel and time.
Note
1 The GUIDE Plus+ system can’t be used when the Input Line System is set to 525 System (see also Input Line System on page 152).
74
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 75 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Using the GUIDE Plus+ electronic programme guide
GUIDE Plus+ navigation
The table below shows a summary of the remote buttons
you’ll use to navigate the GUIDE Plus+ system.
04
If you need to, you can edit the settings at any time before
the recording is due to start (see Editing a scheduled
recording on page 79).
What it does
Key
Press to set or cancel One-ButtonRecording.
REC
1
Highlight a programme title.
(LCD Page 1)
Press to display the GUIDE Plus+
screen (also use to exit).
GUIDE
Use to navigate screens (highlight an
item).
Action buttons that change
functionality depending on the Area.
(RED, GREEN,
YELLOW, BLUE)
MENU
Press to jump directly to the Menu bar.
TIMER
REC
Press to go directly to the Schedule
area.
(LCD Page 1)
Press to display extended information
for the current programme.
INFO
Press to confirm a selection or to leave
the GUIDE Plus+ screen.
ENTER
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
Use for numeric entry.
/
/
• You can also use the REC button (LCD page 1) to
set the recording.
• You can review the shows you have set to record in
the Schedule Area (see also The Schedule Area on
page 79).
Lock/Unlock video window
(LCD Page 2)
(LCD Page 1)
2 Press the RED Action button (Record).
The programme is now set for recording. When the
programme is due to start, the recorder will switch to the
correct channel and start recording1.
Press to select the previous/next page
of information (in the grid, for
example).
Press to select the previous/next day.
(LCD Page 1)
One-Button-Record
The RED Action button (Record) is visible anytime you
can highlight a programme title, including from the Grid,
after a search, or in your recommendations in the My TV
area.
When you enter the GUIDE Plus+ system, the channel
you were watching remains visible in the video window.
The date stamp above the window lets you know the
channel, date and time.
The default setting for this window is ‘locked’, as
indicated by a closed padlock icon above the video
window. When locked, the video window always shows
the channel you were previously watching as you move
up and down through the listings grid.
If you prefer, you can unlock the video window so that as
you highlight different channels in the listings grid, that
channel is shown in the video window.
The programme name, date, channel, recording start
and end times are all set automatically when you set a
timer recording using One-Button-Record.
Note
1 Recording times set using the GUIDE Plus+ system do not automatically change to reflect any changes that may occur in the programme
broadcast schedules.
75
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 76 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Using the GUIDE Plus+ electronic programme guide
04
The Grid Area
1
Highlight a channel logo.
The Grid is the main TV listings screen of the GUIDE
Plus+ system and is the first screen that you see when
you press GUIDE. You can see TV listings for the next
seven days, starting with the current day.
When you highlight a programme in the Grid, you can
see information about it in the Information Box, including
title, synopsis, channel, source, time and length. If there
is an i symbol in the Information Box, it means that there
is an extended synopsis available. Press the INFO button
to see it.
Channel logos are displayed to the left of programme
titles.
2 Press the RED Action button (Unlock).
The padlock icon above the video window becomes
unlocked. It remains unlocked for the remainder of your
current TV viewing session.
If you want to lock the video window again, follow the
same procedure. The RED Action button will now act as
Lock.
Channel mosaic screen
You can switch the display style of channels in the Grid
Area, Schedule Area or My TV Area from a list to a mosaic
of channel icons by pressing the YELLOW Action button.
Select the channel icon you want using the cursor
buttons, then press ENTER to return to the previous
screen on that channel.
Areas
The GUIDE Plus+ system consists of seven Areas. All
Areas can be accessed from the Menu bar.
• Grid – The GUIDE Plus+ system Home Area.
Displays TV listings information for the next seven
days by time and channel.
In some countries, you can also see a rating for a
particular programme (mostly movies). These ratings are
provided by local partners, such as TV magazines.
From the Grid Area you can:
• View and scroll through programme listings
• Read programme synopses
• Tune to a programme that’s currently showing1
• Set a programme to record
• Lock or unlock the video window
• Access Information panels
Browsing the Grid
Use the following remote buttons to browse the grid:
/// (cursor buttons) – Navigate the Grid
/ (LCD page 1) – Previous/next page
/
(LCD page 1) – Previous/next day
BLUE Action button – Return to the current time/date in
the Grid
ENTER – Press on the current selection to exit the GUIDE
Plus+ system and start watching the programme
The Search Area
From the Search Area you can:
• Search by category
• Search by subcategory
• Search – Search for TV programmes by category
(e.g., Sport), subcategory (e.g., Football) or keyword.
• Search by keyword
• My TV – Set up a profile and receive
recommendations according to your preferences.
• Tune to a programme that’s currently showing
• Schedule – Show all scheduled recordings.
• Access Information panels
• Read programme synopses
• Set a programme to record
• Info – Area for additional information, such as
weather (not available in all regions).
• Editor – Change channel settings.
• Setup – Setup the GUIDE Plus+ system.
Note
1 If you’re using an external tuner (satellite tuner, for example), there will be a short delay of a couple of seconds while it tunes to the channel.
This is normal.
76
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 77 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Using the GUIDE Plus+ electronic programme guide
Searching
Using My Choice keywords for a search
You can search for programmes by category,
subcategory or by keyword (My Choice). Categories for
searching include Movies (purple), Sport (green),
Children (blue) and Others (teal). In some countries there
is a further subcategory available called ‘Tip of the Day’.
These are programmes recommended by a local partner,
such as a TV magazine.
In addition to the standard categories, you can also set
your own keywords.
1
Select ‘Search’ from the Menu bar.
2
Select a category and a subcategory.
1
2
04
Access My Choice.
Press the YELLOW Action button to add a keyword.
ENTER
3
Enter a keyword to appear in the menu.
• If you choose All as the subcategory, all programmes
in the category you selected will show up in the
search results.
3 ENTER Start the search.
The search results are shown sorted by time and date.
• If no search results are displayed, it means there are
no programmes for the current day that match your
search criteria.
When you’re finished, press the GREEN Action button to
exit and continue.
4
ENTER
Start the keyword search.
• You can delete or edit keywords using the RED and
GREEN Action buttons.
• When you have set more than two keywords, an All
subcategory automatically appears which allows you
to search for all your keywords.
77
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 78 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Using the GUIDE Plus+ electronic programme guide
04
My TV Area
The My TV Area allows you to set up a personal profile. You
can define a profile by channels, themes and/or keywords.
As soon as a personal profile has been set, the GUIDE
Plus+ system continuously scans the TV listings for the
next seven days. Whenever you access the My TV Area, a
list of programmes matching your profile appears.
Select a channel from the mosaic of channel icons and
press ENTER. Repeat this step to add up to 16 channels.
4 To add a category to your profile, highlight
‘Categories’ and press the YELLOW Action button.
From the My TV Area you can:
• Set up a profile by channel, theme and/or keyword
• Edit and delete profiles
• Read programme synopses
• Tune to a programme that’s currently showing
• Set a programme to record
• Access Information panels
Setting up a profile
You can set up a profile with any combination of up to 16
channels, four categories and 16 keywords.
1
Select ‘My TV’ from the Menu bar.
2
Press the YELLOW Action button to set a profile.
Channels is now highlighted.
3 To add a channel to your profile, press the
YELLOW Action button.
Select a category from the Search Area categories and
press ENTER. Repeat this step to add up to four categories.
5 To add a keyword to your profile, highlight
‘Keywords’ and press the YELLOW Action button.
Use the /// buttons followed by ENTER to select
characters from the on-screen keyboard. When you’re
finished, press the GREEN Action button to exit and
continue.
6
Press ENTER to activate your profile.
• You can add up to 16 keywords by repeating step 5.
• You can edit or delete your profile using the RED and
GREEN Action buttons.
78
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 79 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Using the GUIDE Plus+ electronic programme guide
The Schedule Area
The Schedule Area is where you can set, see, edit and
delete scheduled (timer) recordings.
04
Press the GREEN Action button to go to continue, or the
RED Action button to go back.
4
Enter a name for the scheduled recording.
From the Schedule Area you can:
• Edit or delete a One-Button-Recording
• Set, edit or delete a VIDEO Plus+ recording
• Set, edit or delete a manual recording
Editing a scheduled recording
You can edit any parameter in a scheduled recording, or
delete it if you no longer require it1.
1
Highlight the left tile of a scheduled recording.
Use the /// buttons followed by ENTER to select
characters from the on-screen keyboard.
After entering the whole name, press the GREEN Action
button to continue.
5
Highlight the right recording tile.
6 Press the RED Action button (Quality) to change
the recording quality.
• If you only want to edit the recording quality,
frequency, destination, timing or genre settings, skip
to step 5 below.
2
Press the GREEN Action button (Edit).
3 Use the cursor and number buttons (LCD Page 2) to
edit the recording date, start time, end time and
channel.
Select from AUTO2, XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP, SEP or a manual
recording mode (see Manual Recording on page 157 and
Manual recording modes on page 164).
Use the / buttons or the number buttons to edit.
Note
1 See About timer recordings on page 98 for more information about scheduled recordings.
2 This mode maximizes the recording quality to fit on to a single DVD disc. Can also be used when recording to HDD.
79
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 80 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
04
Using the GUIDE Plus+ electronic programme guide
7 Press the GREEN Action button (Frequency) to
change the recording frequency.
9
Press to access the extended recording options.
• If you want to record to a particular HDD genre, use
the YELLOW Action button (Genre) to select one.
Select from the various options for one-time, daily and
weekly recordings.
• Use the GREEN Action button (Timing) to add extra
time to the end of the recording (+0, +10, +20, +30 or
VPS/PDC2 (V–P)).
8 Press YELLOW Action button (Destination) to
select the recording destination.
• Press to display the standard recording options
again.
Deleting a scheduled recording
1
Highlight the left tile of a scheduled recording.
Select from DVD, HDD or HDDr (Auto Replace
Recording)1.
• Auto Replace Recording is only available as an option
with regular daily or weekly recordings.
2 Press the RED Action button (Delete).
The scheduled event is deleted.
Note
1 • For a DVD timer recording, if Optimized Rec (see Optimized Rec on page 157) is set to On (and VPS/PDC is off), the recorder will adjust the
recording quality to try and fit the recording on the disc. If the recording will not fit onto the disc even on MN1 recording quality (MN4 for
DVD+R/+RW) then the Recovery Recording feature will automatically make the recording to the HDD instead.
• If there is very little free space left on the HDD, an Auto Replace Recording may not complete successfully.
• If the HDD is being used for playback or high-speed copying when an Auto Replace Recording is due to start, the new timer recording will
not replace the old one. However, the next time the timer recording starts, both of the older two programmes will be erased.
2 • If you set the timer recording to use VPS/PDC, you must switch the recorder into standby before the timer recording is due to start for it to
work correctly. For non-VPS/PDC timer recordings there is no need to switch the recorder into standby.
• Optimized Recording will not work if VPS/PDC is on.
• Up to eight timer recordings can be set with VPS/PDC.
• VPS/PDC cannot be set for recordings made from digital broadcasts or an external input, or when the recording mode is set to AUTO.
80
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 81 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Using the GUIDE Plus+ electronic programme guide
Setting a VIDEO Plus+® recording
Setting a manual recording
1
Select ‘Schedule’ from the Menu bar.
1
Select ‘Schedule’ from the Menu bar.
2
Press the RED Action button (VIDEO Plus+).
2
Press the GREEN Action button (Manual).
3 Use the number buttons (LCD Page 2) to enter a
PlusCode programming number.
04
3 Use the number (LCD Page 2) and ///
buttons to enter the recording date, then press the
GREEN Action button (Next).
Please enter the PlusCode programming number and press
ENTER to confirm.
• If you live in an area not yet covered by the GUIDE
Plus+ system you may also have to input a channel
number. Follow the on-screen display to do this.
4
Press ENTER to confirm.
4 In the same way, enter the recording start time,
followed by the GREEN Action button (Next) to
confirm.
5 Enter the recording end time in the same way,
followed by the GREEN Action button (Next) to
confirm.
81
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 82 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
04
Using the GUIDE Plus+ electronic programme guide
6 Use the number buttons to enter a channel
number, then press the GREEN Action button (Next)
to confirm.
D.TV
1
Select ‘Editor’ from the Menu bar.
Name
BBC1
BBC2
ITV
CH4
CH5
BBC3
ITV2
E4
UKGOL
001
On/Off
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Off
On
Source
D. TV
D. TV
D. TV
D. TV
D. TV
Ext. Rec. 1
D. TV
D. TV
D. TV
Prog. No.
001
002
003
004
005
007
006
014
017
2 Highlight the left channel tile of the channel you
want to switch on or off.
Alternatively, you can press the YELLOW Action button
(Mosaic) and use the /// buttons to select a
channel from the mosaic, followed by ENTER.
3 Press the RED Action button to switch the
channel on or off.
Changing the source and programme number
The Info Area
This area is reserved for additional information such as
news, weather reports, stock quotes, and so on, and
varies by region. (Note that this feature is not available in
all countries/regions.)
1
Select ‘Editor’ from the Menu bar.
The Editor Area
Name
BBC1
BBC2
ITV
CH4
CH5
BBC3
ITV2
E4
UKGOL
The Editor Area is the central location for you to manage
your channels. Any changes you make here will affect
what is displayed in the Grid Area. The Editor Area is
mainly used when setting up the GUIDE Plus+ system to
make any manual changes as necessary.
You can also use the Editor Area if new channels become
available in your area, or if you change from cable to
satellite, say, or move house.
From the Editor Area you can:
• Display/hide channels in the grid (switch the channel
on/off)
• Select a channel source (A.TV, D.TV, Ext. Rec. 1,
Ext. Rec. 2, etc.)
• Enter a channel programme number
Switching a channel on/off
You can choose whether or not to display a channel in the
Grid Area by switching the channel on or off in the Editor
Area.
On/Off
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Off
On
Source
D. TV
D. TV
D. TV
D. TV
D. TV
Ext. Rec. 1
D. TV
D. TV
D. TV
Prog. No.
001
002
003
004
005
007
006
014
017
2 Highlight the right channel tile of the channel
you want to make a change to.
3 Press the RED Action button to change the
channel source, or the GREEN Action button to enter
a programme number.
Each press of the RED Action button changes the
channel source (A.TV, D.TV, Ext. Rec. 1, etc.). To set a
programme number, use the number buttons to enter a
programme number then press ENTER (When set to
A.TV or D.TV, make sure that the programme number
matches the preset number of this recorder for what you
want to record).
The Setup Area
The Setup Area is where you can set up the GUIDE Plus+
system for your particular region, TV reception
conditions, and so on.
82
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 83 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Using the GUIDE Plus+ electronic programme guide
Making changes to your GUIDE Plus+ setup
1
Select ‘Setup’ from the Menu bar.
Press ENTER to access the Basic Setup screen.
Basic Setup
04
You can reset the Host Channel settings at any time back
to the default setting of automatic. Please be aware that
resetting the Host Channel will erase all TV listings data.
GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and
troubleshooting
This FAQ covers only a few questions. For a complete list
please consult the GUIDE Plus+ website at:
www.europe.guideplus.com
Host Channel Setup
GUIDE Plus+ System Information
FAQ
• When I tried setting up my external receiver I could not
get any of the attempts to work, what should I do?
2
Highlight the part you want to change.
There could be several reasons why your external
receiver could not be controlled.
– The connections could be wrong. Make sure that
the G-LINK cable is connected to the G-LINK
connector on the recorder and the IR blaster is in
front of the external receiver, pointing towards the IR
receiver of your external receiver. See Connecting to a
cable box or satellite receiver on page 63.
You can change the Language, Country, Postal Code1
and the External Receiver settings.
3
Press ENTER to confirm.
Manual Host Channel setup
The GUIDE Plus+ system will automatically identify your
Host Channel as soon as the recorder is put into standby
for the first time. See the table on page 72 for a list of all
the European Host Channels.
If you know your Host Channel details (source and
programme number) or if the automatic identification did
not provide the expected result, you can identify your
Host Channel manually. Select Host Channel Setup in
the Setup area and follow the instructions on the TV.
Select the correct source (e.g., internal tuner or external
receiver) and enter the respective programme number
(e.g., if you have to press 9 on the remote to watch your
Host Channel, enter 9 as the programme number). When
you next switch the recorder into standby the GUIDE
Plus+ system will complete the Host Channel setup.
– The code that is listed under your brand could be
wrong. Please try other codes for your brand under
satellite, cable or terrestrial. Go to the Setup Area and
choose one of the three options (cable, satellite or
terrestrial) that you have not already tried. Follow the
on-screen prompts to make sure that the GUIDE
Plus+ system can change channels on your external
receiver. If it does not work, repeat the process,
choosing different reception and external receiver
combinations until you have tried all the codes for
your brand of receiver that are already in the GUIDE
Plus+ system. If it still does not work, see below on
how to receive new codes overnight.
– The unit has not yet received new codes. The nightly
data downloads frequently include new codes for
controlling external receivers. Please tune your
external receiver to your local Host Channel and leave
it on overnight. Switch this recorder into standby. The
next morning, please perform the GUIDE Plus+
setup again to see if your external receiver can now
be controlled.
– The external receiver that you use is currently not
supported. If, after leaving your external receiver on
overnight, and doing the Reception and External
Receiver Setup again, it still does not respond, please
call Customer Support to report your brand and
model.
Note
1 Making changes to the Country or Postal Code settings may require a new download of TV listings information. This can take up to 24 hours.
83
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 84 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
04
Using the GUIDE Plus+ electronic programme guide
• My external receiver was successfully setup. However
I have found that when the GUIDE Plus+ system has
to change to a channel with a three-digit programme
number in the external receiver’s preset, it does not
work. It looks like the GUIDE Plus+ system can only
send two digits.
With the number of channels increasing, the number
of digits has increased as well. While older boxes use
only two digits, newer boxes require up to four. It is
possible that you selected an older code for your
brand during set-up. Please access the Setup Area,
select External Receiver and repeat the setup for your
brand (Note: Every time you see the on-screen
question about whether the receiver has changed to
a certain channel, the GUIDE Plus+ system has sent
a different code). Try all the different codes until your
GUIDE Plus+ system can control your external
receiver correctly. If you have no success, try to
receive new codes overnight.
• I used to receive data through my terrestrial antenna or
analog cable without a set-top box. Now, I have
“upgraded” to a satellite system or to digital cable with
external receiver. What should I do to receive data for
the GUIDE Plus+ system?
You can try to receive your Host Channel through
your new reception method. If you have problems to
receive data we recommend that you keep your
analog terrestrial or cable connection only to receive
data this way. It is important that you identify your
Host Channel correctly in the Editor Area.
• After I performed the initial set-up I found that the lineup for all the channels received via the external set top
box is incorrect. How do I correct this?
You can change the line-up in the editor according to
your preferences. Access the Editor Area. Select the
channels that you would like to change. Change the
source and preset number according to your
preferences.
• I performed the set-up but after many hours I still have
a blank EPG what is going wrong?
There are several possibilities:
– Connections are wrong. See Recorder connections
on page 62 to double check everything.
– The initial setup of GUIDE Plus+ was completed
incorrectly. Try setting it up again (see Setting up the
GUIDE Plus+® system on page 71).
– Your cabling and setup is OK, but the recorder has
not been connected for enough time to receive the TV
listings data. Leave the recorder in standby overnight.
– For external receiver users only: The connections
and setup are OK, but the external receiver was not
tuned to the correct Host Channel. Check the list of
Host Channels (see step 5 of Setting up the GUIDE
Plus+® system on page 71) and leave the recorder
in standby and the external receiver on overnight
tuned to the correct Host Channel.
– You live in a country/region where the GUIDE Plus+
system is not yet available. Check the list of countries
to see if you are in a region that is supported.
• I used the One-Button-Record feature (red Action
button) to set a recording, but I recorded the wrong
channel.
If the channel to be recorded is received via the
external receiver first make sure that the external
receiver was left switched on. Next, in the Editor Area,
make sure that the channel to be recorded is
correctly set: Access the Editor Area. Check the
source and programme number of the channel that
you wanted to record. Change the source and preset
numbers if incorrect.
If you are recording from the recorder’s internal tuner
(the A.TV or D.TV setting), make sure that the
programme number is the same as the preset
number set on this recorder. If they are different, go
to the Editor Area and change the programme
number to match the recorder’s preset number.
• The TV listings information doesn’t update.
The latest TV listings information is automatically
downloaded by the recorder overnight. This only
happens if the recorder is in standby; if the recorder
is left on, it will not download. When not using the
recorder, please switch it into standby.
Data downloads can take several hours. The front
panel display shows EPG when downloading. If you
switch the recorder on while EPG is displayed, the
download will be cancelled.
• The GUIDE Plus+ system is not supported in my area,
but when I switch the recorder into standby, after a
while the front panel display shows EPG. Can I stop
this from happening?
If the GUIDE Plus+ system is not supported in your
area, please do not set the postal code in the GUIDE
Plus+ setup (see Setting up the GUIDE Plus+®
system on page 71). When the GUIDE Plus+ service
starts in your area, please set the postal code again.
• The automatic Host Channel search failed or the
GUIDE Plus+ system identified the wrong Host
Channel for my region.
You can identify your Host Channel manually. See
Manual Host Channel setup on page 83 for how to do
this.
84
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 85 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Using the digital electronic programme guide
05
Chapter 5
Using the digital electronic
programme guide
• The general programme list may show sections
whose bottom right corners have been folded. This
indicates that other programmes have been
scheduled for that period. To view the title of such a
programme and related information, highlight a
folded section, and then press /.
This chapter is only applicable if the EPG Type Select
setting made in the Setup Navigator (or the Initial Setup
menu) is set to Digital EPG.
The Digital EPG system
The Digital EPG shows a table of scheduled digital TV
programmes and detailed information about individual
programmes. It also allows you easily to select and tune
to a particular programme.1
The Digital EPG screen consists of programme
Information, Channel List and General Programme List.
This section describes information displayed in the
schedule and information windows.
Note that the recorder’s clock must be set to the correct
time and date to ensure all relevant EPG information is
displayed.
Programme information
D007
1
Channel number
2
Station name
3
Programme title
4
Appear when other programmes have been
scheduled for the same period
5
Programme schedule
6
Programme genre
General Programme List
D007
1
Appears when the schedule table can be scrolled
forward or backward
2
Time schedule
3
Channel list
4
Highlights the currently selected channel
5
Indicates the programme set for recording
6
Appears when other programmes (often short ones)
have been scheduled for the same period
7
Programme title
8
Time dividers
Note
1 EPG information is only viewable for D.TV programmes that provide EPG information.
85
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 86 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Using the digital electronic programme guide
05
• To quit the display of detailed information, press
INFO again (or RETURN).
Using the Digital EPG
Using the Digital EPG you can check the schedule of
digital TV programmes, view information about desired
programmes, and/or select programmes.
D007
************
13:40 - 14:05
*************
**************************
1 GUIDE Press to display the Digital EPG screen.
The EPG screen updates automatically if the EPG data is
acquired successfully. If not, the Digital EPG screen
shows a blank image.
More...
2
Select a TV programme.
4
GUIDE
Press to exit the Digital EPG screen.
D007
Setting timer programmes
Using the Digital EPG, it’s easy to set digital TV
programmes for recording2.
1
• Press / (LCD page 1) to skip to the next or
previous channel list page.
• Information about the selected programme appears
in the information window.1
GUIDE
Press to display the Digital EPG screen.
ENTER
2
Select a programme.
D007
• To watch a programme currently on air, select the
programme (then press ENTER).
• You can check information about programmes
scheduled up to one week ahead, depending on
conditions.
• Depending on conditions, it may take some time to
acquire EPG data.
INFO Press to view more information about the
3
selected programme.
Detailed information appears in the schedule window.
• Select a programme currently on-air: press ENTER to
close the Digital EPG screen and watch the channel
immediately, or press RED to set the programme for
recording immediately.
If the screen contains further information, More ... is
displayed.
• Select a programme not yet started then press
ENTER or RED to set the programme for recording.
Note
1 The general programme list does not show programmes that have already finished.
2 For more information on timer programmes, see About timer recordings on page 98.
86
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 87 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Using the digital electronic programme guide
3 Enter the timer recording settings.
Use the / buttons to select a field; use the /
buttons to change the value1.
Genre – Select a record genre (for HDD recording only).
Manhattan Open Tennis
Date
D.TV003
VPS/PDC4 – Choose whether or not to use VPS/PDC
when making timer recordings of analog programmes
(see About timer recordings on page 98).
Auto Replace Rec. – Automatically erases the previous
daily or weekly recording when the next one is recorded.
Timer Programme Set
CH
05
Start
SUN 1/4
Detailed Settings
Record To
Recording Mode
VPS/PDC
Auto Replace Rec.
Genre
Stop
18:00
19:00
Extend
Off
Enter Details
HDD
XP
----------No Category
Store Programme
Set Detailed
Set Title Name
Cancel
VPS/PDC 0/8
• CH – Choose a channel (Pr 1 to Pr 99 for analog
channels and available digital channels (excluding
skip channels)) or an external input to record from.
• Date – Choose a date up to one month in advance, or
select a daily or weekly programme.
• Start – Set the recording start time.
• Stop – Set the recording end time (maximum length
of a timer recording is 24 hours).
• Extend – Extend the end time of the timer recording
(select Off, 10, 20 or 30 mins.).
EPG Link5 (UK only) – Choose whether or not to have this
device automatically record scheduled programmes
from the Digital EPG even if the times in which they are
broadcast change.
Series Recording6 (UK only) – Choose whether or not to
record all programmes from a series when you make a
recording from the Digital EPG (for HDD recordings only).
5 After entering all the timer recording information,
highlight ‘Store Programme’ and press ENTER.
A red clock icon appears for the programme.
6
GUIDE
Press to exit the Digital EPG screen.
Tip
• To enter a title name for the timer recording in
advance, select Set Title Name and follow the onscreen display.
4 If you want to change the recording mode,
recording destination, etc., select ‘Set Detailed’.
In this area you can set:
Record to – Select HDD for hard disk recording or DVD
for DVD recording2.
Recording Mode – Select from AUTO3, XP, SP, LP, EP,
SLP, SEP (see Setting the picture quality/recording time on
page 95). If Manual Recording is on, then you can also
select the LPCM setting, XP+ or MN (press ENTER then
use the / buttons to select the level).
Note
1 You cannot change the CH, Date, Start, Stop, Extend and title name when you have EPG Link set to On (see below).
2 • For a DVD timer recording, if Optimized Rec (see Optimized Rec on page 157) is set to On (and VPS/PDC is off), the recorder will adjust the
recording quality to try and fit the recording on the disc. If the recording will not fit onto the disc even on MN1 recording quality (MN4 for
DVD+R/+RW) then the Recovery Recording feature will automatically make the recording to the HDD instead.
• If there is very little free space left on the HDD, an Auto Replace Recording may not complete successfully.
• If the HDD is being used for playback or high-speed copying when an Auto Replace Recording is due to start, the new timer recording will
not replace the old one. However, the next time the timer recording starts, both of the older two programmes will be erased.
3 This mode maximizes the recording quality to fit on to a single DVD disc. Can also be used when recording to HDD.
4 • If you set the timer recording to use VPS/PDC, you must switch the recorder into standby before the timer recording is due to start for it to
work correctly. For non-VPS/PDC timer recordings there is no need to switch the recorder into standby.
• Optimized Recording will not work if VPS/PDC is on.
• Up to eight timer recordings can be set with VPS/PDC.
• VPS/PDC cannot be set for recordings made from digital broadcasts or an external input, or when the recording mode is set to AUTO.
5 • You cannot set an EPG Link when recording mode is set to AUTO.
• You cannot change the CH, Date, Start, Stop, Extend and title name when you have EPG Link set to On.
• When you have EPG Link set to On and you set a timer recording for a programme that is divided into multiple parts, all parts of that
icon, with
programme are recorded automatically. In the programme list, the earliest part of the programme to be recorded has a red
successive parts indicated by a gray
icon. Data provided by the broadcaster determines which programmes are classified as divided
programmes.
6 • In the programme list, the earliest programme to be recorded has a red
icon, with successive programmes indicated by a gray
icon.
• There is a limit to the number of programmes you can schedule to record with the Series Recording function.
• Data provided by the broadcaster determines which programmes are classified as part of a series.
87
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 88 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
05
Using the digital electronic programme guide
Editing a timer programme
You can change any of the settings in a timer programme
before the recording is due to start. Even if a programme
is currently being recorded, you can program a new end
time or edit its extend time parameter.
TIMER
REC (LCD page 1) Press to display the Timer
1
Programme View screen.
You can also access the Timer Programme View screen
from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU, select Timer
Recording, then Timer Recording).
This screen shows all the timer programmes currently set.
Timer Programme View
SUN 25/3 15:00
Tmr Pgms 3/32
VPS/PDC 0/8
Manhattan Open Tennis
OK
SUN 25/3 18:00 – 19:00
Pr 4
OK
World Journey
MON 26/3 19:30 – 21:00
Pr 6
Flower
MON – FRI 13:30 – 14:00
ENTER
4
Enter the timer recording settings.
Use the / buttons to select a field; use the /
buttons to change the value. For more information on the
options available at the Timer Programme Set screen,
see Setting timer programmes on page 86.
ENTER
5
After entering all the timer recording
information, highlight ‘Store Programme’ and press
ENTER.
The timer recording list screen is displayed again. The
timer programme you just input appears in the list. The
rightmost column shows various timer recording status
messages:
• OK – Can be recorded.
• Time Over – Not enough space on the HDD (the
recording won’t finish).
Until 20/4
Pr 8
New Input
• Over 12h – Recording time of over 12 hours set
(when recording to the HDD the recording will be
split into two titles).
HDD Remain
DVD Remain
59h59m(SP)
1h59m(SP)
• Overlap – Two timer programmes partially or
completely overlap. The one starting earlier will take
priority.
• Each row is for one timer recording programme, with
the date and time information, channel, recording
mode, DVD or HDD and recording status.
• Until ... (eg., Until 13/8) – For a regular recording,
the last programme that could be recorded is shown.
• The amount of free space available on the HDD and
the currently loaded recordable DVD is shown
towards the bottom of the screen.
• Data Over – Can’t record because the disc
management area of the disc is full.
• Cancel Once – A regular timer programme is set to
skip.
• In the upper-right corner, the number of timer
programmes already set is shown next to Tmr Pgms.
• Can’t Rec – Not possible to record.
• If there are more than five timer programmes already
set, press (LCD page 1) to switch page (go back
using the button).
• Title Over – Can’t record because there is already
the maximum number of titles on the disc (HDD: 999;
DVD: 99).
• You can also delete a timer programme before it’s
started (before the recorder enters timer recording
standby) by highlighting it and pressing CLEAR (LCD
page 2). See also Deleting a timer programme on
page 89.
• Recording – The programme is currently recording.
• Standby – The recorder is in timer recording standby.
• Valid Until ... (eg., Valid Until 13/8) (UK only) –
When you have set to make a series recording of a
programme that has no new scheduled broadcasts,
the date displayed indicates the last day until which
the scheduled programme settings remain valid. (If
the programme is not broadcast for over 13 weeks, its
settings are automatically deleted.)
2
Highlight the timer programme you want
to change.
If you want to set a new timer programme, select ‘New
Input’ and skip to step 4.
• No Broadcast (UK only) – Displays when a
programme for which you had the EPG Link set to On
does not record because the date of the scheduled
recording has already passed.
ENTER
3
Press then select ‘Modify’ from the
command menu panel.
Alternatively, press ENTER.
• nothing displayed – Another timer recording or
copying is in progress.
The Timer Programme Set screen appears from which
you can edit the settings.
HOME
MENU
6
88
En
SETUP
Press to exit the timer recording screen.
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 89 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Using the digital electronic programme guide
Note
• If you set a DVD timer recording but there is no
recordable DVD disc loaded, or the disc loaded
doesn’t have enough free space for the complete
recording, Recovery is shown. In this case (unless
you load a suitable disc before the recording actually
starts), the recorder will use the HDD for recording.
(The message Can’t Rec will appear if there are
already 999 titles on the HDD or if there is not enough
free space on the HDD for recording.)
• When you have EPG Link or Series Recording set to
On, any changes in broadcast time or division of
broadcasts are automatically accommodated for and
your scheduled recordings are carried out without
any additional settings. As a result, even when you
have not scheduled programmes to record at the
same time, changes in broadcasting schedules can
cause scheduled recordings to overlap.
Deleting a timer programme
05
ENTER
3
Press then select ‘Cancel Once’ from
the command menu panel.
• In the timer programme list, Cancel Once appears by
the programme.
• You can also just press (Pause)(LCD page 1) when
the timer programme is highlighted.
Checking for alternative broadcast times
(UK only)
You can check to see if a programme you have scheduled
to record is airing at an alternative time slot1.
1
TIMER
REC
Press TIMER REC (LCD page 1).
2
Highlight the timer programme you want
to search.
You can delete timer programmes you no longer need.
ENTER
1
TIMER
REC
Press TIMER REC (LCD page 1).
2
Highlight the timer programme you want
to erase.
3
Press then select ‘Alternate Search’
from the command menu panel.
• The search results are displayed. Choose the
programme you would like to record and press either
the RED button or ENTER to schedule a recording.
Searching for series
(UK only)
ENTER
3
Press then select ‘Erase’ from the
command menu panel.
• Select Yes to confirm or No to cancel.
• You can also just press CLEAR (LCD page 2) when the
timer programme is highlighted.
You can search for broadcasts of programmes of the
same series as a programme you have scheduled to
record1.
1
TIMER
REC
Press TIMER REC (LCD page 1).
Skipping a regular timer programme
If you’ve set a regular daily or weekly timer programme,
you can set the recorder to skip the next scheduled
recording.
1
TIMER
REC
2
to skip.
Press TIMER REC (LCD page 1).
Highlight the timer programme you want
2
Highlight the timer programme you want
to search.
ENTER
3
Press then select ‘Series Search’ from
the command menu panel.
• The search results are displayed. Choose the
programme you would like to record and press either
the RED button or ENTER to schedule a recording.
Note
1 • Programme search results are based upon data provided by the broadcaster.
• This function may not be applicable to all programmes.
89
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 90 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Using the digital electronic programme guide
05
Searching for recommendations
EPG Search
(UK only)
You can search for recommended programmes
generated from the content of the programmes you have
scheduled to record1.
1
TIMER
REC
Press TIMER REC (LCD page 1).
1 Press YELLOW when the EPG screen (Programme
List, Detailed information or Search Result) is
displayed.
2
In the ‘Date’ field select a date (within one
week) to search in.
2
Highlight the timer programme you want
to search.
Date
Sun.12.Sep
Time
12:00
Genre
Select
0/16
ENTER
3
Press then select ‘Recommendation
Search’ from the command menu panel.
The search results are displayed. Choose the programme
you would like to record and press either the RED button
or ENTER to schedule a recording.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Search
Cancel
Other useful EPG functions
3
In the ‘Time’ field select the time of day
(0:00 to 23:00) to search in.
EPG Jump
1 Press GREEN when the Digital EPG screen
(Programme List, Detailed information or Search
Result) is displayed.
4
In the ‘Genre’ field, select the genre to
search for.
You can search for multiple genres by pressing ENTER
after each genre.
2
In the ‘Date’ field select a date (within one
week) to jump to.
ENTER
5
Date
Select ‘OK’.
Mon.13.Sep
Time
14:00
Jump
ENTER
Cancel
6
Select ‘Search’.
The results of your search are displayed.
3
In the ‘Time’ field select a time of the day
(0:00 to 23:00) to jump to.
ENTER
4
Select ‘Jump’.
The Programme List for the specified day and time is
displayed.
Note
1 • Programme search results are based upon data provided by the broadcaster.
• This function may not be applicable to all programmes.
90
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 91 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Recording
06
Chapter 6
Recording
About DVD recording
This recorder can record to DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R,
DVD+RW, DVD-RAM, DVD-R DL and DVD+R DL media.
DVD-R and DVD-RW discs can be initialized for Video
mode or VR mode recording. Each has its advantages,
and it depends on what you want to do with the recording
which mode you choose.
If you want to edit your recordings in any significant way,
VR mode offers greater possibilities for cutting, copying,
and changing the way the video is presented.
• If you delete a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc, the
total number of recordable titles remaining may not
increase.
• Although this recorder can record PAL, SECAM,
NTSC and PAL-60, you can’t mix multiple TV line
systems on one disc. A disc can contain PAL and
SECAM recordings, or NTSC and PAL-60. See also
Additional information about the TV system settings
on page 161.
• Fingerprints, dirt and small scratches on a disc can
affect playback and/or recording performance.
Please take proper care of your discs.
Video mode is less flexible when it comes to editing, but
it has the advantage that it is compatible with standard
DVD players (many of which won’t play VR mode discs1).
• Pioneer takes no responsibility for recording failure
due to power cuts, defective discs, or damage to the
recorder.
Once a disc is initialized for a particular mode, all
recording on that disc will be in that mode.
• See also Disc/content format playback compatibility
on page 57 for detailed disc compatibility information.
DVD+RW discs can be initialized for +VR mode recording.
DVD-RAM discs can be initialized for VR mode recording.
Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs
DVD+R discs do not require initializing.
Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs is generally the
same as recording to regular single-layer discs; however,
please note the following points:
Important
• The table below shows the maximum number of titles
recordable per disc and the maximum number of
chapters per title:
Max. titles
(per disc)
Max. chapters
(per title)
DVD-R/-RW
Video mode
99
99
DVD-R/-RW/-RAM
VR mode
99
999*1
DVD+R/+RW
49
99*2
Disc type/rec. format
*1
• When the recorder switches from the first layer to the
second during recording a DVD-R DL (Video mode)
disc, a new title is automatically started on the new
layer.
• Up to 99 titles can be recorded on a DVD-R DL (Video
mode) disc. If the 99th title is being recorded when
the layer is switched, recording will stop.
• Up to 49 titles can be recorded on a DVD+R DL disc.
• You cannot play, record additional material to, edit or
finalize a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc that has been
recorded on but not yet finalized on another DVD
recorder.
A maximum of 999 chapters are recordable per disc.
*2 A maximum of 254 chapters are recordable per disc.
• This recorder cannot play or record unfinalized DVD
-R/-RW (Video mode) and DVD+R discs recorded on
another recorder. DVD+RW discs recorded on
another recorder are playable on this recorder but are
not recordable.
• The maximum continuous recording time for one title
is eight hours when using a DVD+R/+RW disc.
About HDD recording
Recording to the hard disk drive (HDD) is very flexible;
you have the full choice of recording quality options,
including manual mode, and of course you can record,
erase and re-record as many times as you like.
The capacity of the hard disk drive means that you can
store many hours of video on it, even using the higher
quality recording modes.
Note
1 Some DVD players, such as some Pioneer models, are compatible with VR mode discs. Check the operating instructions for your player for
VR mode compatibility information.
91
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 92 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
06
Recording
Important
• The maximum number of titles/chapters per title that
can be recorded on the HDD is 999 and 99
respectively. No more recording is possible on the
HDD after the maximum number of titles has been
reached.
• The maximum continuous recording time for one title
is 12 hours.
• It is possible to record both PAL and NTSC titles on
the HDD. Before recording, you need to make sure
that the Input Line System setting (page 161)
matches the TV line system of the source you’re
recording.
HDD Video mode compatibility
When recording to the HDD you can choose to record in
one of two formats. Set the format from the HDD
Recording Format item in the Initial Setup menu (see
page 158).
When set to Video Mode On, high-speed copying from
HDD to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW is
possible. When recording a bilingual broadcast, set
which channel you want to record from the Initial Setup
menu (see Bilingual Recording on page 155).
When HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off,
high-speed copying from HDD to DVD-R/-RW (Video
mode) or DVD+R/+RW isn’t possible. However, both
channels of bilingual broadcasts are recorded and you
can switch the audio on playback.
Restrictions on video recording
You cannot record copy-protected video using this
recorder. Copy-protected video includes DVD-Video discs
and some satellite broadcasts. If copy-protected material
is encountered during a recording, recording will pause
automatically and an error message will be displayed onscreen.
Video that is ‘copy-once only’ can only be recorded to
DVD-RAM or HDD, CPRM-compatible VR mode DVD-R/
-RW (see below).
When recording a TV broadcast or through an external
input, you can display copy control information on screen
(see Displaying disc information on-screen on page 112).
CPRM
CPRM is a copy protection/scrambling system developed
for the recording of ‘copy once’ broadcast programmes.
CPRM stands for Content Protection for Recordable Media.
This recorder is CPRM compatible, which means that you
can record copy-once broadcast programmes, but you
cannot then make a copy of those recordings. CPRM
recordings can only be made on CPRM-compatible DVD
-R (ver. 2.0/8x or higher) or DVD-RW (ver. 1.1 or higher)
discs formatted in VR mode, DVD-RAM discs or on the
HDD.
DVD CPRM recordings can only be played on players that
are specifically compatible with CPRM.
Recording equipment and copyright
Recorded audio
In all except the LPCM mode, sound is recorded in two
channel Dolby Digital format (only Dolby Digital 2.0 can
be recorded; Dolby Digital 5.1 recording is not possible).
When set to LPCM, sound is recorded in high quality,
uncompressed Linear PCM format.
If the broadcast audio is bilingual and you are recording
to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode), DVD+R/+RW, or to the
HDD with the HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode
On, or on the LPCM setting, use the Bilingual Recording
setting (page 155) to select the A/L or B/R audio channel
to record before recording starts. In other cases, both
channels of a bilingual broadcast will be recorded and
you can switch on playback.
92
En
Recording equipment should be used only for lawful
copying. You are advised to check carefully what
constitutes lawful copying in the country in which you are
making a copy. Copying of copyrighted material such as
films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal
exception or consented to by the rightowners.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is
protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other
rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and
other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is
prohibited.
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 93 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Recording
06
Using the D.TV Channel List
Using the built-in A.TV and D.TV tuners
Switching between A.TV and D.TV tuners
When in D.TV mode, you can call up the on-screen Channel List
anytime by pressing ENTER. Use the / buttons to select a
channel, then press ENTER to switch to that channel.3
D001 ************
A.TV/
D002 ************
D.TV (LCD page 2) Press to switch between D.TV
•
(digital) and A.TV (analog).
D003 ******
D004 ************
D005 ****
Changing channels
There are a number of ways to select analog and digital
TV channels.1 Note that you can’t change the TV channel
during playback, recording or during recording standby.
+
CH
•
•
-
CH +/– buttons (LCD page 2)
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
Number buttons (LCD page 2)
For example, to select channel 4 (digital channel
D004), press 4 then ENTER; for channel 34 (digital
channel D034), press 3, 4, ENTER.2
• For D.TV channels only, you can also use the Channel
List — see below.
Tip
• When changing terrestrial digital broadcast
channels, channels with a low signal strength may
result in a black screen being displayed.
• For other channels, it may take a short while for the
channel picture to appear, and/or for the channel
number to appear.
• In both of the above cases, some improvement may
be possible by adjusting the antenna.
D006 ******
Displaying a channel banner
A channel banner shows programme titles, start and end
times of the current programme and other channel
information. The information is updated every minute.
INFO Press to display the channel banner for the
•
current channel.
D001 ************
Now ********************
Next *************
Wed.30.Apr 12:46
11:30 - 12:00
12:00 - 12:30
• Use the / buttons to display the channel banner
for other channels. To switch to the displayed
banner’s channel, press ENTER.
• The channel banner displays the Subtitles ( ) and
Teletext/MHEG ( ) icon if they apply to the selected
channel.4
• To see more detailed channel information, press
INFO again.5
Now
************************
11:30 - 12:00
More...
Use the / buttons to display information about
previous and following programmes. Use the /
buttons to see information about other channels.
• If there is still more information to be displayed,
More ... is displayed; press the BLUE button to see
the extra information.
• To hide the channel banner, press RETURN.
Note
1 • If you select a locked channel, you will need to enter your password to access it.
• While listening to D.TV radio channels, the screen saver automatically starts after no button has been pressed for three minutes.
2 Analog channel presets are numbered 1 to 99; digital channel presets are numbered D001 to D999.
3 • If you select a locked channel, you will need to enter your password to access it.
• While listening to D.TV radio channels, the screen saver automatically starts after no button has been pressed for three minutes.
4 Due to inaccurate information provided by the broadcaster, some icons may occasionally be present or absent in error.
5 Not all channels supply more detailed information.
93
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 94 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Recording
06
Changing D.TV audio languages
•
(LCD page 3) Press to display the current
audio language. Press repeatedly to change it to
other available languages.
Changing D.TV subtitle languages
• If the NICAM audio setting (see NICAM Select on
page 155) is set to NICAM and you are watching a
NICAM broadcast, you can switch between NICAM
and Regular (non-NICAM) audio.
NICAM
Regular
• If the NICAM broadcast is bilingual, you can also
select the language.
•
(LCD page 3) Press to display the current
subtitle language. Press repeatedly to change it to
other available languages.
NICAM A
Regular
NICAM A+B
• You can also select the language for a non-NICAM
bilingual broadcast.
Using the MHEG application
(UK only)
Some stations bring you programmes with the MHEG
(Multimedia and Hypermedia Expert Group) application
encoded, letting you experience D.TV interactively.1
The channel banner displays an icon (
the MHEG application can be run.
NICAM B
) to indicate that
TEXT
A (L)
B (R)
A + B (L+R)
• When watching a recording made from an external
input with Bilingual recording selected (see External
Audio on page 155), you can switch the audio
channel between left (L), right (R) or both (L+R).
•
(LCD page 2) Press to start the MHEG
application.2
• You can also use any of the colour buttons.
L
R
L+R
• Press TEXT to quit the MHEG application.
Note
Viewing Teletext
(European countries except the UK.)
You can view the Teletext that comes simultaneously with
certain programmes.
•
TEXT
(LCD page 2) Press to display the Teletext.
• You can also use any of the colour buttons.
• Press the TEXT button again to hide the Teletext
screen.
• When recording to the HDD with HDD Recording
Format set to Video Mode On, to DVD-R/-RW (Video
mode), to DVD+R/+RW, or on the LPCM setting, only
one channel of a bilingual broadcast is recorded. In
this case, decide which language you want to record
before recording by setting the Bilingual Recording
setting (see Bilingual Recording on page 155).
Switching between TV and DVD
You can change the audio channel of the broadcast or
external input signal.
When the recorder is stopped or recording you can
choose whether to have the audio/video from the built-in
TV tuner (or external input) play on your TV (‘DVD mode’),
or watch the channel that the TV is currently set to (‘TV
mode’).
•
(LCD page 3) Press to change the audio type.
The current audio channel is displayed on-screen.
During playback or when a menu is being displayed onscreen, the sound and video is always routed to your TV
and is unaffected by the TV/DVD mode setting.
Changing A.TV audio channels
Note that the recorder must be connected to your TV
using a SCART cable to be able to use this feature.
TV/
DVD (LCD page 2) Switch between TV mode and
•
DVD mode.
Note
1 If you start recording while the MHEG application is running, the MHEG application screen will also be recorded. To avoid this, quit the
application first, then start recording. It is not possible to start the MHEG application while recording is in progress.
2 This function is not available when subtitle display is active.
94
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 95 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Recording
06
Setting the picture quality/recording
time
Basic recording from the TV
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
Basic recording from the TV involves just setting the
channel to record, choosing whether to record to the
HDD or a DVD and selecting the recording quality.
Before starting a recording, you will usually want to set
the picture quality/recording time. There are six standard
settings available, which allow you to choose a balance
between picture quality and recording time.
When Manual Recording is set to On (see Manual
Recording on page 157), a further option will be available
(MN1 to MN32, LPCM, or XP+ (a super-high quality HDD
recording mode that features a transfer rate of around 15
Mbps) depending on what you set).
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
HDD/
1 DVD (LCD page 1) Select the HDD or DVD for
recording.
• If you’re recording to DVD, load a recordable disc (if
you load a new blank DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc, the
recorder takes a short while to initialize the disc).
When recording to DVD, MN32 is the highest recording
quality available. If you select XP+, the recording mode
will automatically revert to MN32.
• If you want to record a VR mode DVD-R or a Video
mode DVD-RW, you must initialize it before
proceeding (see Initializing recordable DVD discs on
page 102).
When recording to DVD+R/+RW, SLP is the longest
recording time available. If you select SEP or MN1 to
MN3, the recording mode will automatically revert to SLP.
2 D.TV (LCD page 2) Press to switch between D.TV
(digital) and A.TV (analog).
REC
• MODE (LCD page 1) Press repeatedly to select the
recording quality.
• XP – High quality setting, gives about one hour of
recording time on a DVD disc.
• SP (Standard Play) – Default quality, used for most
applications, gives about two hours of recording time
on a DVD.
• LP (Long Play) – Lower video quality than SP, but
doubles the recording time on a DVD to about four
hours.
• EP (Extended Play) – Lower quality than LP, but gives
about six hours of recording time on a DVD disc.
• SLP (Super Long Play) – Lower quality than EP, but
gives about eight hours of recording time on a DVD
disc.
• SEP (Super Extended Play) – Lowest video quality but
gives about ten hours of recording time on a DVD
disc.
A.TV/
+
CH
- Select a TV channel to record.
3
The front panel display shows the channel number, or
channel name if it’s available:
A.TV Channel preset
• While the recorder is stopped, you can also use the
number buttons on the remote to select the channel
(For channel 24, press 2, 4 then ENTER).
REC
4 MODE (LCD page 1) Set the picture quality/
recording time.
• See Setting the picture quality/recording time above
for detailed instructions.
• MN1 to MN32/LPCM1/XP+2 – Manual/Linear PCM/
XP+ (available only when manual recording is on).
The setting is indicated in the front panel display, and
shown on-screen together with the recording time for a
blank recordable disc. If a recordable disc is loaded, the
approximate remaining recording time for that disc is
also shown. (Note that if the On Screen Display setting
(see On Screen Display on page 160) is Off then this
information is not displayed.)
Note
1 Audio is recorded in 16-bit Linear PCM format, video is recorded at XP quality. When recording a bilingual broadcast, select which audio channel to record (see Bilingual Recording on page 155).
2 Applicable only to HDD recording. (If this setting is used when recording to DVD, MN32 is used.) When copied to DVD, XP+ recordings are
always copied in real time.
95
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 96 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Recording
06
Tip
5
(LCD page 3) If you’re recording from the
A.TV tuner, select the audio channel to record.
See Changing A.TV audio channels on page 94 for more
on this.
• During recording you can turn on/off the SCART loop
through function. During recording, press the INPUT
button (LCD page 2) to switch to SCART THRU (loop
through on) or SCART NORM (loop through off).
Loop through is automatically reset to off after
recording has finished. Note that you can’t switch
loop through on if recording from the AV1 (RGB)-TV
connector.
• When recording in VR mode, if a broadcast is
bilingual, both audio channels are recorded, allowing
you to switch the audio channel on playback. The only
exception to this is when the picture quality is set to
LPCM, in which case you do need to select the audio
channel before recording.
6
(LCD page 3) If you’re recording from the
D.TV tuner, select the audio language to record.
• You may also be able to set which subtitle language
to record; use the
button (LCD page 3) to select.
• Note that audio and subtitle languages cannot be
changed during the recording of a digital broadcast.
7 REC (LCD page 1) Start recording.
If you want to set a recording end time, press the REC
button repeatedly. The recording time increases in 30
minute increments, up to a maximum of six hours. The
time the recording will end is shown on-screen and in the
front panel display. When the recording ends, the
recorder automatically switches into standby if no other
operation is being performed.
• To cancel the set recording time, press REC.
• If you want to pause recording at any time1, press
(Pause). Press again to restart the recording (If
recording to the HDD, DVD-RAM or in VR mode, a
new chapter is started after recording restarts).
8
STOP
REC
Press to stop recording.
• If you set the recording time in the previous step, you
can still stop the recording anytime by pressing
STOP REC.
• Recording will stop automatically when there is no
more space on the HDD/DVD, or after 12 hours of
HDD recording (whichever is sooner).
Pause Live TV
HDD
The Pause Live TV feature lets you effectively pause a TV
programme you’re watching. When you’re ready to
resume watching, just press the (Play) button (LCD
page 1).
Setting up for Pause Live TV
You can use the Pause Live TV feature with an AV Linkcompatible TV connected using a SCART cable (see TV
tuner setup for Pause Live TV below), or using this
recorder’s internal tuner (see Using the recorder’s
internal tuner for Pause Live TV on page 97).
TV tuner setup for Pause Live TV
To use this feature with an external TV tuner, the recorder
must be connected to your TV using a SCART cable, and
the AV. Link setting (page 160) should be set to This
Recorder Only.2 See also Pause Live TV on page 160 for
more on this.
In order to use Pause Live TV, make the following
connections and settings.
• Pause Live TV will not work as expected when
watching TV via an external component such as a
VCR or digital tuner. It only works with the channel
selected on the TV.
Important
• Pause Live TV only works with the built-in A.TV
(analog) tuner. It does not work with the D.TV tuner or
the external input. Make sure the Auto Channel
Setting is set to Download from TV (see Auto
Channel Setting on page 154).
1 Connect this recorder to your TV with a SCART
cable.
2
Press HOME MENU.
Note
1 Except during Chase Play.
2 • Not all TVs support this feature. Check the instructions that came with your TV if you are unsure.
• This feature will not work unless your TV is compatible with AV Link. See the operating instructions that came with your TV if you’re unsure
about your TV’s compatibility with this feature.
96
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 97 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Recording
06
3 Select ‘Initial Setup’ > ‘Options2’ > ‘Pause Live TV’
> ‘TV’s Tuner’.
Using Pause Live TV
4 Select ‘Initial Setup’ > ‘Analog Tuner’ > ‘Auto
Channel Setting’ > ‘Download from TV’.
• If the Download from TV option appears grayed out,
check the connections to your TV and try again.
TV
1
(LCD page 1) Start recording the current TV
channel.
Recording continues with playback paused.
• Depending on your TV, you might have to switch off
and unplug it for a few moments before plugging it
back in and switching it on again.
5
Follow the on-screen instructions.
P.LIVE
• Note that it may take up to 10 seconds for recording
to start.
Press to start playback.
2
You can also use the scan buttons (/
), pause ()
and stop () — all without affecting the recording.
Using the recorder’s internal tuner for Pause Live TV
If you haven’t connected to your TV using a SCART cable
(or your TV is not compatible with AV Link) you can use
the recorder’s internal tuner for the Pause Live TV.
1
STOP
REC Press to stop the recording.
3
The operation is slightly different depending on the
viewing source. See the Operation table below for details.
Press HOME MENU.
2 Select ‘Initial Setup’ > ‘Options2’ > ‘Pause Live TV’
> ‘Recorder’s Tuner’.
See Pause Live TV on page 160 to do this.
You can record the channel selected on the recorder.
Tip
• When the Pause Live TV setting (see page 160) is set to
TV’s Tuner, you can press P.LIVE TV while the
recorder is in standby to switch on and immediately
start recording. When set to Recorder’s Tuner, it is not
possible to use the Pause Live TV feature from standby.
• After pressing P.LIVE TV, it will take at least 10
seconds for the picture to change (during this time,
all controls except the power button are inoperative).
(Note that startup from standby is not possible if you
have selected Recorder’s Tuner in Pause Live TV on
page 160.)
• Please note that you can’t record from another
component (VCR, etc.) that is connected by a SCART
cable to the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) connector
using the Pause Live TV feature.
Operation table
Viewing source
TV built-in analog tuner
TV/DVD
Pause Live TV
DVR source
mode of DVR
function button
TV
–
Pause Live TV
Condition
Preset channel of DVR and TV are matched after
downloading from TV.
Direct TV recording*1 Preset channel of DVR and TV are NOT matched after
downloading from TV. Record TV programme that you’re
watching.
TV built-in digital tuner
External input of TV
TV
TV
–
Direct TV recording*1 Preset channel info. in D.TV cannot be shared by DVR even
after Download from TV. Record TV programme that you’re
watching.
–
Direct TV recording*1 Record TV programme that you’re watching.
DVR built-in analog tuner
DVD
DVR built-in Pause Live TV
analog tuner
DVR built-in digital tuner
DVD
DVR built-in Pause Live TV
digital tuner
*1 No Chase Play! Warning if you change input this will stop the recording.
97
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 98 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
06
Recording
About timer recordings
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
Using the timer recording features you can program up
to 32 timer recordings up to a month in advance. Timer
recording programmes can be set to record just once,
every day, or every week.
You can set the recording quality for your timer recording
in the same way as for a regular recording, but with the
added option of an AUTO mode, which maximizes the
recording quality for the space available on the disc (if
recording to DVD), or to fit on to a blank DVD disc (if
recording to the HDD).
You can set timer recordings to record to a recordable
DVD or to the hard disk drive. For regular (daily or weekly)
HDD timer recordings that you don’t need to keep, you
can use the Auto Replace Recording feature to
automatically replace the previous timer recording with
the new one. Note that when you use this feature, the
previous recording made on that timer programme will
be replaced by the next one, regardless of whether you
have watched it yet or not.
You can also set the recorder so that it will adjust the
recording quality to try and fit the recording on to the disc
if it would not otherwise fit at the recording quality you set
(see Optimized Rec on page 157 for more on this).
Finally, if you set a timer recording to record to DVD but
there isn’t a recordable DVD loaded at the time of the
recording, the Recovery Recording feature will
automatically record the programme to the HDD for you.
This recorder is compatible with VPS (Video
Programming System) and PDC (Programme Delivery
Control) systems used by many analog TV stations to
ensure that a timer recording catches the whole
programme even when the programme is not running to
schedule. Up to eight timer programmes can be set with
VPS/PDC on.
• When the front panel display is set to ON, the timer
indicator ( ) lights in the front panel display when
the timer is active. If the indicator is blinking it means
that (for a DVD timer recording) there is no disc
loaded, or the disc loaded is not recordable (for an
HDD timer recording it means that the HDD is not
recordable).
• Approximately two minutes before a timer recording
is set to start, the recorder will go into timer recording
standby. In timer recording standby you cannot use
some functions.
• The maximum length for timer recordings made to
the HDD is 24 hours. However, because one title
(HDD) is limited to 12 hours, recordings over 12
hours will be spread over two titles. Note that there
will be a break in the recording of a few seconds
between titles.
• If you set the timer recording to use VPS/PDC, set
this recorder’s HDMI Control to Off (page 159).
• VPS/PDC works only with analog stations; it does not
work with digital TV stations.
• VPS/PDC may not work with all broadcast stations in
your country/area. Check with the stations for
compatibility.
• The hours between 3:00 and 5:00 in the morning are
used by the GUIDE Plus+ system to download
programme information. During these times, VPS/
PDC may not work reliably; leave VPS/PDC off if you
set a timer recording for these times.
• Timer recordings with VPS/PDC set to On are not
performed for the period between 20 minutes before
the start time of timer recordings for which EPG Link
is set to On until the such recordings are completed
(page 87).
• If VPS/PDC is active for two timer programmes that
are programmed to start at the same time, then the
programme that actually starts first takes priority.
Extending a timer recording in progress
Important
• A timer recording can’t be set if there are already 32
timer programmes waiting to be recorded.
• Timer recording will not start if:
– The recorder is already recording.
– A disc is being initialized, finalized or unfinalized.
• Timer recording will start when the operation
preventing timer recording has finished.
You can extend a timer recording beyond the
programmed end time. This can be useful if a broadcast
programme overruns, for example.
Cancelling or extending the timer
1 REC (LCD page 1) Press and hold for three seconds
during a timer recording.
Recording continues, but the timer indicator disappears
from the front panel display indicating that the timer has
been cancelled.
REC
2
Press repeatedly to extend recording in 30
minute blocks.
98
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 99 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Recording
06
Stopping a timer recording
Timer recording FAQ
1
STOP
REC
(LCD page 1) Press during a timer recording.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm.
Preventing use of the recorder before a timer
recording (child lock)
You can make all the front panel and remote control
buttons inoperative using the child lock feature. This is
useful when you set a timer recording and want to make
sure that the timer settings are not changed before
recording has finished.
SOURCE
1
If the recorder is on, switch it into standby.
2 STOP
[Front panel] Press and hold for three
seconds to lock the controls.
The front panel display briefly shows LOCKED. If any
buttons are pressed on the remote or front panel,
LOCKED is briefly displayed again.
• To unlock the recorder, press and hold (Stop) on
the front panel (while the recorder is stopped) for
three seconds until the display shows UNLOCKED.
• Even if you make child lock settings, this recorder can
still be controlled by the remote of a connected
plasma television. If you do not want this unit to be
able to be controlled by another component when
you have set a child lock, turn this recorder’s HDMI
Control to Off (page 159).
Frequently Asked Questions
• Even though the timer is set, the recorder doesn’t start
recording!
Check that the disc loaded or HDD is recordable, not
locked (see Lock Disc on page 147), and that there are
fewer than 99/999 titles already on the DVD/HDD.
• The recorder won’t let me enter a timer programme!
Why not?
You can’t enter a timer programme if the clock isn’t
set.
• What happens when two or more timer programmes
overlap?
Basically, the programme with the earlier recording
start time has priority. However, the recorder will
start recording the programme with the later start
time after the earlier programme is finished.
If schedule to record two programmes have the same
times (but different channels, for example), then only
one of the two programmes will be recorded. In this
event you should cancel the scheduled recording of
the lesser important programme. If one of the
overlapping programmes is a regular timer
programme for a digital broadcast, you may choose
‘Cancel Once’ in order to avoid having it overlap with
a separately scheduled programme (see Skipping a
regular timer programme on page 89).
99
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 100 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
06
Recording
Simultaneous recording and
playback (Chase Play)
Recording from an external component
HDD
You can record from an external component, such as a
camcorder or VCR, connected to an external input of the
recorder.
Chase Play allows you to watch a recording that is still in
progress from the start, without having to wait until the
recording has finished (i.e., playback is ‘chasing’ the
recording).
In fact, you’re not just limited to watching the recording
in progress. You can watch anything else already on the
HDD (or on a DVD if you’re recording to the HDD) by
selecting it from the Disc Navigator screen (see Using
the Disc Navigator with recordable discs and the HDD on
page 106).
Chase Play is not possible when DV is the recording input.
(LCD page 1) Press during recording to start
•
playback from the beginning of the current
recording1.
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
1 Make sure that the component you want to
record from is connected properly to the HDD/DVD
recorder.
See Chapter 2 (Recorder connections) for connection
options.
INPUT
2
(LCD page 2) Press repeatedly to select an
external input of the recorder to record from.
The current input is shown on-screen and in the front
panel display:
• AV2/L1 – Input 12
Check that the Audio In settings for External Audio and
Bilingual Recording are as you want them (see Audio In
on page 155).
• If the aspect ratio is distorted (squashed or stretched),
adjust on the source component or your TV before
recording.
DISC
• NAVIGATOR Press during recording to select another
title to play.
You can use all the usual playback controls, such as
pause, slow-motion play, scan and skip.
• To watch video coming in via the DV input (front
panel), select DV > DV Video Playback from the
Home Menu (see also Playing from a DV camcorder on
page 114).
• To stop playback, press (Stop)(recording will
continue).
• To stop recording, press STOP REC (playback will
continue).
• During recording or in timer recording standby, you
can’t play an HDD title, DVD or Video CD/Super VCD
disc if the Input Line System setting doesn’t match
the TV line system of the disc/HDD title (see also
Additional information about the TV system settings
on page 161). Also, during simultaneous recording
and playback, if the TV line system of the playback
track/title changes then playback will automatically
stop.
3
4
5
REC
MODE (LCD page 1) Set the recording quality.
• See Setting the picture quality/recording time on
page 95 for detailed information.
HDD/
DVD
Select the HDD or DVD for recording.
REC
Press to start recording.
• If your source is copy-protected using Copy Guard,
you will not be able to record it. See Restrictions on
video recording on page 92 for more details.
Note
1 You can’t start playback immediately after recording starts. Simultaneous playback and recording doesn’t work while copying or backing up.
2 This cannot be selected if AV2/L1 In is set to Decoder (see AV2/L1 In on page 155).
100
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 101 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Recording
06
• A VR mode DVD-R/-RW (excluding DVD-R DL) disc
can still be recorded and edited on this recorder even
after finalizing.
Playing your recordings on other
DVD players
• DVD-R DL (Video mode) discs and DVD+R DL discs
must be finalized in order to play in other recorders/
players. Note however that some recorders/players
will not play even finalized dual-layer discs.
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW
Most regular DVD players can play finalized discs
recorded in DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) and DVD+R discs.
A number of players (including many Pioneer models)
can also play DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode,
finalized or not. Most players will not play VR mode DVD
-R discs, although some DVD-ROM drives and DVD
recorders may be able to (finalization might be
necessary). Check the manual that came with the player
to check what kinds of discs it will play.
When you finalize a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R
disc, a title menu is created from which you can select
titles when you play the disc. There are a number of
different styles of title menu to choose from to suit the
content of the disc.
All the title menus are navigated in the usual way,
pressing MENU or TOP MENU to display the menu, then
using the /// followed by ENTER to select titles
and start playback.
1 Load the disc you want to finalize.
Make sure that the recorder is stopped before proceeding.
HOME
MENU
2
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu.
SETUP
ENTER
Select ‘Finalize’ > ‘Finalize’ > ‘Next Screen’.
3
Disc Setup
Basic
Finalize
Next Screen
Initialize
Finalize
Undo Finalize
Start
Optimize HDD
Finalizing a disc
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings on the disc so that it can
be played on a regular DVD player or computer equipped
with a suitable DVD-ROM drive.1
Note that the disc name will appear in the title menu after
you finalize a disc. Make sure the disc name is as you
want it before you finalize the disc as it can’t be changed
afterwards. If you want to rename the disc, see Input Disc
Name on page 147 before starting the steps below.
ENTER
4
For DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) and DVD+R/
+RW discs only, select a title menu style, then select
‘Yes’ to start finalization or ‘No’ to cancel.
The menu you select will be the one that appears when
the ‘top menu’ (or ‘menu’ for a DVD+R/+RW) is selected
on any DVD player.
Finalize
DVD+RW discs don’t generally need finalizing. However,
if you want a title menu to appear when you play the disc,
then you will need to finalize. When using a DVD+RW,
you can still record and edit even after finalizing.
although the title menu will disappear if you do so.
Finalize the disc again to generate a new title menu.
Important
• Once you’ve finalized a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or
DVD+R disc, you can’t edit or record anything else
on that disc. However, the finalization on a DVD-RW
disc maybe ‘undone’; see Undo Finalize on page 148
for how to do this.
• Discs recorded partially or fully on the Pioneer DVR7000 DVD recorder do not support this feature. These
discs will have only a text title menu when finalized on
this recorder.
Note
1 If the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder, you will not be able to finalize the disc. See Additional
information about the TV system settings on page 161 for how to change the recorder’s setting.
101
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 102 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
06
Recording
5 The recorder will now start finalizing the disc.
During finalization:
• If the finalization process of a DVD-RW or DVD+R/
+RW disc is going to take more than around four
minutes, you can press ENTER to cancel. Around
four minutes before completion, the option to cancel
disappears.
HOME
MENU
1
ENTER
2
Select ‘Initialize’ > ‘Video Mode’, ‘VR
Mode’ or ‘Initialize DVD+RW’.
• You can’t cancel the finalization of a VR mode DVD-R
disc.
Disc Setup
• How long finalization takes depends on the type of
disc, how much is recorded on the disc and the
number of titles on the disc. A disc recorded in VR
mode can take up to one hour to finalize. DVD-R/-RW
(Video mode) and DVD+R/+RW discs can take up to
20 minutes.
DVD-R/-RW discs can be initialized for either Video mode
recording or VR mode recording.1
Basic
VR Mode
Start
Initialize
Video Mode
Start
Finalize
Initialize DVD+RW
Start
Optimize HDD
Initializing recordable DVD discs
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+RW DVD-RAM
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu.
SETUP
ENTER
3
Select ‘Start’.
It takes about 30 seconds to initialize the disc (except
DVD-RAM discs, which can take up to an hour).
Initializing Disc
When you first load a blank DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc,
the recorder initializes it for recording automatically. By
default, blank DVD-RW discs are initialized for VR mode
recording. See DVD-RW Auto Initialize below if you want to
change the default to Video mode.
DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode recordings out of
the box; if you want to use a DVD-R for VR mode
recording, you must initialize it before recording anything
on the disc.
DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can also be initialized in
order to erase the contents of the disc.
Important
• Initializing a DVD-RW, DVD+RW or DVD-RAM disc
will erase everything recorded on it. Make sure there
is nothing on the disc that you want to keep!
• You may not be able to re-initialize a DVD-RW disc in
a different format if it was originally initialized on an
older DVD recorder.
• Once initialized for VR mode recording, you can’t reinitialize a DVD-R back to Video mode.
Pr 1
1 min left
DVD-RW Auto Initialize
DVD-RW
• Default setting: VR Mode
Initialization mode is automatically carried out when you
insert a blank DVD-RW. You must set the desired
initialization mode before inserting a disc.
HOME
MENU
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu.
SETUP
ENTER
2
Select ‘Basic’>’DVD-RW Auto Init.’, then
‘VR Mode’ or ‘Video Mode’.
Disc Setup
Basic
Input Disc Name
VR Mode
Initialize
Lock Disc
Video Mode
Finalize
DVD-RW Auto Init.
Optimize HDD
Note
1 If a disc was previously finalized on an older DVD recorder, you may not be able to re-initialize and/or initialize it for Video mode recording.
102
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 103 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Playback
07
Chapter 7
Playback
Introduction
3
Most of the features described in this chapter make use
of on-screen displays. Navigate these using the cursor
buttons and ENTER. To go back one level from any
screen, use the RETURN button.
Remember also that the button guide at the bottom of
every screen shows which buttons do what.
• The Disc Navigator is automatically displayed for
WMA/MP3 files and Audio CDs (see Using the Disc
Navigator with playback-only discs on page 107).
• This unit automatically searches for track names of
Audio CDs (see About the automatic display of titles
on page 107).
Many of the functions covered in this chapter apply to the
HDD, DVD discs, Video CDs, Super VCDs, WMA/MP3/
DivX discs and CDs, although the exact operation of
some varies slightly with the kind of disc loaded.
• Many functions are not available when a Video CD is
playing in PBC mode. Start playback from the Disc
Navigator screen for non-PBC playback (see Using the
Disc Navigator with playback-only discs on page 107).
• When playing video from the HDD, playback will
automatically stop after the end of a title is reached.
• There may be a slight pause when playback switches
from the first to the second layer of a dual-layer disc.
• For discs that contain JPEG picture files, see The
PhotoViewer on page 140.
Basic playback
Start playback.
• If you’re playing a DVD-Video or Video CD, a disc
menu may appear when you start playback. Use the
/// buttons, number buttons, and ENTER to
navigate DVD disc menus, and the number buttons
and ENTER for Video CD menus.
• See the following sections for more details on playing
specific kinds of discs.
4
Press to stop playback.
5 When you’ve finished using the recorder, eject
the disc and switch the recorder back into standby.
ALL
This section shows you how to use your recorder for
playback of discs (DVD, CD, etc.), and for playback of
video from the HDD.
Important
• Throughout this manual, the term ‘DVD’ means any
kind of playable or recordable DVD. If a function is
specific to a particular kind of DVD disc, it is specified.
• Some DVD-Video, DVD+R and DVD+RW discs don’t
allow certain playback controls to operate at certain
points in the disc. This is not a malfunction.
Playing DVD discs
The table below shows the basic playback controls for
DVD-Video, and recordable DVD discs.
Press to start playback.
If RESUME is displayed on-screen, play(LCD page 1) back starts from the place last stopped.
Press to stop playback.
You can resume playback from the same
(LCD page 1) point by pressing (Play). (Press (Stop)
again to cancel the resume function.)
HDD/
1 DVD (LCD page 1) Select the HDD or DVD for
playback.
• If playing video from the HDD, skip to step 3 below.
• Select DVD for any kind of disc playback.
OPEN/
2 CLOSE
[Front panel] Load a disc.
Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc
tray guide to align the disc (if you’re loading a doublesided DVD-Video disc, load it with the side you want to
play face down).
Pauses playback, or restarts playback
when paused.
(LCD page 1)
/
/
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly
to increase the scanning speed.
(LCD page 1)
Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title.
DVD+R/DVD+RW only:
(LCD page 1) (Previous) may not always skip to the
previous title.
• If you want to play a DTS Audio CD, please first read
the note on page 104.
103
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 104 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
07
Playback
Except VR mode: During playback, enter a
1 2 3
chapter number then press ENTER to skip
4 5 6
directly to that chapter within the currently
7 8 9
playing title.
0 CLEAR
On some discs, you can also use the num-
(LCD page 2) ber buttons to select numbered items in
ENTER
the disc menu.
VR mode only: During playback, enter a
title number then press ENTER.
All: Press CLEAR to clear a number entry
and start again.
/
/
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly
to increase the scanning speed.
(LCD page 1)
Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title.
(LCD page 1)
During playback, enter a title number then
1 2 3
press ENTER to skip directly to that title.
4 5 6
Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and
7 8 9
start again.
0 CLEAR
(Commercial back/skip)
Each press skips backward/ forward
(LCD page 1) progressively up to a maximum of two
hours in either direction.
(LCD page 2)
While paused, press and hold to start
slow-motion playback. Press repeatedly to
(LCD page 1) change the playback speed.
While paused, press to advance a single
frame in either direction.
(Commercial back/skip)
Each press skips backward/ forward
(LCD page 1) progressively up to a maximum of two
hours in either direction.
CM
BACK
/
CM
SKIP
/
TOP MENU MENU
ENTER
RETURN
Press to display the menu of a DVD-Video
disc. (DVD+R/+RW discs finalized on this
recorder will display the Disc Navigator.
Press MENU to display the disc menu.)
Use the cursor buttons to navigate DVDVideo disc menus; press ENTER to select
items.
Press to return to the previous level of a
DVD-Video disc menu.
ENTER
CM
BACK
CM
SKIP
While paused, press and hold to start
slow-motion playback. Press repeatedly to
(LCD page 1) change the playback speed.
While paused, press to advance a single
frame in either direction.
/
/
Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs
The table below shows the basic playback controls for
Audio CDs1, and WMA/MP3 files.
Playing from the HDD
The table below shows the basic playback controls when
playing video recorded on the hard disk (HDD).
Press to start playback.
If RESUME is displayed on-screen, play(LCD page 1) back starts from the place last stopped.
Playback automatically stops after the end
of a title is reached.
Press to stop playback.
You can resume playback from the same
(LCD page 1) point by pressing (Play). (Press (Stop)
again to cancel the resume function.)
Pauses playback, or restarts playback
when paused.
Press to start playback.
(LCD page 1)
Press to stop playback.
(LCD page 1)
Pauses playback, or restarts playback
when paused.
(LCD page 1)
Press to start scanning. Press again to
increase the scanning speed. (There are
(LCD page 1) two scan speeds; the current scan speed
is shown on-screen.)
/
/
Press to skip to previous/next track.
(LCD page 1)
(LCD page 1)
Note
1 If you want to play a DTS Audio CD, make sure the recorder is connected to a DTS-compatible amp/receiver with a digital connection. Noise
will be output through the analog outputs. Also make sure that STEREO is selected using the
button (LCD page 3) (see Switching audio
channels on page 111).
104
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 105 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Playback
07
Playing Video CD/Super VCDs
Playing DivX video files
The table below shows the basic playback controls for
Video CD/Super VCDs.
The table below shows the basic playback controls for
DivX video files.
Some discs feature Playback Control (PBC for short)
menus. These discs show PBC in the display when you
load them and display a menu on-screen from where you
can select what to watch.1
Press to start playback.
Video CD only: If RESUME is displayed on(LCD page 1) screen, playback starts from the place last
stopped.
Press to stop playback.
Video CD only: You can resume playback
(LCD page 1) from the same point by pressing
(Play). (Press (Stop) again to
cancel the resume function.)
Press to start playback.
If RESUME is displayed on-screen, play(LCD page 1) back starts from the place last stopped.
Playback of titles (DivX files) proceeds in
alphabetical order.
Press to stop playback.
You can resume playback from the same
(LCD page 1) point by pressing (Play). (Press (Stop)
again to cancel the resume function.)
Pauses playback, or restarts playback
when paused.
(LCD page 1)
/
/
/
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly
to increase the scanning speed.
(LCD page 1)
Press to skip to previous/next track.
When a PBC menu is displayed, press to
(LCD page 1) display the previous/next page.
During playback, enter a track number
1 2 3
then press ENTER to skip directly to that
4 5 6
track.
7 8 9
Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and
0 CLEAR
use to select numbered menu items.
Press to skip to previous/next title.
(LCD page 1)
While paused, press to advance one
frame. Press and hold to start slow motion
(LCD page 1) playback (press repeatedly to change the
slow motion play speed).
/
Press to display the playback audio type;
press repeatedly to change the playback
(LCD page 3) audio type.
Press to display subtitle information; press
repeatedly to change subtitles.
start again.
(LCD page 2) While a PBC menu screen is displayed,
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly
to increase the scanning speed.
(LCD page 1)
(LCD page 1)
/
Pauses playback, or restarts playback
when paused.
(LCD page 3)
ENTER
Video CD in non-PBC mode only:
(Commercial back/skip)
(LCD page 1) Each press skips backward/forward
progressively up to a maximum of two
hours in either direction.
CM
BACK
CM
SKIP
While paused, press and hold to start
slow-motion playback. Press repeatedly to
(LCD page 1) change the playback speed (forward only).
While paused, press to advance a single
frame (forward only).
/
RETURN
Press to display the disc menu of a Video
CD/Super VCD playing in PBC mode.
Note
1 When playing in PBC mode, some playback features, such as search, repeat and programme play are not available. You can play a PBC Video
CD/Super VCD in non-PBC mode by starting playback using the Disc Navigator (see Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only discs on
page 107).
105
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 106 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Playback
07
Changing the display style of the Disc
Navigator
Using the Disc Navigator with
recordable discs and the HDD
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
You can use the Disc Navigator to browse and edit video
on recordable DVDs and the HDD, and to view
information on titles.
See also Editing on page 117 for more on editing
recordable discs.
You can choose to display titles in the Disc Navigator in
various different ways, sorted alphabetically, by
recording date, by genre, and so on. You can also choose
whether to display four or eight titles on the screen at the
same time.
1
Display the view options panel.
The view options panel
1
HDD/
DVD
(LCD page 1) Select the HDD or DVD.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
Style
2
DISC
NAVIGATOR
11
4 Titles
4 Titles
Open the Disc Navigator.
Sort order
23:00 FRI
Pr 4 SP
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 4 SP
11/29Mon
7:00PM
2ch
9
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
3
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
7
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Recent first
SP
2h00m(1.0G)
8
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
7
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
All Genres
2h00m(1.0G)
All Genres
All Genres
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
Genre
10Titles
101
MENU
1h00m(1.0G)
1h00m(1.0G)
• You can also access the Disc Navigator from the
Home Menu.
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
SP
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
2
Recent first
NEW first
Disc Navigator (HDD)
10Titles
23:00 FRI
Pr 4 SP
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 4 SP
11/29Mon
7:00PM
2ch
MENU
1h00m(1.0G)
1h00m(1.0G)
ENTER
2
Choose ‘Style’, ‘Sort order’ or ‘Genre’,
then press ENTER to see the available view options.
• Style – Select four or eight titles per screen view
• Sort order – Sort by date (most recent first),
unwatched first, title name or recording date (oldest
first)
• Genre – Display all genres or just a selected genre
3
Browse the list of titles.
• Use the / buttons (LCD page 1) to display the
previous/next page of titles.
• To change the thumbnail picture displayed for a title
see Set Thumbnail on page 121.
• For HDD recordings, you should be able to see a
thumbnail title digest. If it doesn’t display, set Set
Preview to Normal. See Set Preview on page 160.
4
106
En
ENTER
Play the highlighted title.
• You can also select Play from the command menu
options.
ENTER
3
Choose a view option, then press ENTER.
The title list display is updated according to the new
display preferences.
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 107 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Playback
07
• Proceed to step 4 when playing back an Audio CD.
Using the Disc Navigator with
playback-only discs
Disc Navigator (DVD/CD)
Track List
Use the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc
and start playback.
CD
DVD-Video Video CD Super VCD
HDD/
DVD
1
HDD
Select DVD.
Remain
100.0 G
1
TRACK1
2
TRACK2
3
TRACK3
4
TRACK4
5
TRACK5
6
TRACK6
7
TRACK7
8
TRACK8
10 Tracks
MENU
TRACK1
0.04.30 / 1.14.00
TRACK3
Track Repeat
Stereo
3
650MB
classical
0.05.30
10.00.00
HOME
MENU
2
Display the Home Menu.
SETUP
ENTER
3
Select a folder that contains the tracks or
titles you want to play back.
ENTER
3
Select ‘Disc Navigator’.
Alternatively, for a Video CD or Super VCD, you can press
DISC NAVIGATOR, which takes you straight to the Disc
Navigator screen.
• Use the
/
(LCD page 3) buttons to display the
previous/next page of folders/tracks/titles.
ENTER
4
Select what you want to play.
Depending on the type of disc you have loaded, the Disc
Navigator looks slightly different, but they are all
navigated in the same way.
The screen below shows a Video CD. Navigate to the
track/chapter/title that you want to play.
Track01
Disc Navigator
Video CD
Track (01-99)
Track01
Track02
Track03
Track04
Track05
Track06
Track07
Track08
Total 0.50.50
Playback starts after you press ENTER.
CD
1
WMA/MP3 DivX
HDD/
DVD
ENTER
4
Select what you want to play.
Playback starts after you press ENTER.
• You can also select Play from the command menu
options.
• For discs that contain CD audio tracks and WMA/
MP3 tracks or DivX titles, you can switch the playback
area between CD, WMA/MP3 and DivX. Playback
stops if you switch the playback area during
playback. See Changing the display style of the Disc
Navigator on page 108.
• In case of an Audio CD, press DISP (LCD page 3) to
display the detailed information (album name and
artist name) on the track currently selected with a
cursor.
About the automatic display of titles
This unit has built-in information on titles extracted from
the Gracenote® database.
This unit automatically searches for titles when you press
(Play) (LCD page 1) after loading an Audio CD or when
you display the Disc Navigator. The following screen is
displayed.
Select DVD.
HDD/DVD RECORDER
Accessing to Gracenote Database
2
DISC
NAVIGATOR Open the Disc Navigator.
• The Disc Navigator is also accessible from the Home
Menu.
Upon completion of search, album name, artist name,
track name, and genre are automatically displayed.
107
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 108 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Playback
07
• When multiple titles have been found, use / to
select a title and press ENTER. If you select ‘No
Information’ and press ENTER, ‘Unknown’ is
displayed.
• ‘Unknown’ is displayed when there are no titles found.
ENTER
2
Choose ‘Data Format’ or ‘Display Mode’,
then press ENTER to see the available view options.
• Data Format
CD – Displays tracks on an Audio CD.
• Depending on the title, a different title name may be
displayed.
• Information on new CDs on sale may not be
registered in the Gracenote database installed in this
unit. Use the Update Disc with the latest data
downloaded from the Pioneer website to update the
built-in Gracenote database (see Gracenote Database
on page 160).
WMA/MP3 – Displays WMA/MP3 folders or tracks.
DivX – Displays DivX folders or titles.
• Display Mode
Folder – Switches to the folder display for WMA/MP3
or DivX files.
Track – Switches to the track display for WMA/MP3
files.
• GUI displays may show the Gracenote database as
‘Database’.
Reloading files from a WMA/MP3 disc
When this unit reloads a WMA/MP3 disc with over 1000
files or over 100 folders, the files and folders are displayed
in the Disc Navigator.
1
Navigate to the last entry in the folder list
(‘Read next: ...’).
Title – Switches to the title display for DivX files.
ENTER
3
Choose a view option, then press ENTER.
The title list display is updated according to the new
display preferences.
Scanning discs
ALL
ENTER
2
Load the next batch of up to 999 files/99
folders from the disc.
It takes several minutes for files to be reloaded.1
Changing the display style of the Disc
Navigator
You can scan discs at various speeds, forwards or
backwards.2
1
(LCD page 1) During playback, start
reverse or forward scanning.
• The scanning speed is shown on-screen.
You can display titles by data format or by folder/track.
1
Display the view options panel.
The view options panel
2
Press repeatedly to change the
scanning speed.
There are four scanning speeds available when playing
HDD video, a DVD or a DivX title. Reverse playback is also
possible with HDD and DVD-Video.3
There are two scanning speeds for other types of disc.
Disc Navigator (DVD/CD)
Track List
Data Format
WMA/MP3
CD
Display Mode
Track
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
001
TRACK1
002
TRACK2
003
TRACK3
004
TRACK4
005
TRACK5
006
TRACK6
007
TRACK7
008
TRACK8
10 Tracks
3
Resume normal playback.
MENU
TRACK1
TRACK3
Track Repeat
Stereo
WMA 999MB
0.05.30
10.00.00
3
Note
1 You can press HOME MENU to exit the Disc Navigator screen while the recorder is reloading files.
2 • No subtitles are displayed when scanning DVDs and DivX titles.
• No sound is output when scanning from the HDD, DVDs and DivX, except on forward SCAN 1.
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc.
3 Reverse playback may not be smooth.
108
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 109 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Playback
Playing in slow motion
07
HOME
MENU
•
DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD DivX
SETUP
Select ‘Play Mode’ from the Home Menu.
Play Mode
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Programme
You can play video at various slow motion speeds. DVDs
and video on the HDD can be played in slow motion in
either direction, while Video CDs/Super VCDs and DivX
titles can only be played forwards in slow motion.
Time Search
Title Search
Chapter Search
There is no sound when playing in slow motion.
1
/
/
/
/
Press and hold to start slow motion
2
reverse or forward play.
3
Press repeatedly to change the slow
motion speed.
The current playback speed is indicated on-screen.
4
• Select Play Mode from the command menu for
Audio CDs, WMA/MP3 files, or DivX2 files by pressing
in the Disc Navigator.
(LCD page 1) Pause playback.
Search Mode
DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD DivX
The Search Mode feature lets you start playback from a
specified point in a disc by time3 or by title/chapter/track
number.
Resume normal playback.
ENTER
Frame advance/frame reverse
1
Select ‘Search Mode’ from the Play Mode
menu, then choose a search option.
The available search options depend on the type of disc.
DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD DivX
You can advance or back up video on a DVD disc1 or the
HDD frame-by-frame.
With Video CDs/Super VCDs and DivX titles, you can only
use frame advance.
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
2
(LCD page 2) Enter a title/chapter/track
number or a search time.
Play Mode
1
/
(LCD page 1) Pause playback.
/
2
each press.
3
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Programme
Time Search
Title Search
Chapter Search
Input Time
0.01.00
Back up or advance one frame with
Resume normal playback.
The Play Mode menu
ALL
The Play Mode menu gives you access to search
functions, repeat and programme play functions.
Time Search (HDD, DVD): For example, for 25 minutes
into the current title, press 2, 5, 0, 0. For 1 hour and 15
minutes and 20 seconds into the title, press 1, 1, 5, 2, 0.
Time Search (Video CD): For example, for 2 minutes and 30
seconds into the current track, press 2, 3, 0.
Title/Chapter/Track Search: For example, for track 6, press
6.
3
ENTER
Start playback.
Note
1 Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached.
2 For DivX files, select Play Mode in the Disc Navigator while playback is stopped and in the Home Menu during playback respectively.
3 When using time search, playback may occasionally start slightly before or after the time you input.
109
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 110 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
07
Playback
A-B Repeat
ENTER
DVD HDD
CD
Video CD DivX
The A-B Repeat function allows you to specify two points
(A and B) within a track or title that form a loop which is
played over and over.1
•
Select ‘Repeat’ from the Play Mode menu,
then choose a repeat play mode.
Play Mode
Repeat Title
Repeat Chapter
Repeat Off
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Programme
ENTER
1
During playback, select ‘A-B Repeat’ from
the Play Mode menu.
2 ENTER With ‘A (Loop Start)’ highlighted, press at
the point you want the loop to start.
Play Mode
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Programme
A (Loop Start)
B (Loop End)
Off
• To resume normal playback, select Repeat Off from
the Repeat Play menu, or press CLEAR (LCD page 2)
if no menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is
displayed.
Programme play
HDD DVD-Video
CD
Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3
This feature lets you program the play order of titles/
chapters3/folders/tracks on a disc or the HDD.
3 ENTER With ‘B (Loop End)’ highlighted, press at the
point you want the loop to end.
Playback immediately jumps back to the start point and
plays the loop round and round.
• When playing a DVD-Video, DVD-R/-RW (Video mode),
DVD+R/+RW, or from the HDD, the start and end
points of the loop must be in the same title.
ENTER
1
Select ‘Programme’ from the Play Mode
menu, then ‘Input/Edit Programme’.
The Input/Edit Programme screen varies according to the
disc type. Below is the DVD input screen.
Programme
• To resume normal playback, select Off from the A-B
Repeat menu, or press CLEAR (LCD page 2) if no
menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is
displayed.
Repeat play
Step
01.001
02.
03.
04.
05.
06.
07.
08.
Title
Title
Title
Title
(01-03)
01
02
03
Chapter(001-015)
Chapter 001
Chapter 002
Chapter 003
Chapter 004
Chapter 005
Chapter 006
Chapter 007
Chapter 008
ALL
There are various repeat play options, depending on the
kind of disc loaded, or if you’re using the HDD for
playback. It’s also possible to use repeat play together
with programme play to repeat the tracks/chapters in the
programme list (see Programme play below).2
ENTER
2
Select a title, chapter, folder or track for
the current step in the programme list.
After pressing ENTER to add the title/chapter/folder/
track, the step number automatically moves down one.
• To insert a step into the programme list, highlight the
step number where you want to insert another step,
then select a chapter/title/folder/track as usual. After
pressing ENTER, all the subsequent steps move
down one.
Note
1 If you switch camera angles on a DVD during A-B repeat play, A-B repeat is cancelled.
2 If you switch the camera angle during repeat play of a DVD-Video disc, repeat play is cancelled.
3 When playing a programme list of DVD-Video chapters, chapters not included in the programme list may be sometimes be played, depending
on the disc.
110
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 111 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Playback
• To delete a step from the programme list, highlight
the step you want to delete, then press CLEAR (LCD
page 2).
3 Repeat step 2 to build up a programme list.
A programme list can contain up to 24 titles/chapters/
folders/tracks.
4
(LCD page 1) Play the programme list.
Programme play remains active until you cancel
programme play, erase the programme list, eject the disc
or switch off the recorder.
07
•
(LCD page 3) Select/change the subtitle
language.
The current subtitle language is shown on-screen and in
the front panel display.
• To switch off subtitles, press
page 2).
then CLEAR (LCD
Switching DVD and DivX soundtracks
DVD-Video DivX
Tip
• To save your programme list and exit the programme
edit screen without starting playback, press
HOME MENU.
• During programme play, press (Next) (LCD page
1) to skip to the next programme step.
• To repeat play the programme list, select
Programme Repeat from the Repeat Play Mode
menu (see Repeat play on page 110).
• Except CD, WMA/MP3: Press CLEAR (LCD page 2)
during playback to switch off programme play (if no
menu OSD, such as the Disc Navigator, is displayed).
Press while stopped to erase the programme list.
• From the programme menu you can also:
Start Programme Play – Starts playback of a saved
programme list
Cancel Programme Play – Turns off programme
play, but does not erase the programme list
Erase Programme List – Erases the programme list
and turns off programme play
Displaying and switching subtitles
DVD-Video DivX
Some DVD and DivX discs have subtitles in one or more
languages; the disc box will usually tell you which subtitle
languages are available. You can switch subtitle
language during playback.1
Check the disc packaging for details of the subtitle
options.
When playing a DVD disc or DivX title recorded with two
or more soundtracks (often in different languages), you
can switch the soundtrack during playback.2
Check the disc packaging for details of the soundtrack
options.
•
(LCD page 3) Change the audio soundtrack.
The current audio language is shown on-screen and in
the front panel display.
• The sound may drop out for a few seconds when
switching soundtracks.
Switching audio channels
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM HDD
CD
Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3
3
For HDD and VR mode content recorded with bilingual
audio, you can switch between left (L) channel, right (R)
channel, or both (L+R).4
When playing Video CDs and Audio CDs you can switch
between stereo, just the left channel or just the right
channel.
Some Super VCDs have two soundtracks. With these
discs you can switch between the two soundtracks as
well as individual channels in each.
•
(LCD page 3) Press repeatedly to display/
switch the audio channel.
The audio channel(s) currently playing are indicated onscreen.
Note
1 • Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to access.
• To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle Language on page 156.
2 • Some discs only allow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to access.
• To set audio language preferences, see Audio Language on page 156.
3 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off (HDD Recording Format on page 158).
4 • When playing a Bilingual recording on a VR mode disc, if you are listening to the Dolby Digital soundtrack via the digital output, you cannot
switch the audio channel. Set Dolby Digital Out to Dolby Digital PCM (see Dolby Digital Out on page 155) or listen via the analog outputs
if you need to switch the audio channel.
• When playing a Dolby Digital source, you can also switch channels from the Dual Mono menu of the receiver subwoofer — see Dual mono
setting on page 38.
111
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 112 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Playback
07
HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM
L+R – Both channels (default)
L – Left channel only
R – Right channel only
CD
HDD and removable disc activity display
Press DISP once to see the HDD and removable disc
(DVD, etc.) activity. Use the HDD/DVD button (LCD page 1)
to switch between the two kinds of display.
The example displays below show high-speed copying
from HDD to DVD, and HDD chase playback.
Video CD WMA/MP3
Stereo – Stereo (default)
1/L – Left channel only
2/R – Right channel only
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)
HDD
Remain 10h35m
Stop
Hi-Speed Copy
HDD DVD
DVD-RW Video
Remain –h––m
Stop
0h08m left
Super VCD
1 Stereo – Soundtrack 1/Stereo (default)
1 L – Soundtrack 1/Left channel
1 R – Soundtrack 1/Right channel
2 Stereo – Soundtrack 2/Stereo
2 L – Soundtrack 2/Left channel
2 R – Soundtrack 2/Right channel
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)
HDD
Remain 0h52m
Stop
Recording time
Switching camera angles
Relative playback position
DVD-Video
Some DVD-Video discs feature scenes shot from two or
more angles — check the disc box for details: it should be
marked with a
icon if it contains multi-angle scenes.
When a multi-angle scene is playing, the same icon
appears on screen to let you know that other angles are
available (this can be switched off if you prefer — see
Angle Indicator on page 158).
DVD-RW Video
Remain 10h35m
Chase Play
Rec
Shows recording restrictions for
the current channel programme
Stop
DVD-RW VR
Original
Disc Name
Resume
XP (1h00m/DVD)
Finalized
Rem.
0h35m
ABC Pr 1
Stereo
Copy Once
: Comedy shows
DVD Mode
•
(LCD page 3) Switch the camera angle.
• The angle number is displayed on-screen.
Indicates copy-protected material
• If the disc was paused, playback starts again with the
new angle.
Indicates a multi-angle scene
Play
DVD-R Video
Displaying disc information on-screen
You can display various on-screen information about the
disc loaded or the HDD.
Title Name
3–2
0. 00. 15
Chapter Time 0. 00. 21
Chapter Total 0h01m52s
4.32Mbps
!
: 21/11 Football match
Indicates the data transfer rate
DISP
•
(LCD page 3) Display/change the on-screen
information.
• Press once to show the HDD and removable disc
(DVD, etc.) activity together. Press again to show the
status of just the currently selected playback/
recording device (HDD or removable disc).
• To hide the information display, press DISP
repeatedly until it disappears.
112
En
Tip
• See Switching camera angles above for more on
multi-angle scene switching.
• When using the simultaneous play and record
feature, the display shows information for playback
only.
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 113 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Playback
07
• During real-time copy, the copy source playback
information is displayed.
• The Video mode DVD-R/-RW displays become the
same as a DVD-Video disc once the disc is finalized.
• The total recording time figure shown in parenthesis
is calculated based on a 12 cm/4.7 GB disc at the
displayed record setting.
• Recording and playback times for TV recordings are
approximately 0.1 % shorter than the actual time.
This is because of the slightly different frame rates of
TV broadcasts versus DVD.
• The frame number is shown next to the elapsed time
display when the disc is paused.
• Copy Once or Can’t Record messages may appear
in the stop or recording displays. These indicate that
the broadcast TV programme contains copy control
information.
113
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 114 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
08
Playing and recording from a DV camcorder
Chapter 8
Playing and recording from a DV
camcorder
You can play back and record video from a DV camcorder
connected to the DV IN jack on the front panel of this
recorder.
Recording from a DV camcorder
• The source signal must be DVC-SD format.
• You can’t record date and time information from DV
cassette.
Important
• If you connect a second recorder using a DV cable,
you cannot control the second unit from this one.
• During DV recording, if a part of the tape is blank, or
has copy-protected material on it, this recorder will
pause recording. Recording will restart automatically
when there is a recordable signal. However, if there is
more than two minutes of blank tape, this recorder
will stop recording and the camcorder should stop
(depending on the camcorder).
• You can’t control this recorder remotely from a
component connected to the DV IN jack.
Playing from a DV camcorder
1 Make sure your DV camcorder is connected to the
front panel DV IN jack.
Copying from a DV source
Using the recorder’s remote, you can control both the
camcorder and this recorder.
2 From the Initial Setup menu, check that the DV
audio input is setup as you would like.
See DV Input on page 155 for more on this.
Important
• Some camcorders cannot be controlled using this
recorder’s remote.
• Check also that the Audio In settings for External
Audio and Bilingual Recording are as you want
them (see Audio In on page 155).
• For best results when recording from a DV camcorder
to this recorder, we recommend cueing the
camcorder to the place you want to start recording
from and setting the camcorder to play-pause.
HOME
MENU
3 SETUP Select ‘DV’, then ‘DV Video Playback’ from
the Home Menu.
4 Start playback on the camcorder.
Images from the camcorder should appear on your TV.
• To record the incoming video, press HDD/DVD (LCD
page 1) to select the HDD or a DVD for recording,
then press REC (LCD page 1). Press STOP REC
(LCD page 1) to finish recording.
If there is no signal from the device connected to the
DV jack, or the signal is copy-protected, recording
will pause. It will automatically restart once there is a
recordable signal.
• The recorder will only start recording from the DV IN
jack if there is a valid signal. Recording will pause if
the signal is interrupted during recording.
• If your source is copy-protected using Copy Guard,
you will not be able to record it. See Restrictions on
video recording on page 92 for more details.
114
En
1 Make sure your DV camcorder is connected to the
front panel DV IN jack.
Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode.
2
REC
MODE (LCD page 1) Set the recording quality.
• See Setting the picture quality/recording time on
page 95 for detailed information.
3 From the Initial Setup menu, check that the DV
audio input is setup as you would like.
See DV Input on page 155 for more on this.
• Check also that the Audio In settings for External
Audio and Bilingual Recording are as you want
them (see Audio In on page 155).
HOME
MENU
4 SETUP Select ‘DV’, then ‘Copy from a DV Source’
from the Home Menu.
• DV recording only works when the DV camcorder is
in VTR mode with a tape loaded.
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 115 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Playing and recording from a DV camcorder
08
DV Auto Copy
ENTER
5
Select ‘Record to Hard Disk Drive’ or
‘Record to DVD’.
6 Find the place on the camcorder tape that you
want to start recording from.
For best results, pause playback at the point from which
you want to record.
• Depending on your camcorder, you can use this
recorder’s remote to control the camcorder using the
, , , , , and buttons (LCD page 1).
Select ‘Start Rec’.
Stop
1.02.22
Stop
Control with these
buttons
Start Rec
Pause Rec
1 Make sure your DV camcorder is connected to the
front panel DV IN jack.
Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode.
2
REC
MODE
(LCD page 1) Set the recording quality.
• See Setting the picture quality/recording time on
page 95 for detailed information.
3 From the Initial Setup menu, check that the DV
audio input is setup as you require.
See DV Input on page 155 for more on this.
ENTER
7
DV Auto Copy allows you to make an exact copy of the
contents of a DV source to the HDD or a DVD.
Stop Rec
HDD
Rem.
SP (2h00m/DVD)
32h45m
• You can pause or stop the recording by selecting
Pause Rec or Stop Rec from the on-screen display.
You cannot control the camcorder from this remote
control during recording.
• If you restart recording after stopping the camcorder,
the first few seconds of the camcorder tape will not be
recorded. Use the pause button on your camcorder
instead and recording will start immediately.
• HDD, DVD (VR Mode) and DVD-RAM only: A chapter
marker is inserted every time there is a break in the
timecode on the DV tape. This happens when the
recording is stopped or paused then restarted, for
example.
• If you don’t want to see the DV recording screen
during recording, press DISP (LCD page 3) to hide it
(press again to display).
• Check also that the Audio In settings for External
Audio and Bilingual Recording are as you want
them (see Audio In on page 155).
HOME
MENU
4 SETUP Select ‘DV’, then ‘DV Auto Copy’ from the
Home Menu.
• DV recording only works when the DV camcorder is
in VTR mode with a tape loaded.
ENTER
5
Select ‘Record to Hard Disk Drive’ or
‘Record to DVD’.
The DV tape is rewound to the beginning. Once it is
rewound, the DV tape is played from the beginning and
copied to either the HDD or a DVD.
• If there is a gap of two minutes or more between
recorded contents, the copying process is
automatically stopped.
• Once copying is finished, the DV tape is automatically
rewound.
• To cancel the copying process, press STOP REC (LCD
page 1) for more than three seconds.
• While recording, you cannot exit the DV recording
screen using the HOME MENU or RETURN button.
115
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 116 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
08
Playing and recording from a DV camcorder
About automatic finalization
If you use a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW
disc for copying, it will automatically be finalized after
copying is complete.
• You can’t customize the background for DVD-R/-RW
or DVD+R/+RW disc finalization.
• No title names are assigned.
• If you want to give the disc a name, please do so
before you start the copy (see Input Disc Name on
page 147).
• If a timer recording is scheduled to start, and in some
other instances, the disc will not be finalized.
Frequently Asked Questions
• I can’t get my DV camcorder to work with the recorder!
Check that the DV cable is properly connected. Also
make sure that what you’re trying to record is not
copy-protected.
If it still doesn’t work, try switching off the camcorder
then switch back on.
• There’s a picture, but no sound!
Try switching the DV Input setting (see DV Input on
page 155) between Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.1
About DV
Using DV, also known as i.LINK or IEEE 1394-1995, you
can connect a DV camcorder to this recorder using a DV
cable for input of audio, video, data and control signals.
“i.LINK” and the “i.LINK” logo are trademarks.
• This recorder is only compatible with DV-format
(DVC-SD) camcorders. Digital satellite receivers and
Digital VHS video recorders are not compatible.
• You cannot connect more than one DV camcorder at
a time to this recorder.
• You cannot control this recorder from external
equipment connected via the DV IN jack.
• It may not always be possible to control the
connected camcorder via the DV IN jack.
• DV camcorders can usually record audio as stereo
16-bit/48 kHz, or twin stereo tracks of 12-bit/32 kHz.
This recorder can only record one stereo audio track.
Set the DV Input setting as required (see DV Input on
page 155).
• Audio input to the DV IN jack should be 32 kHz or 48
kHz (not 44.1 kHz).
• Picture disturbance in the recording may occur if the
source component pauses playback or plays an
unrecorded section of tape, or if the power fails in the
source component, or the DV cable is disconnected.
• The DV IN jack is an input only. There is no output
functionality.
Note
1 If the audio subcode on the DV tape cannot be read correctly, the audio type will not switch automatically. You can switch the audio manually
from the External Audio setting (page 155).
116
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 117 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Editing
09
Chapter 9
Editing
Editing options
The table below shows which commands you can use with the HDD and different disc types.
HDD
DVD-R/-RW
(Video mode),
DVD+R/+RW
DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM
(VR mode)
Original
Play List
Create (page 119)
Play (page 119)
Erase (page 119)
Edit > Title Name (page 120)
Edit > Set Thumbnail (page 121)
Edit > Erase Section (page 121)
Edit > Divide (page 122)
Edit > Chapter Edit (page 122)
Edit > Set Genre (page 123)
Edit > Lock (page 124)
Edit > Move (page 124)
Edit > Combine (page 125)
Genre Name (page 125)
Multi-Mode (page 126)
Undo (page 126)
*1
*1
*1 DVD-R/-RW only
117
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 118 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Editing
09
•
The Disc Navigator screen
The Disc Navigator screen is where you can edit video
content on unfinalized Video mode and DVD-R/-RW (VR
mode) discs, DVD+R/+RW and DVD-RAM, as well as
video content on the hard disk drive.
HDD/
DVD Press to switch between the HDD and DVD Disc
Navigator screens.
• If you are editing a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or DVD
-RAM disc you can display the Play List by selecting
Play List from the view options panel (press , then
select Play List from the view options, then Play List).
Important
Disc Navigator (DVD)
• Titles that have been recorded with a Input Line
System setting different to the current setting of the
recorder are shown in the Disc Navigator with a blank
thumbnail image. See also Additional information
about the TV system settings on page 161.
Style
PlayList
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
8
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
7
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
MENU
1h00m(1.0G)
1h00m(1.0G)
• Titles on the HDD marked with a
icon are
recently recorded titles that haven’t yet been played.
3
(LCD page 1) Select the HDD or DVD.
SP
9
HDD
SP
Remain
0h30m
for the HDD, some of the titles may appear with a
mark. These titles were recorded with a Input Line
System setting different to the current setting of the
recorder. During recording, these titles cannot be
played.
HDD/
DVD
10Titles
23:00 FRI
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 4 2ch
SP
11/29Mon
7:00PM
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
Original
Original
• During recording, if you display the Disc Navigator
1
101
4 Titles
4 Titles
DISC
NAVIGATOR
Press to exit the Disc Navigator.
Editing accuracy
DISC
NAVIGATOR
2
Display the Disc Navigator screen.
Playback will automatically stop when you do this.
• The Disc Navigator is also accessible from the Home
Menu.
View options panel
Title list
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
9
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
8
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
7
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
All Genres
Available
recording time
Selected
title
SP
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
Recent first
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
10Titles
23:00 FRI
Pr 4 SP
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 4 2ch
SP
11/29Mon
7:00PM
MENU
1h00m(1.0G)
En
Frame Accurate Editing is very precise. The edit point is
accurate to the exact frame you choose. However, this
accuracy is not preserved in any copy you make if you use
the high-speed copy function to make a DVD-R/-RW
(Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW.
Video Mode Compatible Editing is less precise. The edit
point you choose will only be accurate to within one-half
to one second. On the other hand, these edit points will
be preserved if you use high-speed copy to make a DVD
-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW.
1h00m(1.0G)
Title thumbnail Title information Command
menu panel
118
Some editing commands ask you whether you want to
keep Video mode compatibility or frame accuracy (Video
Mode Compatible Editing or Frame Accurate Editing).
•
Press to display the command menu panel.
Use the / and ENTER buttons to navigate the
menus.
•
(LCD page 1) When in the title list, press to
display the previous/next page if there are more titles
than can be displayed.
•
DISP
(LCD page 3) Press to change the title
information displayed in the title list.
HDD genres
The large capacity of the HDD means that there may be
many hours of video in the recorder. To help you organize
your HDD video content you can assign different genres
to titles. There are 20 genres in total, including five userdefinable ones that you can name as you like.
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 119 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Editing
09
Create
ENTER
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only
Use this function to create a Play List and add titles to it.
2
Select ‘Play’ from the command menu
panel.
Playback of the title you selected starts.
Before you can use this command, make sure that the
Play List is switched on in the view options panel on the
left.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
10Titles
23:00 FRI
Pr 4 SP
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 4 2ch
SP Play
11/29Mon
7:00PM
SP
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
ENTER
1
panel.
Select ‘Create’ from the command menu
9
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SPEdit
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
8
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
7
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Recent first
All Genres
Disc Navigator (DVD)
1h00m(1.0G)
Multi-Mode
0Titles
No title
4 Titles
2h00m(1.0G)
Genre Name
HDD
SP
Play
1h00m(1.0G)
Remain
30h30m
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
Edit
Play List
2h00m(1.0G)
Create
Undo
1h00m(1.0G)
Erase
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
Use this function to erase unwanted titles.
DVD
VR Mode
Remain
0h30m
ENTER
2
Select an original title to add to the Play
List.
Repeat these two steps to add as many titles as
necessary to the Play List.
When you erase titles from the HDD or Original titles
from a VR mode DVD-RW, the available recording space
increases accordingly. Erasing a title from a DVD-RW
(Video mode) or DVD+RW disc increases the available
recording time only if it is the last title on the disc.1
Erasing Play List titles, or titles from a DVD-R (VR mode
or Video mode) or DVD+R, will not result in any more free
space on the disc.
Play
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
1
Highlight the title you want to erase.
Use this function to start playback of a title.
ENTER
2
panel.
1
Select ‘Erase’ from the command menu
Highlight the title you want to play.
ENTER
3
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.
Tip
• You can erase a title quickly by pressing CLEAR (LCD
page 2) when the title is highlighted. Confirm the edit
by pressing ENTER.
Note
1 There may be cases where erasing a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc will result in incontiguous title numbers.
119
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 120 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Editing
09
Title Name
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
You can give titles new names of up to 64 characters long
for VR mode, DVD-RAM and HDD recordings, and up to
40 characters for Video mode recordings and DVD+R/
+RW discs.
1
Highlight the title you want to name (or
rename).
• You can also use the CLEAR button (LCD page 2) to
delete characters directly (press and hold for two
seconds to delete the whole name).
• For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you
will see only a limited character set.
ENTER
4
Select ‘OK’ to enter the name and return
to the main Disc Navigator screen.
• To return to the main Disc Navigator screen without
saving changes to the title name, press RETURN.
Using a USB keyboard to enter a name
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Title Name’ from the
command menu panel.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
10Titles
23:00 FRI
Pr 4 SP
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
Play
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 4 2ch
SP
11/29Mon
7:00PM
SP
Title Name
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
Set
Thumbnail
4 Titles
Erase
Edit Section
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP
Divide
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
9
Chapter Edit
2h00m(1.0G)
SetMulti-Mode
Genre
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 Lock
SPGenre Name
Recent first
8
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
All Genres
Using a USB keyboard connected to this recorder makes
entering names very quick and convenient.1 When in
USB keyboard input mode, a USB icon ( ) appears in
the lower-left of the screen.2
Other than the standard alpha-numeric keys, use the
following keys when entering names:
Key
Function
Change the cursor position
1h00m(1.0G)
Cancel
Cancel
7
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
HDD
SP
F1
Select CAPS
1h00m(1.0G)
Remain
30h30m
F2
Select small
ENTER
3
Input a name for the selected title.
Input Title Name
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
ABC DE F GH I J KLM . , ? !
N O P Q R S T U V WX Y Z ( ) : ;
AA A A A AÆ ç E E E E I I I I #
DN O OOO
0 1 2 3 4 5
+ – /@ [
c £ \ §
2 3
´ µ¶ ·
OK
Clear
O
6
¥
¨
¸
ø
ß$%
7 8 9 <= > _ &
] ˆ ÷ x ± { _| } ~ ¡
© a– << ¬ – ® ˚
1 o
– 1/4 1/2 3/4 ¿ `
Delete character at the current cursor
position
back
space
Delete the character at the previous
cursor position
enter
Enter the name
UUUUY
<<
CAPS
small
delete
esc
Exit the input screen
Space
• A name generated automatically by the recorder will
already be in the name input section of the screen.
Use the /
buttons (LCD page 1) to change the
cursor position.
• Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lowercase, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons
(/ (LCD page 1)).
Note
1 • It’s possible that some USB keyboards will not work exactly as expected when connected to this recorder. See also Connecting a USB device
on page 67 for more connection information.
• Certain keyboards may not be able to correctly input all characters.
2 If you use the remote control to enter a name when in the USB keyboard input mode, the recorder will automatically switch to remote control
input mode. Press any key on the USB keyboard to return to USB keyboard input mode.
120
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 121 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Editing
09
Set Thumbnail
Erase Section
HDD DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM
HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM
You can change the thumbnail picture that appears in
the Disc Navigator for a title to any frame that appears in
that title.
Using this command you can delete a part of a title, ideal
for cutting out the commercial breaks in a recording
made from the TV.
1
Highlight the title you want to change the
thumbnail picture for.
1
Highlight the title containing the section
you want to erase.
ENTER
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Thumbnail’ from the
command menu panel.
The thumbnail setting screen appears from which you
can find the frame you want.
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Erase Section’ from the
command menu panel.
ENTER
3
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
HDD only: Select the type of edit.
10Titles
HDD/DVD RECORDER
23:00 FRI
Pr 4 SP
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
Play
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 4 2ch
SP
11/29Mon
7:00PM
Title SP
Name
Please select the type of editing.
Video Mode Compatible Editing is
recommended for compatibility with
high-speed copying.
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
Set
Thumbnail
4 Titles
9
Erase
Edit Section
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP
Divide
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
Chapter Edit
2h00m(1.0G)
SetMulti-Mode
Genre
Recent first
8
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 Lock
SPGenre Name
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
7
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
All Genres
Cancel
Cancel
1h00m(1.0G)
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
Video Mode Compatible Editing
Frame Accurate Editing
1h00m(1.0G)
3 Use the playback controls (, , , , etc.
(LCD page 1)) to find a suitable frame, then press
ENTER to set.
Set Thumbnail (HDD)
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4
Rec. time
SP
2h00m
10-1 00.00.09.15
Play Pause
• For more information about these options, see
Editing accuracy on page 118.
4 Highlight ‘From’ then use the playback controls
(, , , , etc. (LCD page 1)) to find the start of
the section to erase, then press ENTER.
The bar at the bottom of the screen indicates the current
play position in the title. After pressing ENTER, a marker
shows the start of the section.
Erase Section (HDD)
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
OK
OK
Exit
Exit
Rec. time
You can also use the chapter and time search features
(press the YELLOW button), and the CM SKIP/CM BACK
(LCD page 1)).
2h00m
10-1 00.00.09.15
Play Pause
From
To
Exit
4
Select ‘Exit’ to return to the Edit screen.
121
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 122 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Editing
09
ENTER
5
Highlight ‘To’ then, in the same way, find
the end of the section to erase, then press ENTER.
After pressing ENTER, another marker indicates the end
of the section, with the section itself marked in red.
4 Use the playback controls (, , , , etc.
(LCD page 1)) to find the place you want to divide the
title.
Divide Title (HDD)
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
Rec. time
2h00m
ENTER
6
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.
In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of
video either side of the marked section to see how the
edit will look.
• When editing VR mode Original content, you may not
be able to erase very short sections (less than five
seconds).
10–1 00.00.09.15
Play Pause
Divide
Cancel
5 ENTER Press to divide the title at the current
playback position.
Divide
HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only
ENTER
6
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.
Use this command to divide a title into two. Note that
once divided, the two new HDD titles cannot be
recombined into one again.
Divided titles cannot
be combined.
OK?
Yes
1
Highlight the title you want to divide.
Chapter Edit
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM HDD
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Divide’ from the command
menu panel.
3
No
HDD only: Select the type of edit.
HDD/DVD RECORDER
Please select the type of editing.
Video Mode Compatible Editing is
recommended for compatibility with
high-speed copying.
When editing a VR mode DVD or video on the HDD you
can edit individual chapters within a title, with
commands for erasing, combining and dividing.
1 Highlight the title that contains the chapters you
want to edit.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Chapter Edit’ from the
command menu panel.
Video Mode Compatible Editing
Frame Accurate Editing
ENTER
3
• For more information about these options, see
Editing accuracy on page 118.
HDD only: Select the type of edit.
HDD/DVD RECORDER
Please select the type of editing.
Video Mode Compatible Editing is
recommended for compatibility with
high-speed copying.
Video Mode Compatible Editing
Frame Accurate Editing
• For more information about these options, see
Editing accuracy on page 118.
122
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 123 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Editing
4
09
Select the command you want:
• Divide – Divide a chapter into two or more parts: Use
the playback controls (, , , , etc. (LCD page
1)) to find the point at which you want to divide the
chapter, then press ENTER.
ENTER
5
Select ‘Exit’ to get back to the main Disc
Navigator screen.
Set Genre
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)
HDD
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2
Rec. time
Chapters
1–1
SP
Use this command to assign a genre to a title.
1h00m
5
0.00.00
Play
1
Highlight the title you want to assign a
genre to.
Exit
Divide
Erase/Move
Combine
ENTER
You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as
you wish (up to 999 chapters per DVD-R/-RW/-RAM
disc or 99 chapters per HDD title).
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Genre’ from the
command menu panel.
• Erase1/Move2 – Erase or move chapters: Select the
chapter you want to erase/move and press ENTER.
Select whether you want to erase or move the
chapter.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
Set
Thumbnail
4 Titles
9
Move command only: Select the destination for the
chapter, and press ENTER.
8
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 Lock
SPGenre Name
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
7
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
All Genres
Cancel
Cancel
1h00m(1.0G)
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)
001
002
003
004
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
3
Select a genre for the title.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
• Combine3 – Combine two adjacent chapters into
one: Highlight the bar divider between two adjacent
chapters and press ENTER.
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2
Rec. time
2
3
4 Titles
1h00m
4
No
Category
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
Set
Thumbnail
Movies
Erase
Edit Section
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SPDrama
Edit Chapter
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SPEntertainmt.
8
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 Lock
SPGenre Name
Comedy
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
7
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Recent first
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
SP
10Titles
23:00 FRI
Pr 4 SP
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
Play
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 4 2ch
SP
11/29Mon
7:00PM
Title SP
name
9
All Genres
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)
1
1h00m(1.0G)
ENTER
005
Exit
Divide
Erase/Move
Combine
Erase
Edit Section
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP
Divide
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
Chapter Edit
2h00m(1.0G)
SetMulti-Mode
Genre
Recent first
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Erase
1h00m
Rec. time
Move
0h01m
Chapter
Cancel
10Titles
23:00 FRI
Pr 4 SP
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
Play
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 4 2ch
SP
11/29Mon
7:00PM
Title SP
Name
Divide
News
2h00m(1.0G)
SetMulti-Mode
Genre
Sport
Cancel
Cancel
1h00m(1.0G)
1h00m(1.0G)
5
Exit
Divide
Erase/Move
Combine
Note
1 When editing VR mode Original content, it may not be possible to erase chapters less than five seconds long.
2 VR mode Play List only.
3 It may not always be possible to combine two chapters, even though they are adjacent. If a chapter has been divided into three, then the middle
chapter erased, it is not possible to combine the two remaining chapters into one.
123
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 124 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Editing
09
Lock
Move
HDD DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only
Original only
Use this function to re-arrange the playing order of Play
List titles.
You can lock a title so that it can’t be edited or erased
accidently. If you do need to edit it, you can always unlock
it later.
1
Highlight the title you want to move.
Important
• You can’t undo any edits made before changing the
lock status. You also can’t undo a lock/unlock
command using the Undo option from the Disc
Navigator menu.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Move’ from the command
menu panel.
Disc Navigator (DVD)
1
Highlight the title you want to lock (or unlock).
10Titles
1
23:00 FRI
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
Play
23:00 Fri 7:00PM
3/12 Pr 72ch
SP Name
SP
11/29Mon
SP
Title
2
20:00 FRI 3/12
SP
Divide
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 7 SP
SP
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
Set
Thumbnail
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Lock’ from the command
menu panel.
101
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
4
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
DVD
VR Mode
Remain
0h30m
23:00 FRI
Pr 4 SP
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
Play
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 4 2ch
SP
11/29Mon
7:00PM
Title SP
Name
7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
Erase
Edit Section
9
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP
Divide
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
8
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 Lock
SPGenre Name
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
Chapter Edit
2h00m(1.0G)
SetMulti-Mode
Genre
All Genres
ENTER
3
Select a new position for the title.
Cancel
Cancel
1h00m(1.0G)
7
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
10Titles
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
Set
Thumbnail
Recent first
3
Cancel
Cancel
1h00m(1.0G)
Disc Navigator (HDD)
4 Titles
Erase
EditSection
Chapter Edit
2h00m(1.0G)
Multi-Mode
Move
Genre Name
7 SP
Combine
Play List
Title to move
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
Disc Navigator (DVD)
11
An unlocked title will become locked; a locked title will be
unlocked. Locked titles are shown in the Disc Navigator
with a padlock icon.
10Titles
23:00 FRI
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
23:00 Fri 7:00PM
3/12 Pr 4 2ch
SP
11/29Mon
SP
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
2
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
3
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
4
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Play List
2h00m(1.0G)
MENU
1h00m(1.0G)
DVD
VR Mode
Remain
0h30m
1h00m(1.0G)
Insert position
After pressing ENTER, the new, updated Play List is
displayed.
124
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 125 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Editing
09
Combine
Genre Name
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only
HDD
Use this function to combine two Play List titles into one.
Use this command to rename one of the five userdefinable genres (Free 1 to Free 5).
1
Highlight the title you want to combine.
This title will remain in the same place after combining
with another title.
ENTER
1
Select ‘Genre Name’ from the command
menu panel.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Combine’ from the
command menu panel.
Disc Navigator (DVD)
101
23:00 FRI
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
Play
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 7 2ch
SP
SP
11/29Mon
7:00PM
SP
Title Name
2
20:00 FRI 3/12
SP
Divide
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 7 SP
SP
3
Genre Name
Combine
22:00 THU 2/12
SP
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
SP
4
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SPEdit
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
8
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
7
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
Genre Name
All Genres
Erase
EditSection
Multi-Mode
Multi-Mode
0G)
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
Chapter Edit
2h00m(1.0G)
Multi-Mode
Move
Play List
9
Recent first
Erase
Set
Thumbnail
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
10Titles
11
10Titles
23:00 FRI
Pr 4 SP
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
Play
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 4 2ch
SP SP
11/29Mon
7:00PM
1h00m(1.0G)
Cancel
Cancel
1h00m(1.0G)
ENTER
DVD
VR Mode
Remain
0h30m
2
names.
1h00m(1.0G)
Select one of the user-definable genre
Disc Navigator (HDD)
10Titles
ENTER
3
Select another title to combine with the
first.
This title will be appended to the first title selected.
101
23:00 FRI
Pr 4 SP
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
Play
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 4 2ch
SP Free1
11/29Mon
7:00PM
SP
9
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP
Free4
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
8
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 Cancel
SPGenre Name
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
7
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Erase
Free2
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
The screen below shows title 3 selected to be appended
to title 1.
Free3
Edit
Free5
Recent first
2h00m(1.0G)
Multi-Mode
All Genres
Disc Navigator (DVD)
11
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 4 2ch
SP
11/29Mon
7:00PM
Cancel
1h00m(1.0G)
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
10Titles
1h00m(1.0G)
SP
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
2
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
3
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
4
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Play List
2h00m(1.0G)
ENTER
MENU
3
Input a name for the genre.
• The name can be up to 12 characters long.
1h00m(1.0G)
Input Genre Name
Free 1
1h00m(1.0G)
CAPS
small
DN O OOO
0 1 2 3 4 5
+ – /@ [
c £ \ §
2 3
´ µ¶ ·
ENTER
4
ABC DE F GH I J KLM . , ? !
N O P Q R S T U V WX Y Z ( ) : ;
AA A A A AÆ ç E E E E I I I I #
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.
OK
Clear
O
ø
UUUUY
6 7 8 9 <
¥ ] ˆ ÷ x
¨ © a– << ¬
¸ 1 –o 1/4
<<
DVD
VR Mode
Remain
0h30m
= >
± { _|
– ®
1 3
/2 /4 ¿
ß$%
_ &
} ~ ¡
˚
`
Space
OK to combine titles
1 and 3 ?
Yes
No
ENTER
4
Select ‘OK’ to enter the name and exit.
125
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 126 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
09
Editing
Multi-Mode
Undo
HDD
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW
Multi-Mode allows you to select several titles, then select
a command that will be applied to all of them. In this way
you can select multiple titles and then erase them all at
once, for example.
If you make a mistake while editing, you can generally
undo it. There is one level of undo (in other words, you
can only undo the last edit you made).
ENTER
ENTER
1
Select ‘Multi-Mode’ from the command
menu panel.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
•
Select ‘Undo’ from the command menu
panel.
• You can’t undo anything after exiting the Disc
Navigator screen.
10Titles
23:00 FRI
Pr 4 SP
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
Play
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 4 2ch
SP SP
11/29Mon
7:00PM
Disc Navigator (DVD)
1
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
9
Edit
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
Recent first
4 Titles
0Titles
11/29 MON 7:00PM
Play
No title
11/29Mon
7:00PM 2ch SP
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
Edit
2h00m(1.0G)
Genre Name
8
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
7
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
All Genres
Play List
2h00m(1.0G)
Create
Multi-Mode
1h00m(1.0G)
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
Undo
1h00m(1.0G)
1h00m(1.0G)
DVD
VR Mode
Remain
0h30m
ENTER
2
Select titles from the title list.
Selected titles are marked with a .
ENTER
3
Select the command that you want
applied to all the marked titles.
For example, select Erase to erase all the marked titles.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
10Titles
Lock
2h00m(1.0G)
Unlock
4 Titles
9
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SPChange Genre
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
8
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SPSingle Mode
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
7
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Recent first
2h00m(1.0G)
All Genres
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
Multi-Mode
23:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 4 SP
Erase
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
1h00m(1.0G)
Once the command is completed, Multi-Mode is
automatically exited.
126
En
Frequently asked questions
• Why doesn’t the available recording time increase
when I erase titles from a VR mode DVD-R?
When you erase titles from a DVD-R (or DVD+R), the
titles are no longer displayed, but the content
remains on the disc. DVD-R/+R are write-once
media; they can’t be erased or rewritten.
• I can’t edit my disc!
You may find that as the available recording time is
reduced on a VR mode DVD-R disc, editing is no
longer possible. This is because information about
your edits requires a certain amount of disc space.
As you edit, this information builds up, eventually
preventing you from editing further.
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 127 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Copying and backup
10
Chapter 10
Copying and backup
Introduction
Use the copying features of this recorder to:
• Back up important recordings stored on the HDD to
a DVD.
• Make a DVD copy of a recording on the HDD to play
in another player.
• Transfer video from a DVD to the HDD for editing.
• Transfer edited video from the HDD to DVD.
The simplest way to copy a title is to use the One Touch
Copy feature. This copies the currently playing HDD title
to DVD, or DVD title to the HDD. See One Touch Copy
below for detailed instructions.
For more sophisticated copying tasks you can build a
Copy List of titles to copy, and edit titles so that you only
copy the bits you want. See Using Copy Lists on page 128
for detailed instructions.
Where possible, the recorder will copy your recordings at
high-speed. Depending on the recording mode, the kind
of disc loaded and various other factors, copying can be
as fast as one minute per hour of video. See Minimum
copying times on page 163 for more on copying times.
If you want to save disc space you can copy video at a
lower recording quality (for example, an XP recording on
the HDD copied to SP on a DVD). Copying in this way is
always done in real-time.
When real-time copying from the HDD to a DVD-R/-RW
(Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers in
the original material are not copied. Chapter markers are
put into the copy at intervals, according to the Auto
Chapter settings (see also Auto Chapter (Video) on
page 157 and Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW) on page 158).
Restrictions on copying
Commercial DVD-Video discs are protected using Copy
Guard. These discs cannot be copied to the HDD.
Some video material is copy-once protected. This means
that it can be recorded to HDD, but it can’t then be freely
copied again. If you want to transfer copy-once protected
material from HDD to DVD, you’ll need to a CPRM ver. 1.1
or higher VR mode DVD-RW, ver. 2.0 or 2.1 VR mode
DVD-R, or CPRM-compatible DVD-RAM disc (see CPRM
on page 92 for more on this). Only one instance of a copyonce protected title can be added to the Copy List, and
after it’s been copied, the title is erased from the HDD (it
is therefore not possible to copy a locked title that is copyonce protected).
You can identify copy-once protected material during
playback by displaying disc information on-screen. If the
current title is copy-once protected, an exclamation mark
( ! ) is shown.
Copyright
Recording equipment should be used only for lawful
copying and you are advised to check carefully what is
lawful copying in the country in which you are making a
copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or
music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception
or consented to by the rightowners.
One Touch Copy
* See also Copyright above.
The One Touch Copy feature copies the currently playing
or selected (in the Disc Navigator) HDD title to DVD, or
DVD title to HDD. The whole title is copied, regardless of
where in the title you start the copy.
HDD to DVD copies are made in the same recording
mode. When copying DVD to HDD, the copy is made in
whatever recording mode is currently set.
Make sure that a recordable DVD disc is loaded when
trying to copy from the HDD.
REC
1 MODE (LCD page 1) If you’re copying from DVD to
the HDD, select a recording mode.
Note that selecting a recording mode higher than the title
playing will not result in a better quality recording.
O.T.
2 COPY (LCD page 3) Press during playback to copy
the current title.
The front panel display indicates that the title is being
copied.
• High-speed copying is used when copying from the
HDD to DVD. Playback continues while copying.
• Real-time copying is used when copying from DVD to
the HDD. Playback restarts from the beginning of the
title.
127
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 128 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
10
Copying and backup
Cancelling One Touch Copy
Copying to the HDD
You can cancel a One Touch Copy once it’s started.
• The maximum title length for copying is 12 hours.
• Title name and chapter markers are also copied,
except when copying from a finalized Video mode
DVD-R/-RW.
O.T.
• COPY Press and hold for more than a second.
Copying is cancelled and the video already copied is
erased.
• Thumbnail picture markers and chapter markers for
the Disc Navigator are copied, but their position in
the copy may be slightly changed from the original.
• If you cancel a HDD to DVD-R/+R copy, the space
available for recording does not return to the pre-copy
figure.
• If some part of the title being copied is copy-protected,
copying will start, but the copy-protected portions will
not be copied.
Notes on copying using One Touch Copy
Copying to DVD
• Title name, chapter markers, as well as thumbnail
picture markers for the Disc Navigator, are also
copied. However, if you copy to a DVD-R/-RW (Video
mode) or DVD+R/+RW, only the first 40 characters
of a name are copied.
• The chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly
the same positions as the original when recording on
to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW.
• You can’t use the One Touch Copy function to copy a
title if any part of the title is copy-once protected.
• A title that contains mixed aspect ratios can’t be
copied to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/
+RW. Use a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or DVD-RAM
disc for this type of material.
Using Copy Lists
* See also Copyright on page 127.
At its simplest, a Copy List is just a list of HDD or DVD
titles that you want to copy. When copying HDD titles to
DVD, you can, however, edit the titles in your copy list,
erasing chapters you don’t need, or re-naming titles, for
example. Edits you make to titles in the Copy List do not
affect the actual video content; only the ‘virtual’ content
of the Copy List. So you can freely erase and modify
anything in your Copy List safe in the knowledge that the
actual content is not being altered.
Copying from HDD to DVD
• Low resolution (SEP through LP modes1) widescreen
material can’t be copied to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode)
or DVD+R/+RW. Use a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or
DVD-RAM disc for this type of material.
Important
• The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time.
• The Copy List is erased if the Input Line System
setting is changed (see Additional information about
the TV system settings on page 161).
• When HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode
Off, titles recorded in LP/MN9 to MN15 modes
cannot be high-speed copied to a DVD-R/-RW (Video
mode) or DVD+R/+RW. Please use a DVD-R/-RW
(VR mode) or DVD-RAM.
• Recordings of bilingual broadcasts cannot be highspeed copied to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or
DVD+R/+RW. Please use a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode)
or DVD-RAM.
• Resetting the recorder to its factory settings (see
Resetting the recorder on page 175) will erase the
Copy List.
1
• XP+ titles cannot be copied to DVD via One Touch
Copy.
• If you want to use a DVD-RW (VR mode) disc for the
copy, make sure it is initialized before you start.
• Titles over eight hours cannot be copied to singlelayer DVD+R/+RW discs using One Touch Copy.
Use DVD+R DL discs for titles over eight hours.
• Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP mode
cannot be copied to DVD+R/+RW using One Touch
Copy.
Load a recordable DVD.
• It is possible to complete the following steps without
having a recordable DVD loaded (or having an
uninitialized DVD loaded); however, the steps are
slightly different.
HOME
MENU
2
SETUP
Select ‘Copy’ from the Home Menu.
Note
1 In manual recording mode these equate to MN1 to MN15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1 to MN8 (Video Mode On).
128
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 129 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Copying and backup
10
There are some restrictions on titles that can be added to
the Copy List if you are copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video
mode) or DVD+R/+RW:
ENTER
Select ‘HDD DVD’.
3
• When adding titles that contain copy-once protected
material, the copy-once parts will not be added.
HDD DVD
• When adding titles that contain material of more
than one aspect ratio (screen size), each part with a
different aspect ratio will be added as a separate title
if high-speed copying is possible.
DVD/CD HDD
Disc Back-up
• If this is the first time to create a Copy List, skip to
step 5 below.
4 If there is already a Copy List stored in the
recorder, choose whether to ‘Create New Copy List’
or ‘Continue Using Previous Copy List’.
Depending on the title1, high-speed copying may not be
possible to DVDs.
6
Press to display the command menu panel.
The command menu panel
Copy
Continue Using Previous Copy List
Recent first
Create New Copy List
All Genres
1>2>3
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
• If you select Continue Using Previous Copy List ,
skip to step 10 below.
WED
MON
S AT
T HU
WED
MON
FRI
WED
29/03
27/03
25/03
23/03
22/03
20/03
17/03
15/03
20:00
21:00
23:00
22:00
20:00
13:00
21:00
20:00
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
Pr 2
Pr 4
Pr 9
Pr 6
Pr 2
Pr 9
Pr 4
Pr 2
20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP
20:00
1h00m(2.0G)
Sports
SP
Pr 2
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
• Selecting Create New Copy List will erase any Copy
List already stored in the recorder.
7
8 Title
HDD DVD (Video mode)
Select Title
Wed29/03
Mon 27/03
S a t 25/03
Thu 23/03
Wed 22/03
Mon 20/03
F r i 17/03
Wed 15/03
Pr 2
Pr 4
Pr 9
Pr 6
Pr 2
Pr 9
Pr 4
Pr 2
Back
Next
4.3G
4.3G
Select ‘Next’ to move on to the Title Edit screen.
ENTER
5
Add titles to the Copy List (highlight a title
and press ENTER to add).
Copy
1>2>3
1
2
Copy
All Genres
20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP
20:00 Wed22/03 Pr 2 SP
Back
8 Title
HDD DVD (Video mode)
1>2>3
Select Title
Recent first
2 Title
HDD DVD (Video mode)
Title Edit
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
WED
MON
S AT
TH U
WED
MON
FRI
WED
29/03
27/03
25/03
23/03
22/03
20/03
17/03
15/03
20:00
21:00
23:00
22:00
20:00
13:00
21:00
20:00
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
Pr 2
Pr 4
Pr 9
Pr 6
Pr 2
Pr 9
Pr 4
Pr 2
20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP
20:00
1h00m(2.0G)
Sports
SP
Pr 2
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
Wed29/03
Mon 27/03
S a t 25/03
Thu 23/03
Wed 22/03
Mon 20/03
F r i 17/03
Wed 15/03
Pr 2
Pr 4
Pr 9
Pr 6
Pr 2
Pr 9
Pr 4
Pr 2
Next
Back
20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(2.0G)
Next
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
4.3G
4.3G
0.0G
4.3G
Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are highlighted in
pink.
Note
1 The following titles cannot be copied at high-speed for DVD+R/+RW:
• Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP mode.
The following titles cannot be copied at high-speed for DVD-R/-RW (Video Mode) and DVD+R/+RW:
• Widescreen titles recorded at low resolution (SEP through LP/MN1 to MN15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1 to MN8 (Video Mode On)).
• LP/MN9 to MN15 recordings when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off.
• Bilingual recordings.
• Combined titles that were originally recorded using different recording modes.
The following titles cannot be copied at high-speed for any types of DVD:
• XP+ titles.
129
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 130 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Copying and backup
10
8 To edit a title, highlight it using the / buttons,
then press ENTER.
Copy
ENTER
10
Select ‘Next’ to proceed.
2 Title
HDD DVD (Video mode)
Copy
1>2>3
Title Edit
1
2
20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP
Erase
20:00 Wed22/03 Pr 2 SP
Title Name
Erase Section
Move
Preview
2 Title
HDD DVD (Video mode)
1>2>3
Title Edit
1
2
Back
20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP
20:00 Wed22/03 Pr 2 SP
Back
Next
Cancel
20:00
Wed29/03
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
4.3G
4.3G
Pr 2
Next
SP
20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(2.0G)
1h00m(2.0G)
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
4.3G
4.3G
A menu of editing commands appears:
• Erase – Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see
Erase on page 119).
• Title Name – Name or rename a title in the Copy List
(see Title Name on page 120).
• Erase Section – Erase part of a title (see Erase Section
on page 121).
• Move – Change the order of titles in the Copy List
(see Move on page 124).
• Preview – Check the content of a title in the Copy
List.
There are several options available from the next screen:
• Select Recording Mode if you want to change the
recording quality (see Recording Mode on page 131).
• Select Input Disc Name if you want to change the
disc name. Input a name of up to 64 characters for a
VR mode disc or 40 characters for a Video mode disc
or DVD+R/+RW. (The input method is similar to that
of naming titles; see Title Name on page 120.)
• Select Finalize if you want to automatically finalize a
DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R after copying.1
Select a title menu style from the following screen.
• Divide – Divide a title in the Copy List into two (see
Divide on page 122).
ENTER
• Combine – Combine two titles in the Copy List into
one (see Combine on page 125).
• Chapter Edit – Edit chapters within a Copy List title
(see Chapter Edit on page 122):
• Divide – Divide a chapter into two.
• Erase/Move – Erase a chapter/Change the
chapter order.
• Combine – Combine two chapters into one.
• Set Thumbnail – Set the thumbnail frame for a title
(see Set Thumbnail on page 121).
• Recording Mode – Set the picture quality of the copy
(see Recording Mode on page 131).
• Bilingual – Set how bilingual audio should be copied
when copying from HDD to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode)
and DVD+R/+RW (see Bilingual on page 132).
• Cancel – Exit the menu.
11
Select ‘Start Copy’ to start copying.
Copy
En
DVD-RW
Video Mode
Back
Recording Mode
Copy Time
0h 16m
Input Disc Name
Recording Mode
Disc Name
High-Speed
Finalize
Finalize
Off
Start Copy
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
4.3G
4.3G
• If you’re using a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc and the
copy will span both layers, the Copy List Total bar
will be purple.
• The Current DVD Remain bar will be half-length if
the first layer of a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc is
already full.
Display the command menu panel.
Note
1 If a timer recording is scheduled to start during copying, the disc will not be finalized.
130
1>2>3
HDD
Repeat this step for as many titles you have that need
editing.
9
HDD DVD (Video Mode)
Start Copy
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 131 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Copying and backup
10
Copying from DVD to HDD
ENTER
Important
6
Select a title to edit.
A menu appears of Copy List editing commands:
• Erase – Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see
Erase on page 119).
• The DVD to HDD Copy screen isn’t accessible when
a finalized Video mode DVD-R/-RW or a DVD-Video is
loaded. As long as the disc is not Copy Guard
protected, you can still use the One Touch Copy
function, however (see One Touch Copy on page 127).
• Move – Change the order of titles in the Copy List
(see Move on page 124).
• Preview – Check the content of a title in the Copy
List.
• The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time.
• The Copy List will be erased if:
– any of the titles on the DVD disc are erased or
edited.
– the disc tray is opened.
– playback is switched between Play List and
Original.
– the DVD disc is re-initialized or finalized.
– the recorder is reset to its factory settings (see
Resetting the recorder on page 175).
• It may not be possible to copy from a DVD disc that
was recorded on a different DVD recorder or a PC.
• Cancel – Exit the menu.
Repeat this step for as many titles you have that need
editing.
ENTER
7
Select ‘Next’ from the command menu
panel to proceed to the copy options screen.
• Select Recording Mode if you want to change the
recording quality (see Recording Mode below).
ENTER
HOME
MENU
1
SETUP
8
Select ‘Start Copy’ to start copying.
Select ‘Copy’ from the Home Menu.
Recording Mode
ENTER
Select ‘DVD/CD HDD’.
2
ENTER
3
Select a Copy List type.
• Selecting Create New Copy List will erase any Copy
List already stored in the recorder.
ENTER
4
Add titles to the Copy List (highlight a title
and press ENTER to add).
Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are highlighted in
pink.
ENTER
5
Select ‘Next’ from the command menu
panel to proceed to the title edit screen.
ENTER
1
Select ‘Recording Mode’ from the
command menu panel.
ENTER
2
Select a recording mode for the copy.
• High-Speed Copy1 – The Copy List is copied at the
same recording quality as the original.
• XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP, SEP, MN2 – The Copy List is
copied at the specified recording quality in real-time.
(Note that if you copy at a higher quality setting than
the original, the copy will not be better quality than
the original.)
If you select MN above, you can also change the level
setting (MN1 to MN323, LPCM or XP+4) from the
Recording Quality box that appears.
Note
1 When copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly the same position as
the original.
2 When the copy mode is set to something other than High-Speed Copy for copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter
markers of the original are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at regular intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see
also Auto Chapter (Video) on page 157 and Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW) on page 158).
3 When copying to a DVD+R/+RW, MN1 to MN3 and SEP modes are not available.
4 XP+ mode available only when copying to HDD.
131
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 132 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Copying and backup
10
• Optimized1,2 – The recording quality is automatically
adjusted so that the Copy List fits on to the space
available on the disc. Copying is carried out in realtime.
When you change the recording mode setting, you can
see how much disc space it will require. If this is more
than is available, it shows up in red and you won’t be able
to start copying. In this case, either change the recording
quality, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List
screen and erase one or more titles from the Copy List.
Using disc backup
* See also Copyright on page 127.
This feature offers a simple way to make a backup copy of
finalized DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) discs or DVD+R/
+RW discs. The data is copied first to the hard disk
drive3, then on to another recordable DVD disc.
HOME
MENU
1
Select ‘Copy’, then ‘Disc Back-up’ from the
Home Menu.
SETUP
Bilingual
ENTER
1
Select the title containing the audio you
want to change.
2
Select a backup option.
Disc Back-up
ENTER
2
Select ‘Bilingual’ from the command
menu panel.
Start new disc back-up
Resume writing data
Erase back-up data
ENTER
3
Select a bilingual audio option.
There are three backup options:
• Start new disc back-up – Start making a backup of
a disc.
• Resume writing data – Record the backup data
already on the HDD to a recordable DVD.
• Erase back-up data – Erase the backup data on the
HDD.
3 Load the disc you want to make a backup of.
You can only make backup copies of finalized Video mode
DVD-R/-RW discs, finalized DVD+R or DVD+RW discs
(excluding DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs).
Disc Back-up
No disc.
Please load a disc to be backed-up.
Start
Cancel
Note
1 When the copy mode is set to something other than High-Speed Copy for copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter
markers of the original are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at regular intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see
also Auto Chapter (Video) on page 157 and Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW) on page 158).
2 Optimized mode only available when copying to DVD. Due to remaining space on the disc or the title that you copy, this mode does not always
exactly fill a disc.
3 It is not possible to play this material directly from the HDD.
132
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 133 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Copying and backup
ENTER
4
Select ‘Start’.
Disc Back-up
Read from disc and save to HDD.
Start reading?
Start
Cancel
10
• You can cancel the backup process by pressing
O.T. COPY for more than one second. However, this
will make the disc unusable (although if you are
using a DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc you can reinitialize it in order to make it usable again — see
Initializing recordable DVD discs on page 102.)
7 After the recorder has finished recording the
backup disc, you can select whether to make another
backup of the same data or exit.
• To see the progress of the backup, press DISP (LCD
page 3).
Disc Back-up
• You can cancel the backup process by pressing
O.T. COPY (LCD page 3) for more than one second.
To make another back-up copy, please load
5 When the data has been copied, take out the disc
and load a blank* recordable DVD.
* If you’re using a DVD-RW or DVD+RW, the disc doesn’t
have to be blank, although the previous contents of the
disc will be erased in the backup process.
Disc Back-up
Disc content saved to Hard Disk Drive.
Please eject the disc and load a
Disc back-up finished.
a recordable disc.
Start
Cancel
• Select Start to make another backup copy or Cancel
to finish. If you want to make another backup copy,
return to step 6 above.
8 If you don’t need to keep the backup data on the
HDD, you can delete it now.
Select Yes to delete the data from the HDD; select No to
keep it (you can delete it later if you want to).
recordable disc
Start
Cancel
Disc Back-up
The backed-up data is still on the HDD.
You can use a DVD-R ver. 2.0, 2.1 or 2.2 disc, or DVD-RW
ver. 1.1 or ver. 1.2 disc for the backup.
• If you backup a DVD-R disc to DVD-RW, you cannot
undo the finalization later.
• Actual recordable capacity of discs vary so there may
be cases where the contents of the disc you’re
backing-up will not fit on to a particular blank disc. If
this happens, please try another brand of disc.
Erasing it will increase the free space
available. OK to Erase?
Yes
No
• If you decide to leave the backup data on the HDD,
you can make backup copies to recordable DVD
discs anytime from the Disc Back-up menu.
• DVD-R/-RW discs can only be backed up to DVD-R/
-RW discs; DVD+R/+RW discs can only be backed
up to DVD+R/+RW discs.
6 Select ‘Start’ to start writing the backed-up data
to the blank disc.
Disc Back-up
Write back-up data from Hard Disk Drive.
The disc contents will be overwritten.
OK to start?
Start
Cancel
• To see the progress of the backup, press DISP.
133
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 134 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Using the Jukebox
11
Chapter 11
Using the Jukebox
The Jukebox feature allows you to use the recorder’s
HDD to store and playback music from your CDs. You
can also transfer WMA/MP3 files stored on CD-R/-RW/
-ROM, DVD, USB device or PC.
4
Display the command menu.
The command menu panel
Copying music to the HDD
Disc Navigator (DVD/CD)
Track List
The first step is to copy some music to the HDD. CD
audio, WMA and MP3 files are copied at high speed.
Usually, each track on a CD or DVD is categorized and
copied onto the HDD on the basis of information on
artists and albums.1
Note that once copied to the HDD, audio tracks cannot
be copied to a recordable DVD disc.
10 Tracks
1 TRACK1
CD
Play
2 TRACK2
Track Name
3 TRACK3
Edit
4 TRACK4
Play Mode
MENU
5 TRACK5
6 TRACK6
7 TRACK7
8 TRACK8
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
TRACK1
0.04.30 / 1.14.00
TRACK3
Track Repeat
Stereo
3
650MB
classical
0.05.30
10.00.00
Important
• While copying, no other recorder operation is
possible.
• When copying, scheduled timer recordings will not
start until copying is complete.
• Copy protected CDs may not copy successfully.
1
2
3
Load the CD/DVD you want to copy to the HDD.
HDD/
DVD
(LCD page 1) Select the DVD.
DISC
NAVIGATOR Open the Disc Navigator.
• This unit automatically searches for titles of an Audio
CD (see About the automatic display of titles on
page 107).
ENTER
5
Select ‘Edit’ from the menu.
ENTER
6
Select ‘Copy all to HDD’ from the menu.
On pressing ENTER all tracks (or files) on the CD are
copied to the HDD.
• When a folder of WMA/MP3 files is selected, you can
copy only the files contained in the folder by using
Copy to HDD.
• You can also copy tracks (or files) by selecting Copy
> DVD/CD HDD and pressing ENTER from the
Home Menu. (For an Audio CD, a track check screen
is displayed.)
• You can also start copying by starting playback of the
CD/DVD and then pressing O.T. COPY (LCD page 3).
• To cancel copying press ENTER.
• If the CD loaded contains both CD audio tracks and
WMA/MP3 files, the part currently selected will copy.
Note
1 • Up to 50 000 tracks can be created in the Jukebox. (You can create up to 50 000 artists/albums in total.)
• Sound quality is not worsened when you copy data from another source.
• When playing back an album copied from a source whose original audio track plays continuously (such as a live recording), there will be a
brief pause in sound between tracks.
• Audio CDs are classified according to the information in the Gracenote database.
• WMA/MP3 files are classified according to the information included in the files. Track names may differ from the names of the original files.
• Depending on the name of the original folder and track, the artist and album under which the folder or track is classified may differ.
134
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 135 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Using the Jukebox
11
Connect PC
Copying files via USB
Connecting a regular USB device
Using a USB connection, you can copy WMA and MP3
files from a PC to the HDD of this device. Operations
carried out on the PC require Windows Media Player 11.
You can copy WMA or MP3 files from a connected USB
device, such as a USB drive, to the HDD.
1
Important
• If the PC you are using does not currently have
Windows Media Player 11 installed, you must first
install the program and make sure it functions
correctly before connecting the USB cable and
attempting to use the Connect PC function.
• For more information on Connect PC, see Using a PC
on page 67.
• You cannot edit or delete albums from this device
when it is connected to a PC via USB. If you wish to
edit or delete albums via the Jukebox, you must first
disconnect the USB cable.
Connect the USB device.
HOME
MENU
2
SETUP
Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home Menu.
ENTER
3
Select ‘Listen to Music from USB device’.
4
Display the command menu.
ENTER
5
Select ‘Edit’ from the menu.
ENTER
6
Select ‘Copy all to HDD’ from the menu.
The folders on the USB device will be copied to the HDD.
• Up to 99 folders/999 files on the USB device can be
copied/displayed.
• Only the files that have been read can be copied. To
copy the files that have not been read, reload the files
(see below).
• To copy specific folders, select the desired folders
and select Copy to HDD.
1 Connect the PC via USB cable.
The screen below is displayed. Press ‘’ to close the
screen.
*Depending on the Windows OS version and the
Windows Media Player settings, the screen shown below
may not be displayed.
Reloading files from a USB device
If you have a USB device with more than 1000 files and/
or 100 folders, you can still view all the tracks using the
reload function.
1
Navigate to the last entry in the folder list
(‘Read next: ...’).
HOME
MENU
2
SETUP
Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home Menu.
ENTER
2
Load the next batch of up to 999 files/99
folders from the connected USB device.
It takes several minutes to reload files.1
ENTER
3
Select ‘Connect PC’.
ENTER
4
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.
Note
1 You can press HOME MENU to exit the Jukebox screen while the recorder is reloading files.
135
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 136 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
11
Using the Jukebox
5 Verify that the import screen is displayed on the
device.
If no actions are carried out for 20 minutes, the import
screen is automatically closed. To reopen it, you will have
to repeat steps 2 through 4.
Status
Number of copied
folders
This begins the synchronization process. When finished,
the message ‘Synchronized to Device’ is displayed in
Windows Media Player 11.
Number of files
unable to be copied
Connect PC
Standby
00000 Folders
000000 Files
( 000 error )
( 000 error )
Exit
‘Start Sync’
For more information refer to the Help menu of Windows
Media Player 11.
Number of copied files
6 Open Windows Media Player 11 on the PC.
The device settings screen appears. Click ‘Cancel’.
*Depending on the settings for Windows Media Player
11, the screen shown below may not be displayed.
Progress Bar
Connect PC
Copying
00001 Folders
000003 Files
( 000 error )
( 000 error )
Exit
• To cancel the synchronization process while it is
underway, press ENTER on the remote control. The
Connect PC screen is closed.
• If synchronization fails, make sure that the Pioneer.
HDD/DVD-Recorder device is selected at the
synchronization screen of Windows Media Player 11,
and try again.
‘Cancel’
From the PC, in Windows Media Player 11:
1. Click ‘Sync’.
2. Choose the artist, album or song you would
like to copy, and press the right mouse button.
3. Click ‘Add to Sync list’.
4. Click ‘Start Sync’.
136
En
7 When you have finished copying files, close
Windows Media Player 11 on the PC.
8
ENTER
Close the import screen on this device.
• If no actions are carried out for 20 minutes after
copying, the import screen is automatically closed.
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 137 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Using the Jukebox
11
Note
• When using the sync function of Windows Media
Player 11, music, artist and album folders are created
as follows:
Playing music from the Jukebox
You can select artists, albums or individual tracks from
the Jukebox to play.
HOME
MENU
Root
1
Music
Artist 1
Album 1
music1.mp3
music2.mp3
Artist 2
Album 2
music1.wma
Album 1
music1.mp3
• The above music folder is not displayed.
• Up to 50 000 tracks can be included in one album.
(The total number of tracks allowed in Jukebox is
50 000.) Note that when there are many tracks
contained in one album, it may take time to display
and transfer these tracks.
• Artists, albums and tracks with no set name that are
transferred from CD/DVD/USB are displayed as
‘Unknown Artist’, ‘Unknown Album’ and ‘Unknown
File’ in Windows Media Player 11.
• Artists, albums and track names that do not conform
to the ISO8859-1 standard may display differently in
Windows Media Player 11 and the Jukebox.
• File whose extensions are not supported by the
Jukebox (i.e. files that are not .mp3 or .wma) cannot
be transferred.
• Files imported to this recorder via Connect PC cannot
be exported from this recorder.
• Note that no recording functions, including timer
recordings, will be carried out when you are using the
Connect PC function.
Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home Menu.
SETUP
ENTER
2
Select a Jukebox option.
• Listen to Music/Edit – Listen to CDs or WMA/MP3
files that have been copied to the HDD.
You can also access this option directly by pressing
JUKEBOX (LCD page 1).
• Listen to Music from USB device – Listen to music
from an external USB device. Proceed to step 4.
ENTER
3
Select the artist you want to play back.
The screen below shows artists stored on the HDD:
Jukebox HDD
Artist List
10 Artists
ALL
Artist
Original
HDD
1
Artist1
2
Artist2
3
Artist3
4
Artist4
5
Artist5
6
Artist6
7
Artist7
Artist1
MENU
Total 10
Remain
100.0 G
The album display changes for the selected artist when
you press ENTER.
• This step is for the display mode set to Artist. The
operation varies when the display mode is set to other
settings.
• To play back all artists, select All and proceed to step 6.
• Press
or
(LCD page 3) to change the page.
ENTER
4
Select the album you want to play back.
Press ENTER to change the track display for the selected
album.
• To play back all albums, select All and proceed to
step 6.
5
Select the track you want to play back.
• To play back all tracks, select All.
137
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 138 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Using the Jukebox
11
ENTER
6
3
Display the command menu.
Jukebox HDD
Track List
ENTER
10 Tracks
ALL
Track
Original
Select ‘Add to Play List’ from the menu.
Play
1 Track1
Erase
2 Track2
Edit
3 Track3
Repeat
4 Track4
Add to Play List
5 Track5
MENU
Play List Name
6 Track6
4
Select a play list (‘Play List 1’ to ‘Play List
4’) where you want to add the selected track.
• You can add up to 25 songs to a play list.
• You can rename a play list (see Editing the HDD
Jukebox on page 139).
7 Track7
HDD
Track1
MP3
8GB
classical
Playing a play list
Remain
100.0 G
1
Display the view options panel.
ENTER
7
Select ‘Play’ from the menu.
The view options panel
Repeat play
Jukebox HDD
Artist List
Display Mode
Artist
Artist
Play List
1
Display the command menu during
playback.
Original
Original
ENTER
2
HDD
Select ‘Repeat’ from the menu.
• Select Play Mode when audio files stored on a USB
device are being played back (see The Play Mode
menu on page 109).
10 Artists
ALL
001
Artist1
002
Artist2
003
Artist3
004
Artist4
005
Artist5
006
Artist6
007
Artist7
Artist1
MENU
Total 10
Remain
100.0 G
ENTER
2
Select ‘Play List’.
ENTER
3
Select a repeat function from the
command menu panel.
• Artist Repeat – Repeats all tracks of an artist being
played back.
• Album Repeat – Repeats all tracks of an album
being played back.
• Track Repeat – Repeats the track being played back.
• Cancel – Cancels repeat playback.
ENTER
3
Select a play list (‘Play List 1’ to ‘Play List
4’) you want to play back.
4
Display the command menu.
ENTER
Playing your favourite music (Play List)
You can collect and play back only your favourite songs
stored on the HDD.
Creating a play list
ENTER
138
En
1
list.
Select a track you want to add to a play
2
Display the command menu.
5
Select ‘Play’ from the menu.
11 Jukebox.fm 139 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午後3時52分
Using the Jukebox
11
Changing the display style of the
Jukebox
ENTER
2
Select an album/track you want to copy.
ENTER
ENTER
1
Select an artist/album you want to
change the display for.
3
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Copy Album’ or ‘Copy
Track’ from the command menu.
ENTER
2
Display the view options panel.
Jukebox HDD
Artist List
Display Mode
Artist
Artist
Play List
Original
Original
HDD
10 Artists
4
Select an artist/album you want to copy
the selected album/track to.
Select New Artist or New Album if you want to create a
new artist/album. The name of an artist/album becomes
A_number/A_number_F_number.
ALL
001
Artist1
002
Artist2
003
Artist3
004
Artist4
005
Artist5
006
Artist6
007
Artist7
Artist1
ENTER
MENU
Total 10
Remain
100.0 G
ENTER
3
Select a view option.
• Display Mode
By artist – Displays the artists copied onto this unit
from the earliest date.
By album – Displays the albums of the selected
artist. When you select All, albums of all artist are
displayed.
By track – Displays the tracks of the selected artist/
album. When you select All, tracks of the all artist/
album are displayed.
• Play List
Original – Displays the settings of Display Mode
(By artist).
Play List 1 to Play List 4 – Displays the tracks added
to each play list.
Favourites – Displays up to 25 tracks you listen to
most frequently.
Copying albums/tracks
You can copy the albums stored on the HDD to other
folders of a different artist on the HDD. Also, you can copy
the tracks stored on the HDD to other albums on the HDD.
• You cannot copy the albums/tracks stored on the
HDD to a DVD or a USB device.
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.
Editing the HDD Jukebox
A number of commands are available for editing and
changing the playback behavior of albums.
JUKE
1
BOX (LCD page 1) Press to display the Jukebox
screen.
ENTER
2
Select what you want to edit.
ENTER
3
Select an edit function from the command
menu panel.
• Erase – Deletes the selected artist/album/track.1
• Edit > Artist name – Enter a name of up to 64
characters for the artist. See Title Name on page 120
for how to enter names.
• Edit > Album name – Enter a name of up to 64
characters for the album. See Title Name on page 120
for how to enter names.
• Edit > Track name – Enter a name of up to 64
characters for the track. See Title Name on page 120
for how to enter names.
• Play List name – Enter a name of up to 12 characters
for the Play List. See Title Name on page 120 for how
to enter names.
JUKE
1
BOX (LCD page 1) Press to display the Jukebox
screen.
Note
1 Some time may be required to erase artists or albums if they include many tracks.
139
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 140 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
The PhotoViewer
12
Chapter 12
The PhotoViewer
From the PhotoViewer you can view JPEG photos and
picture files stored on the HDD, recordable DVD or CD-R/
-RW/-ROM, or on a USB-equipped digital camera.1 You
can also import files and save them to the recorder’s
HDD or a DVD-R/-RW disc.
Information column, you can change thumbnails via the
/
buttons (LCD page 1).
Currently selected
folder in folder list
PhotoViewer HDD
Select Folder
Locating JPEG picture files
Folder
HOME
MENU
1
SETUP
Select ‘PhotoViewer’ from the Home Menu.
001
Folder1
002
Folder2
003
Folder3
004
Folder4
005
Folder5
006
Folder6
007
Folder7
008
Folder8
HDD
002 Folder2
Files
999
Folder
999 MB
Remain
100.0 G
ENTER
FOLDER
MENU
2
Select the location of the files you want to
view or edit.
Folder information
1/3
Pages in
folder list
View/Edit Photos on the HDD
View Photos on a CD/DVD
View Photos on a USB Device
4
edit.
Select the file you want to view, copy or
Currently selected
thumbnail
Copy Files from a Digital Camera
• View/Edit Photos on the HDD – View or edit photos
already stored on the recorder’s HDD.
• View Photos on a CD/DVD – View photos on a
Fujicolor CD, CD-ROM, CD-R/RW, or DVD-R/-RW.
• View Photos on a USB Device – View photos on a
digital camera (or other USB device) connected to
the USB port.
• Copy Files from a Digital Camera – Copy all DCF
files directly from a connected digital camera to a
recordable DVD-R/-RW.
PhotoViewer HDD
Folder2
File
12 Files
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
Folder Size 999 MB
PIOR0000
PIOR0001
PIOR0002
PIOR0003
PIOR0004
PIOR0005
PIOR0006
PIOR0007
PIOR0008
PIOR0009
PIOR0010
PIOR0011
FILE
MENU
1/84
Pages in
file list
ENTER
3
Select the folder containing the files you
want to view, copy or edit.
The first image from the selected folder is displayed as
thumbnail at the bottom of the screen. From the Folder
• The larger the file size, the longer it takes the recorder
to load the file.
• You can change folders via the /
buttons.
• If you encounter a disc that will not play, check that
the disc and file formats are compatible with this
recorder (see JPEG file compatibility and PC-created
disc compatibility on page 60).
• The thumbnail of files that cannot be played is
displayed as the
logo.
Note
1 Up to 999 files or 99 folders are viewable, but if there are more files/folders than this on the disc or connected USB camera it is still possible
to view them all using the Reload function (see Reloading files from a disc or USB device on page 142).
140
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 141 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
The PhotoViewer
12
Changing the display style of the
PhotoViewer
You can choose to display photos by grouping them by
folder, file, or number of thumbnails.
1
Playing a slideshow
ENTER
1
Select a folder from the folder list.
To start the slideshow from the first file in the folder, skip to
step 3 after choosing the desired folder and pressing .
Display the view options panel.
2
The view options panel
Select a thumbnail.
• Use / (LCD page 1) to display the previous/
next page of thumbnails.
PhotoViewer HDD
Folder2
Display Mode
File
File
Style
12 Files
12 Files
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
PIOR0000
PIOR0001
PIOR0002
PIOR0003
PIOR0004
PIOR0005
PIOR0006
PIOR0007
PIOR0008
PIOR0009
PIOR0010
PIOR0011
Folder Size 999 MB
ENTER
FILE
MENU
1/84
3
Select ‘Start Slideshow’ or ‘Start Audio
Slideshow’ from the menu.
When Start Audio Slideshow is selected, you can enjoy
the slideshow while playing back music in Jukebox.
Press / to select the desired play list or Favourites
that contains the songs you want to play back and then
press ENTER.
For more information on adding music to the HDD, see
Using the Jukebox on page 134.
ENTER
• You can also select a file or folder then press (Play)(LCD page 1) to start playing the slideshow.
• Use / to display the previous/next picture, or
(Pause)(LCD page 1) to pause the slideshow.
• Depending on the aspect ratio, some pictures may be
displayed with black bars top and bottom, or left and
right.
2
Choose ‘Display Mode’ or ‘Style’ then
press ENTER to see the available view options.
• Display Mode – Choose between folder and file
display modes.
• Style – Choose between displays of 1, 4 and 12
thumbnails.
• Large picture files may take a few seconds to display.
This is normal.
ENTER
3
Choose a view option, then press ENTER.
The display mode will change to that which you have
chosen.
4
(LCD page 1) Press to return to the thumbnail.
• You can also use the RETURN button.
HOME
MENU
5
SETUP
Press to exit the PhotoViewer.
141
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 142 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
The PhotoViewer
12
Zooming an image
During a slideshow you can zoom in to enlarge a portion
of the picture by a factor of two or four. You can also move
the area of the picture displayed.
1 ENTER Press during the slideshow to zoom the
picture.
Repeated presses cycle between zoom off, 2x zoom and
4x zoom. The zoom factor is displayed on-screen.
2
Use to move the zoomed area.
Importing files to the HDD
You can import files and save them to the HDD2 from a
CD, DVD or a connected USB camera. Once on the HDD
you can edit and organize your pictures and print them
out if you’ve connected a PictBridge-compatible printer.
ENTER
1
Select the location of folders/files you
want to import.
To import a whole folder, select the desired folder, press
, and skip to step 3 below.
• To import multiple folders, use the Multi-Mode; see
Selecting multiple files or folders on page 143.
Rotating an image
You can rotate the displayed picture during a slideshow
so you can always view pictures the right way up,
whichever way they were taken.
•
(LCD page 3) Press during the slideshow to
rotate the displayed picture clockwise by 90º.
Press repeatedly to continue rotating the picture in
increments of 90º.
2
Select a file to import, then press .
• To import multiple files, use the Multi-Mode; see
Selecting multiple files or folders on page 143.
ENTER
3
Select ‘Copy to HDD’ from the menu.
PhotoViewer CD/DVD
Folder2
Reloading files from a disc or USB
device
File
12 Files
If you have a disc with more than 1000 files and/or 100
folders, you can still view all the images using the reload
function.
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
PIOR0000
PIOR0001
PIOR0002
PIOR0003
PIOR0004
PIOR0005
PIOR0006
PIOR0007
PIOR0008
PIOR0009
PIOR0010
PIOR0011
Folder Size 999 MB
Start Slideshow
Copy all to HDD
Copy to HDD
Print
Detailed Information FILE
MENU
Multi-Mode
1/84
1
Navigate to the last entry in the folder list
(‘Read next: ...’).
ENTER
2 ENTER Load the next batch of up to 999 files/99
folders from the disc or connected USB device.
It will take a moment (at most a few minutes) to load in
the images.1
4
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm and copy the
folder(s)/file(s), or ‘No’ to cancel.
• The files will be copied to the HDD with the same
folder structure as the original.
• Importing to the HDD will not work if there is
insufficient space on the HDD, or if there are already
the maximum number of files and/or folders on the
HDD (999 folders/999 files per folder).
Note
1 You can press HOME MENU to exit the PhotoViewer screen while the recorder is reloading images. (If you enter the PhotoViewer again, it will
resume reloading.)
2 For files you want to keep permanently, we recommend backing up to DVD-R/-RW.
142
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 143 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
The PhotoViewer
12
Selecting multiple files or folders
Copying files to a DVD-R/-RW
The Multi-Mode allows you to select multiple folders/files
at once for importing or editing.
Using this feature you can copy all the files1 (including
audio and movie files) stored on a connected USB
camera to a recordable DVD disc.
ENTER
1
Select the folder containing the files you
want to import.
2
A slideshow of the files is also recorded on the disc as a
Video mode title, making it possible to view the photos on
other DVD players/recorders that may not be compatible
with JPEG file playback.
Once the files have been copied, the disc is automatically
finalized.
Display the command menu.
ENTER
3
Important
Select ‘Multi-Mode’ from the menu.
• Use a blank DVD-R/-RW disc, or one that has already
been initialized for Video mode recording but has
nothing yet recorded on it. Discs that have already
been recorded on (as well as CD-R/-RW discs) cannot
be used.
PhotoViewer HDD
Select Folder
Folder
001
Folder1
002
Folder2
Start Audio Slideshow
003
Folder3
New Folder
004
Folder4
Folder Options
005
Folder5
Copy to DVD
006
Folder6
007
Folder7
008
Folder8
HDD
Start Slideshow
002 Folder2
Files
999
Folder
999 MB
Remain
100.0 G
1 Press HOME MENU and select ‘PhotoViewer’ to
display the PhotoViewer screen.
1/3
ENTER
4
Select files/folders from the list.
An orange check mark box () is shown by the item you
selected. A blue check mark box () appears on the folder
select screen when files from that folder are selected.
PhotoViewer HDD
• After backing up the pictures in your digital camera
to DVD, we recommend verifying that they have been
recorded properly before deleting anything from the
camera.
FOLDER
MENU
Multi-Mode
2 Load a blank (or unrecorded Video mode) DVD-R
or DVD-RW disc.
ENTER
3
Select ‘Copy Files from a Digital Camera’
from the menu.
Multi-Mode
Select Folder
Folder
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
001
Folder1
002
Folder2
003
Folder3
004
Folder4
005
Folder5
006
Folder6
007
Folder7
008
Folder8
View/Edit Photos on the HDD
View Photos on a CD/DVD
FOLDER
MENU
View Photos on a USB Device
Copy Files from a Digital Camera
002 Folder2
Files
999
Folder
999 MB
1/3
ENTER
4
5
Display the command menu.
ENTER
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.
• Note that during copying, any timer programmes set
to start will not begin, and no other operations are
possible.
6
Select the command you want to apply to
all the selected items.
Note
1 • There is a limit to the number of files/amount of data that you can copy at one time.
• Only DCF format files in DCIM folders can be copied to a recordable DVD-R/-RW.
143
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 144 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
The PhotoViewer
12
Copying selected files to a DVD-R/-RW
Editing files on the HDD
This feature allows you just to copy some of the files
stored on HDD to a DVD.
There are a number of commands you can use to edit and
organize your pictures stored on the HDD.
A slideshow of the files is also recorded on the disc as a
Video mode title, making it possible to view the photos on
other DVD players/recorders that may not be compatible
with JPEG file playback. Note however that you may need
to finalize the disc before it will play on another DVD
player (copying selected files doesn’t automatically
finalize the disc).
Creating a new folder
1
From the folder list, display the menu.
ENTER
Important
• A maximum of 99 slideshow titles can be recorded.
2
Select ‘New Folder’.
The folder appears at the bottom of the folder list with the
name F_number.
• One slideshow title can contain up to 99 files. If there
are more files than this in the slideshow, multiple
slideshows are created on the disc.
PhotoViewer HDD
Select Folder
• If you erase a slideshow title from a DVD the
slideshow will become unplayable but the free space
will not increase.
Folder
1 Load a blank (or unfinalized Video mode) DVD-R
or DVD-RW disc.
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
ENTER
2
Select ‘View/Edit Photos on the HDD’
from the menu.
Folder1
002
Folder2
Start Audio Slideshow
003
Folder3
New Folder
004
Folder4
Folder Options
005
Folder5
Copy to DVD
006
Folder6
007
Folder7
008
Folder8
Start Slideshow
FOLDER
MENU
Multi-Mode
002 Folder2
Files
999
Folder
999 MB
1/3
• There can be up to 999 folders on the HDD.
Erasing a file or folder
ENTER
3
Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to
copy.
• Copying a folder will copy all the files contained in it.
• To copy multiple folders, use the Multi-Mode; see
Selecting multiple files or folders on page 143.
1
Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to
erase.
• To erase multiple files or folders, use the Multi-Mode;
see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 143.
• Erasing a folder will erase all the files contained in it.
Please be careful!
ENTER
4
001
Select ‘Copy to DVD’ from the menu.
• You can’t erase files that have been locked.
• Folders containing locked files can’t be erased.
Unlocked files in the folder, however, will be erased.
ENTER
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.
• Folder names on the disc will be number PIONR. File
names will be PHOT number.
• Note that during copying, any timer programmes set
to start will not begin, and no other operation is
possible.
• While ‘Cancel’ is displayed, you can press ENTER to
cancel.
144
En
2
Display the command menu.
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 145 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
The PhotoViewer
12
ENTER
3
ENTER
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder Options’.
4
Select ‘Copy’ or ‘Copy Folder Contents’.
PhotoViewer HDD
Folder2
File
12 Files
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
PIOR0000
PIOR0001
PIOR0002
PIOR0003
PIOR0004
PIOR0005
PIOR0006
PIOR0007
PIOR0008
PIOR0009
PIOR0010
PIOR0011
PhotoViewer HDD
Folder Size 999 MB
Folder2
Start Slideshow
Start Audio Slideshow
File
File Options
Print
Copy to DVD
FILE
MENU
12 Files
Detailed Information
Multi-Mode
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
1/84
ENTER
4
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
Folder Size 999 MB
PIOR0000
PIOR0001
PIOR0002
PIOR0003
PIOR0004
PIOR0005
PIOR0006
PIOR0007
PIOR0008
PIOR0009
PIOR0010
PIOR0011
Start Slideshow
Erase
Start Audio Slideshow
Copy
File Options
Rename File
Print
Lock
FILE
Copy to DVD
MENU
Detailed Information
Multi-Mode
Cancel
1/84
ENTER
Select ‘Erase’ or ‘Erase Folder’.
5
to.
Select a folder to copy the folder(s)/file(s)
PhotoViewer HDD
Folder2
Folder Size 999 MB
ENTER
File
12 Files
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
PIOR0000
PIOR0001
PIOR0002
PIOR0003
PIOR0004
PIOR0005
PIOR0006
PIOR0007
PIOR0008
PIOR0009
PIOR0010
PIOR0011
Start Slideshow
Erase
Start Audio Slideshow
Copy
File Options
Rename File
Print
Lock
FILE
Copy to DVD
MENU
Detailed Information
Multi-Mode
Cancel
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.
• Copying to the HDD will not work if there is
insufficient space on the HDD; if there are already the
maximum number of files and/or folders on the HDD.
Naming files and folders
1/84
ENTER
5
6
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.
• You can also erase a file or folder by pressing CLEAR
(LCD page 2) when the file or folder is highlighted.
Press ENTER to confirm.
1
Select the file or folder you want to
rename.
You can’t rename files that have been locked.
2
Display the command menu.
Copying files
ENTER
3
1
Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to
copy.
• Copying a folder will copy all the files contained in it.
• To copy multiple files or folders, use the Multi-Mode;
see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 143.
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder Options’.
ENTER
4
Select ‘Rename File’ or ‘Rename Folder’.
PhotoViewer HDD
Folder2
2
Display the command menu.
File
12 Files
ENTER
3
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder Options’.
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
PIOR0000
PIOR0001
PIOR0002
PIOR0003
PIOR0004
PIOR0005
PIOR0006
PIOR0007
PIOR0008
PIOR0009
PIOR0010
PIOR0011
Folder Size 999 MB
Start Slideshow
Erase
Start Audio Slideshow
Copy
File Options
Rename File
Print
Lock
FILE
Copy to DVD
MENU
Detailed Information
Multi-Mode
Cancel
1/84
145
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 146 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
The PhotoViewer
12
5 Enter a new name for the file/folder.
File names or Folder names can be up to 64 characters
long.
See Using a USB keyboard to enter a name on page 120
for how to enter a name.
1 Choose the file for which you would like to see
detailed information.
2 Choose ‘Detailed Information’.
When no detailed information is available, nothing is
displayed.
Locking/Unlocking files
Locking files will protect them from accidental erasure
and prevent them from being renamed.
Use the same process to both lock and unlock files.
Locked files are displayed in the PhotoViewer with a
padlock icon.
1
Select the file(s) you want to lock (or
unlock).
• To lock/unlock multiple files or folders, use the MultiMode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on
page 143.
2
Printing files
Connecting a PictBridge-compatible printer to the USB
port will enable you to print out picture files1 stored on
the HDD, a CD/DVD or directly from a digital camera.
Make sure that the printer (and your digital camera if you
are using that as a source) is connected to the recorder
before starting.
1
Display the command menu.
2
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder Options’.
3
Select the file(s) you want to print.
• To print multiple files, use the Multi-Mode; see
Selecting multiple files or folders on page 143.
Display the command menu.
ENTER
3
ENTER
Select ‘Print’ from the menu.
ENTER
4
PhotoViewer HDD
Select ‘Lock’ or ‘Lock Folder Contents’.
Folder2
File
PhotoViewer HDD
Folder2
File
12 Files
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
PIOR0000
PIOR0001
PIOR0002
PIOR0003
PIOR0004
PIOR0005
PIOR0006
PIOR0007
PIOR0008
PIOR0009
PIOR0010
PIOR0011
Folder Size 999 MB
12 Files
Start Slideshow
Erase
Start Audio Slideshow
Copy
File Options
Rename File
Print
Lock
FILE
Copy to DVD
HDD
MENU
Detailed Information
Remain
100.0 G
Multi-Mode
Cancel
1/84
Locked files are shown with a padlock icon next to them.
To remove all locks within a given folder, choose ‘Folder
Option’ > ‘Unlock Folder Contents’ .
To view detailed information
This feature allows you to check the settings of the
camera from which you imported the photos.
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
PIOR0000
PIOR0001
PIOR0002
PIOR0003
PIOR0004
PIOR0005
PIOR0006
PIOR0007
PIOR0008
PIOR0009
PIOR0010
PIOR0011
Folder Size 999 MB
Start Slideshow
Start Audio Slideshow
File Options
Print
Copy to DVD
FILE
MENU
Detailed Information
Multi-Mode
1/84
ENTER
4
Select ‘Start’ to confirm or ‘Cancel’ to
cancel.
• Once printing has started, you can cancel by
pressing ENTER.
Tip
• Paper size and layout can be set; the options
available depend on your printer — check the printer
manual for details.
• This recorder may not work correctly with all printers.
Note
1 Picture files should be standard DCF format. Non-standard files may not print properly.
146
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 147 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
The Disc Setup menu
13
Chapter 13
The Disc Setup menu
From the Disc Setup menu you can name discs, lock the
contents to prevent accidental recording and erasure,
initialize and finalize discs. The Disc Setup menu is
accessed from the Home menu.
Important
• A locked disc can still be initialized (which will
completely erase the disc).
HOME
MENU
Basic settings
1
Input Disc Name
SETUP
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu.
ENTER
Select ‘Basic’ > ‘Lock Disc’ then ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
2
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM
Disc Setup
When you initialize a disc for recording, the recorder
automatically assigns a name for the disc ranging from
DISC 1 to DISC 99. You can use the Input Disc Name
function to change the default disc name to something
more descriptive. This name appears when you load the
disc and when you display disc information on-screen.
HOME
MENU
1
SETUP
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu.
Input Disc Name
On
Initialize
Lock Disc
Off
Finalize
DVD-RW Auto Init.
Optimize HDD
Set to On to prevent accidental recording, editing or
erasing of the disc loaded. If you need to unlock the disc
to make edits, select Off.
DVD-RW Auto Initialize
ENTER
2
Screen’.
Basic
Select ‘Basic’ > ‘Input Disc Name’ > ‘Next
DVD-RW
• Default setting: VR Mode
Disc Setup
Basic
Input Disc Name
Initialize
Lock Disc
Finalize
DVD-RW Auto Init.
Next Screen
Optimize HDD
ENTER
3
Input a name for the disc.
The disc name can be up to 64 characters long for a VR
mode disc, or 40 for a Video mode discs and DVD+R/+RW.
• See Title Name on page 120 for more on navigating
the input screen.
Lock Disc
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM
• Default setting: Off
Locking the disc will prevent accidental recording,
editing or erasing of the disc.
Initialization mode is automatically carried out when you
insert a blank DVD-RW. You must set the desired
initialization mode before inserting a disc.
See DVD-RW Auto Initialize on page 102 for detailed
instructions.
Initialize settings
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+RW DVD-RAM
You can initialize a recordable DVD-R/-RW disc for either
VR mode or Video mode recording.
The first time you load a new DVD-RW disc, it will be
automatically initialized for recording according to the
DVD-RW Auto Init. setting in the Disc Setup menu (see
page 102).
New DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode recording
when you load them, but it is also possible to initialize
them for VR mode recording.1
Note
1 Once initialized for VR mode recording it is not possible to re-initialize the disc for Video mode recording. Also, once recorded in Video mode,
the disc cannot be re-initialized for VR mode recording.
147
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 148 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
The Disc Setup menu
13
DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can also be initialized as
a way of erasing the entire disc. When initializing a DVD
-RAM disc, select VR mode.
See Initializing recordable DVD discs on page 102 for
detailed instructions.
Important
• Optimizing the HDD can take as long as eight hours.
During optimization, playback and recording are not
possible.
• Cancelling optimization mid-way does not undo the
optimization already done, so the HDD will be partly
optimized.
Finalize settings
HOME
MENU
Finalize
1
SETUP
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu.
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+R DVD+RW
ENTER
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings in place so that the disc
can be played on a regular DVD player or computer
equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive.
It is also possible to finalize DVD+RW discs. This is only
necessary if you want to a player to display a title menu
for the disc.
See Playing your recordings on other DVD players on
page 101 for detailed instructions.
Undo Finalize
DVD-RW
You can undo the finalization on DVD-RW discs recorded
on this recorder in Video mode. You need to do this if you
want to record more material or edit material already on
the disc.
You can also undo the finalization of VR mode discs
which have been finalized on other DVD recorders. If
when you load a disc the message This disc cannot be
recorded. Undo the finalization. is displayed, use this
command to be able to record on the disc using this
recorder.
HOME
MENU
1
SETUP
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu.
2
Disc Setup
Select ‘Finalize’ > ‘Undo Finalize’ then
Optimize HDD
Basic
Start
Initialize
Finalize
Optimize HDD
A progress bar indicates how long there is left to go. If no
actions are carried out for more than 20 minutes after the
optimization process is completed, the unit turns itself
off.
Initialize HDD
HDD
When your HDD/DVD recorder is working without a
problem this option is not visible in the Disc Setup menu.
However, if the HDD file system becomes corrupted for
some reason, you can initialize the HDD to fix the
problem. Note that initializing the HDD will erase all the
data on it.
HOME
MENU
ENTER
2
‘Start’.
Select ‘Optimize HDD’ then ‘Start’.
1
SETUP
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu.
ENTER
Optimize HDD
HDD
2
Select ‘Initialize HDD’ then ‘Start’.
Disc Setup
Basic
Initialize
As you record, erase and edit recordings, the HDD file
system gradually becomes fragmented. Periodically, the
HDD will need optimizing to ‘clean up’ all the fragmented
files.
When the HDD needs optimizing the recorder will
automatically display a message recommending
optimization.
148
En
Finalize
Initialize HDD
Optimize
HDD
Initialize HDD
Start
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 149 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
The Video Adjust menu
14
Chapter 14
The Video Adjust menu
Using the Video Adjust menu you can set up the picture
quality for the built-in tuner and external input, for disc
playback, and for recording.
Creating your own set
There are three user presets in which you can save your
own set of picture quality settings.
1 Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of
the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3).
Setting the picture quality for TV and
external input
Picture Creation lets you choose a set of picture quality
settings for the built-in TV tuner1 and for the external
input. There are several preset settings that suit various
sources, or you can create up to three of your own sets.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Detailed Settings’.
Pr 1
Memory1
Detailed Settings
Choosing a preset
HOME
MENU
ENTER
3
1 SETUP With the recorder stopped, press to display
the Home Menu.
Select the setting you want to adjust.
Memory1
Prog. Motion
Pr 1
Motion
Still
ENTER
2
PureCinma
Select ‘Video Adjust’.
3-D Y/C
Auto
Motion
Still
YNR
Off
Max
CNR
Off
Max
Detail
Off
ENTER
3
Select a preset.
Pr 1
White AGC
Max
Off
Tuner
Detailed Settings
• Use the INPUT button (LCD page 2) to switch between
the built-in TV tuner and the external input.
• Use the CH +/– buttons (LCD page 2) to change the
channel of the built-in TV tuner.
There are six presets available:
You can adjust the following settings:
• Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and still picture
quality when video output is set to progressive.
• PureCinema – This setting optimizes the picture for
film material when the video output is set to
progressive. Usually set to Auto; but try switching to
Off if the picture appears unnatural.
• Tuner – suitable for general TV broadcasts
• 3-D Y/C – Adjusts the brightness/colour separation.
• VCR – suitable for video cassettes
• YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the Y (brightness) component.
• DTV/LDP – suitable for digital broadcasts and
Laserdiscs
• Memory1 – user preset 1
• CNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the C (colour) component.
• Memory2 – user preset 2
• Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges appear.
• Memory3 – user preset 3
• White AGC – Turn on for automatic white level
adjustment.
You can press DISP (LCD page 3) to see the individual
settings for the current preset (Tuner, VCR or DTV/LDP).
• White Level – Adjusts the intensity of white.
• Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of black.
Note
1 When an HDMI component is not connected, the settings for the digital tuner cannot be changed.
149
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 150 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
The Video Adjust menu
14
• Black Setup – Corrects the standard reference black
level (525 Input Line System only).
• Hue – Adjusts overall balance between red and green.
• Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the colours appear.
Setting the picture quality for disc
playback
This setting determines how the picture will look when
playing discs.
ENTER
4
Adjust the currently selected setting.
Choosing a preset
HOME
MENU
5 SETUP Press to exit.
You can now use the preset for any other input or the
built-in TV tuner.
HOME
MENU
1
With a disc playing (or paused), press to
display the Home Menu.
SETUP
ENTER
Tip
• To see more of the picture as you adjust different
settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you
want to adjust.
2
Select ‘Video Adjust’.
ENTER
3
Select a setting.
TV
Detailed Settings
There are six presets available:
• TV – suitable for LCD and cathode-ray tube TVs
• PDP – suitable for plasma television screens
• Professional – suitable for professional monitors
• Memory1 – user preset 1
• Memory2 – user preset 2
• Memory3 – user preset 3
You can press DISP (LCD page 3) to see the individual
settings for the current preset (TV, PDP or Professional).
Creating your own set
There are three user presets in which you can save your
own set of picture quality settings for disc playback.
1 Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of
the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3).
2 Move the cursor down and select ‘Detailed
Settings’.
Memory1
Detailed Settings
150
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 151 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
The Video Adjust menu
14
3 Select the picture quality setting you want to
adjust.
Memory1
Prog. Motion
Tip
• To see more of the picture as you adjust different
settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you
want to adjust.
Motion
PureCinma
Still
Auto1
YNR
Off
BNR
Off
Max
Max
MNR
Off
Max
Sharpness
Soft
Fine
Detail
Soft
Fine
You can adjust the following settings:
• Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and still picture
quality when video output is set to progressive. (Prog.
Motion is ineffective when PureCinema is On.)
• PureCinema – This setting optimizes the picture for
film material when the video output is set to
progressive. Usually set to Auto 1 but try switching to
Auto 2, On or Off if the picture appears unnatural.
• YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the Y (brightness) component.
• BNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the block noise (artefacts visible in areas of
flat colour, caused by MPEG compression).
• MNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the mosquito noise (artefacts visible
around the edges of an image, caused by MPEG
compression).
• Sharpness – Adjusts the sharpness of the highfrequency (detailed) elements in the picture.
Sharpness is ineffective for HDMI output.
• Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges appear.
• White Level – Adjusts the intensity of white. White
Level is ineffective for HDMI output.
• Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of black. Black
Level is ineffective for HDMI output.
• Black Setup – Corrects the standard reference black
level. Black Setup is ineffective for HDMI output.
• Gamma Correction – Adjusts the brightness of
darker images. Gamma Correction is ineffective for
HDMI output.
• Hue – Adjusts overall balance between red and
green. Hue is ineffective for HDMI output.
• Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the colours
appear. Chroma Level is ineffective for HDMI output.
4 Use the / buttons to adjust the currently
selected picture quality setting.
5 When you have all the settings as you want
them, press HOME MENU to exit.
151
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 152 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
15
The Initial Setup menu
Chapter 15
The Initial Setup menu
Using the Initial Setup menu
The Initial Setup menu is where you can set various recorder options for sound, picture, language and so on.
Some settings can only be changed when the recorder is stopped. During playback and recording these settings are
grayed out in the Initial Setup menu.
Except for the Setup Navigator, menu screens are exited automatically after 20 minutes of inactivity.
• Press HOME MENU and select ‘Initial Setup’.
In the table below, the default option is marked with a •.
Setting
Options
Explanation
Auto
Set the channel that broadcasts a clock signal and the clock will be set
automatically.
Manual •
If there is no channel that broadcasts a clock signal in your area, you can set
the time and date manually.
Basic
Clock Setting
• If any digital TV channels are set then the clock will automatically be set.
• The clock must be set in order to use timer recording.
Input Line System
525 System
Use for NTSC or PAL-60 recording from an external input.
625 System •
Use for standard PAL or SECAM recording.
• This setting is applicable only when recording from an external input. Note that you cannot select an external input when AV2/L1 In is set to
Decoder (page 155).
• See also About the input line system on page 161 for more information on this setting.
Power Save
HELP Setting
EPG Type Select
Setup Navigator
152
En
Mode 1
Only signals arriving at the antenna input are passed through to the antenna
output when the recorder is in standby.
Mode 2
No input signals are passed through to the outputs when the recorder is in
standby.
Off •
When the recorder is in standby, all signals arriving at the SCART and
antenna inputs are passed along to the outputs.
On •
Switches on the automatic Help screens for GUI displays.
Off
Switches off the automatic Help screens for GUI displays. (Press HELP on
the remote to manually display the Help screen.)
GUIDE Plus+
Use the Gemstar GUIDE Plus+ EPG.
Digital EPG
Use the EPG based on information provided by D.TV broadcasts.
Start
Select to start the Setup Navigator. See also Switching on and setting up on
page 68.
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 153 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
15
Options
Explanation
Next Screen
Scans for digital channels and replaces all the channel presets with the
results. Before the scan starts you will need to select your country.
After the scan is complete the recorder tells you whether any new channels
were found, and if so, how many.
(You can cancel the scan before it has finished by pressing HOME MENU or
RETURN. In this case, no channels are set.)
Digital Tuner
Replace Channels
If you execute a Replace Channels command, any timer recordings set for D.TV channels will be erased.
Add New Channels
Next Screen
Automatically scans for new digital channels.
After the scan is complete the recorder tells you whether any new channels
were found, and if so, how many.
(You can cancel the scan before it has finished by pressing HOME MENU or
RETURN. In this case, no new channels are set.)
Channel Sort
Next Screen
Use this screen to sort channel presets into your prefered order. Use the
/// buttons to highlight the channel you want to move, press
ENTER. Use the cursor buttons again to highlight the position you want to
move the channel preset to, then press ENTER again.
(If there are more channel presets than will fit on one screen, you can select
the next/previous page by highlighting the small triangular marks and
pressing ENTER.)
Channel Options
Next Screen
From this screen you can skip or lock channels. Locked channels will require
the correct password to be entered before the channel can be watched. Use
the /// buttons to highlight a preference box and press ENTER to
toggle the preference.
To enter this screen, input the parental lock password when prompted (if one
has not yet been set then the password you enter becomes the parental lock
password).
Auto Skip
Off •
No channels are automatically skipped.
Radio
Radio channels are skipped when selecting channels.
Data
Data channels are skipped when selecting channels.
Radio & Data
Radio and data channels are skipped when selecting channels.
Signal Check
Next Screen
Use this screen to check the signal level and quality of digital channels. Use
the / buttons to change the RF channel; select Add New Channels
then press ENTER to scan for new channels; press HOME MENU to exit.
Aerial Power
On
Power is supplied to the connected aerial (antenna) when this recorder is on
or in standby.
Auto
Power is supplied to the connected aerial (antenna) only when this recorder
is on.
Off •
This recorder does not supply power to the connected aerial (antenna).
If the setting keeps reverting to Off when you try to set to On or Auto, the aerial may not be connected properly, or it may be shorted. In either
case, check the connection and try making the setting again.
D.TV Language
Next Screen
From this screen you can set your Primary and Secondary Audio preference
for multilingual digital broadcasts, your Primary and Secondary Subtitle
preference for programmes that are broadcast with subtitles, and your
Teletext language preference. Use the / buttons to highlight a field then
use the / buttons to change it.
153
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 154 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
15
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
Options
Explanation
Analog Tuner
Auto Channel Setting Auto Scan
Select your country and then wait for the recorder to auto tune into channels
in your area. After auto scan has finished, the channel mapping screen
appears showing which channels have been assigned to which programme
numbers. You can skip unwanted channels using the Manual CH Setting
option below.
Press HOME MENU to exit the channel mapping screen.
Download from TV If your TV supports this feature you can download all the channels that your
TV is tuned to via the SCART input. Select your country and then wait for the
download to complete. After the download is complete, the channel
mapping screen appears, as above.
See also the operating instructions that came with your TV for more
information.
Manual CH Setting
Next Screen
Proceed to the next screen if you need to adjust any of the settings made by
auto tuning. Select your country, then proceed to the manual channel
setting screen:
• Change channel presets using the CH +/– buttons (LCD page 2).
• To skip the displayed channel (because there is no station assigned to that
channel), change the Skip setting to On.
• Set the CH SYSTEM setting to match the channel system of your country
or region.
• Set the CHANNEL setting to the channel you want to assign to the current
channel preset.
• To manually fine tune the channel, change the AFT setting to Off then
adjust the Level setting.
• Set the Sound System setting to match the sound system of your region.
• The Name field allows you to input a name of up to five characters for the
current channel preset.
• If the currently selected channel is scrambled requiring a decoder
connected to the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER), set the Decoder setting to On.
Channel Swapping
Next Screen
Proceed to the next screen to swap channel assignments of different presets
so that you can group together presets that naturally go together. Select two
presets to swap then press ENTER.
Next Screen
Proceed to the next screen to set the input colour system for the external
input and the built-in TV tuner. Use the CH +/– or INPUT buttons (LCD page
2) to change the preset or external input. On the default Auto setting the
recorder can generally correctly detect whether the input signal is PAL,
SECAM, 3.58 NTSC or PAL-60, but in some cases you may have to set it
manually if the picture is displayed incorrectly.
Video In/Out
Input Colour System
• Input Colour System cannot be set when the recorder is in D.TV mode.
• See also About the input colour system on page 161 for more information on this setting.
AV1 Out
Video •
Sets the AV1 (RGB)-TV SCART output to standard composite video
(compatible with all TVs).
S-Video
Sets the AV1 (RGB)-TV SCART output to S-Video. Recommended if you are
using a long SCART cable.
RGB
Sets the AV1 (RGB)-TV SCART output to RGB. Good quality but check your
TV for compatibility. Note that on this setting signals from the built-in tuner
and from external input is not output when the recorder is in TV mode.
If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case either switch off and reconnect
using the supplied video cable, or reset the recorder (see Resetting the recorder on page 175).
154
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 155 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
The Initial Setup menu
15
Setting
Options
Explanation
AV2/L1 In
Video •
Sets the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to standard composite
video.
NTSC on PAL TV
S-Video
Sets the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to S-Video.
RGB
Sets the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to RGB.
Decoder
Use this setting if you connected a decoder to the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
SCART connector. For scrambled channels, make sure that the channel
Decoder setting is set to On. (See Manual CH Setting on page 154.)
On •
NTSC discs will play correctly on PAL-only TVs.
Off
Use if your TV is already NTSC-compatible.
Many recent PAL TVs are compatible with NTSC input and so this setting can be switched off. Check the operating instructions that came with
your TV. See also About NTSC on PAL TV on page 161 for related information.
Audio In
NICAM Select
Analog Tuner Level
External Audio
NICAM •
Record the NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast.
Regular Audio
Record the non-NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast. (You can still switch the
audio to record using the
button (LCD page 3) before recording.)
Normal •
Standard setting.
Compression
Use if the audio level from the built-in tuner is excessive, causing distortion.
Stereo •
Select if the audio from the currently selected external input is standard
stereo.
Bilingual
Select if each channel carries a separate soundtrack.
When the external audio is from the DV input, an audio subcode channel within the DV audio tells the recorder whether the audio is stereo or
bilingual. This has priority over the setting you make here.
Bilingual Recording
A/L •
Record the left (A) channel of a bilingual source when recording to HDD
with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode On, to DVD-R/-RW (Video
mode) or DVD+R/+RW or in LPCM mode, from an external source.
B/R
As above, but for right (B) channel recording.
When recording bilingual audio to DVD in VR mode (except in LPCM mode), or to HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode Off (except
in LPCM mode), both audio channels are recorded and you can switch to the one you want on playback.
DV Input
Stereo 1 •
Select to use the ‘live’ audio track (recorded during the video shoot) from a
camcorder that supports two stereo audio tracks.
Stereo 2
Select to use the overdubbed audio track from a camcorder that supports
two stereo audio tracks.
Mix
Select one of the three settings to use a mix of the two stereo audio tracks.
Audio Out
Dolby Digital Out
DTS Out
Dolby Digital •
Output a Dolby Digital signal when a Dolby Digital source is being played.
Dolby Digital PCM
Convert Dolby Digital sources to Linear PCM output. Use if your connected
equipment doesn’t have a Dolby Digital decoder.
On •
Output a DTS signal when a DTS source is being played.
Off
Switch off the digital output when a DTS source is being played. Use when
your connected equipment doesn’t have a DTS decoder. In this case, use the
analog audio outputs.
155
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 156 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
15
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
Options
96 kHz PCM Out
96 kHz 48 kHz • Convert 96 kHz digital audio sources to 48 kHz output. Use if your connected
equipment doesn’t support 96 kHz sampling rate.
96 kHz
Output 96 kHz digital audio when a 96 kHz source is being played.
MPEG Out
MPEG
Output an MPEG audio signal when a source using MPEG audio is being
played.
MPEG PCM •
Convert sources with MPEG audio to Linear PCM output. Use if your
connected equipment doesn’t have an MPEG audio decoder.
On
Switches on Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control). Use when listening to
Dolby Digital material at low volume.
Off •
Switches off Audio DRC.
Audio DRC
Explanation
Audio DRC is not effective when listening via the digital output when the Dolby Digital Out setting is set to Dolby Digital. In this case adjust the
dynamic range from the receiver subwoofer — see Dynamic Range Control on page 38.
Language
OSD Language
English •
Sets the language of the on-screen displays to English.
available languages
Choose from the languages displayed for the on-screen displays.
On Screen Display and D.TV Language will both reflect this setting.
Audio Language
English •
Sets the default audio language for DVD-Video playback to English.
available languages
Choose from the languages displayed to set the default audio language for
DVD-Video playback.
Other
Select to set the default audio language to something other than the ones
listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on page 162.
Discs do not necessarily have audio in your selected language. Also, some discs override the Audio Language preference.
Subtitle Language
English •
Sets the default subtitle language for DVD-Video playback to English.
available languages
Choose from the languages displayed to set the default subtitle language for
DVD-Video playback.
Other
Select to set the default subtitle language to something other than the ones
listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on page 162.
Discs do not necessarily have subtitles in your selected menu language. Also, some discs override the Subtitle Language preference.
Auto Language
On •
On this setting:
• DVD-Video discs whose main audio track is in your default language will
play using that language, without subtitles.
• Discs whose main audio track is not in your default language but that have
a subtitle track in your default language will play the original audio track with
subtitles.
Off
Select to play DVD-Video discs according to your audio and subtitle
language preferences.
For Auto Language to be effective, the Audio Language and Subtitle Language options must be set to the same language.
156
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 157 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
Options
DVD Menu Language w/Subtitle
Language •
15
Explanation
Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to the same as that set for the
subtitle language.
English
Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to English.
available languages
Choose from the displayed languages to set the default language for DVD
-Video menus.
Other
Select to set the DVD menu language to something other than the ones
listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on page 162.
Discs do not necessarily have menus in your selected menu language.
Subtitle Display
On •
Select to have discs display subtitles according to your Subtitle Language
and Auto Language preferences.
Off
Select to switch off subtitle display.
Assist Subtitle
Select to display special additional assistive subtitles, where available.
Some discs may override these settings.
Recording
Manual Recording
On (go to setup)
All the standard recording modes, plus MN1 to MN32, LPCM and XP+
modes can be set.
Off •
Just the standard recording modes (XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP and SEP) can be set.
See also Manual recording modes on page 164 for detailed information on manual recording levels.
Optimized Rec
On
The recording quality of timer recordings is automatically adjusted to fit on
to the selected media if it will not fit at the selected quality setting. If the
recording will not fit even at MN1 (MN4 for DVD+R/+RW), then the
recording will be made to the HDD in the original quality selected.
Off •
When a timer recording is set that won’t fit on to the selected media, the
recording starts but is cut off when no more recording is possible.
Optimized Rec will only compensate for the next scheduled timer recording if more than one is set. It cannot be used together with VPS/PDC.
Subtitle Recording
Set Thumbnail
Auto Chapter
(HDD/VR)
On
The selected subtitle language is recorded with the D.TV timer recording.
Off •
No subtitles are recorded with D.TV timer recordings.
0 seconds •
Sets the default thumbnail picture in the Disc Navigator to the first frame of
the title.
30 seconds
Sets the default thumbnail picture to 30 seconds into the title.
3 minutes
Sets the default thumbnail picture to three minutes into the title.
On •
When recording to the HDD or in VR mode to a DVD, chapter marks are
added at the black screen between commercials and main programming.
When recording in DV, chapter marks can be changed by date/time.
Off
Automatic chapter marking is switched off.
Auto Chapter (Video) No Separation
Automatic chapter marking is switched off.
10 minutes •
When recording in Video mode, chapter markers are inserted every 10
minutes.
15 minutes
Chapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes.
This settings applies to recording or real-time copying to Video mode DVD-R/-RW discs.
157
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 158 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
15
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
Options
Explanation
Auto Chapter
(DVD+R/+RW)
No Separation
Automatic chapter marking is switched off.
10 minutes •
When recording in DVD+R/+RW, chapter markers are inserted every 10
minutes.
15 minutes
Chapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes.
This settings applies to recording or real-time copying to DVD+R/+RW discs.
HDD Recording
Format
Video Mode Off
Recordings made to the HDD are made in VR mode. Use this setting if you
don’t need to transfer the recording later to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or
DVD+R/+RW.
Video Mode On •
Recordings made to the HDD are compatible with Video mode recordings.
This setting is convenient if you want to transfer the recording to a DVD-R/
-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW as high-speed copy can be used.
When Video Mode On is used, you must select the audio channel you want to record when recording a bilingual broadcast. On the Video Mode Off
setting, both channels will be recorded and you can switch between them on playback. See also Bilingual Recording on page 155.
When the recording mode is set to XP+, you cannot change HDD Recording Format.
Playback
TV Screen Size
4:3 (Letter Box)
Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the letter box format
presentation for widescreen material.
4:3 (Pan & Scan)
Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the pan and scan
presentation for widescreen material.
16:9 •
Select if you have a widescreen 16:9 TV. Your TV settings determine how 4:3
material will look.
Selecting 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan) does not guarantee that all video material will be presented in that format as some discs override
this setting.
Still Picture
Seamless Playback
Field
Produces a stable, generally shake-free image.
Frame
Produces sharp image, but may be prone to shake.
Auto •
Generates a generally less sharp but more stable still image.
On
Playback is smooth, but with a trade-off against the accuracy of the edit
points.
Off •
You may notice momentary interruption at edited points during playback of a
VR mode Play List.
This setting applies to HDD, DVD-R/-RW (VR) and DVD-RAM playback.
Angle Indicator
On •
A camera icon appears on-screen during multi-angle scenes on a DVD-Video
disc.
Off
Nothing is indicated on-screen when a multi-angle scene is showing.
Set Password/
Change Password
Next Screen
If no password has yet been set, enter a four digit number to become your
password. If you want to change the password, first enter your old password,
then enter a new one.
DVD Playback
Next Screen
From this screen, first enter your password and then set a parental lock level
for playback of DVDs with parental level coding.
Parental Lock
158
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 159 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
The Initial Setup menu
15
Setting
Options
Explanation
D.TV Age Limit
Next Screen
Use this screen to enter an age limit for D.TV programmes. Programmes that
are broadcast with age suitability guidelines that fall above the age set here
will require the correct password to be entered before the channel can be
viewed.
You must also enter your password in order to change the age limit setting.
This setting is only applicable when the country is set to France, Denmark, Finland or Sweden.
HDMI Output (only available when an HDMI device is connected)
Screen Resolution
1920 x 1080p
Constant 1920 x 1080p output.
1920 x 1080i
Constant 1920 x 1080i output.
1280 x 720p
Constant 1280 x 720p output.
720 x 576p
(720 x 480p)
Constant 720 x 576p output (when setting the Input Line System to
525 System, video is output in 720 x 480p).
720 x 576i
(720 x 480i)
Constant 720 x 576i output (when setting the Input Line System to
525 System, video is output in 720 x 480i).
If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case, press OPEN/CLOSE while
holding down the (Stop) button on the front panel to switch the setting.
4:3 Video Output
Colour
Full
Select if your HDMI TV allows you to change the aspect ratio.
Normal
Select if your HDMI TV does not allow you to change the aspect ratio. 4:3
video will be shown with bars on each side.
RGB (0–255)
Use if colours are weak and black appears to ‘float’ on the RGB (16–235)
setting.
RGB (16–235)
Use this setting if colours appear overly rich and the black too deep on the
RGB (0–255) setting.
YCbCr 4:2:2
The video signal is output as a YCbCr 4:2:2 component signal. This is the
standard setting for HDMI-compatible devices.
YCbCr 4:4:4
The video signal is output as a YCbCr 4:4:4 component signal.
• Depending on the connected device some settings may not be available.
• When a DVI device is connected, the YCbCr 4:2:2 and YCbCr 4:4:4 options are not available.
Audio Output
Auto •
Dolby Digital, MPEG and DTS sources are output as a bitstream signal.
However, depending on the Audio Out setting, number of audio channels,
and the HDMI-connected device, Linear PCM audio may be output.
PCM
All audio signals are converted to Linear PCM (except DTS).
Bitstream Priority
Select if the connected device is compatible with bitstream audio.
This setting is not available when a DVI device is connected.
HDMI Control
On •
Enable the HDMI Control function. Select this option when using to an
HDMI Control-compatible Pioneer plasma television.
Off
Disable the HDMI Control function. Select this option when not connected to
an HDMI Control-compatible component, or when connected to a
component manufactured by a company other than Pioneer.
• For more information about HDMI Control, see HDMI Control on page 66.
• This setting is available even if you are not connected to an HDMI device.
• For more information, see Troubleshooting on page 168.
159
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 160 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
15
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
Options
Explanation
On •
The recorder displays operation displays ( Stop, Play, etc.) on-screen.
Options
On Screen Display
Off
Switches off the on-screen operation displays.
Front Panel Display
On •
The time is shown in the front panel display when the recorder is in standby.
Off
The front panel display is switched off in standby.
AV. Link
This Recorder Only • Signals received through the AV input when the recorder is in standby are
not passed through to the AV output.
Pass Through
Signals received when in standby are passed though to the output for
connected devices. (Note that during EPG data download, the EPG data is
not passed through.)
When set to Pass Through, make sure to set Power Save (page 152) to Off.
DivX VOD
Registration Code
Use to display the recorder’s DivX registration code. See DivX video
compatibility and DivX® VOD content on page 60.
Set Preview
(HDD only)
Quick Preview •
When in the Disc Navigator, the thumbnail video plays short excerpts from
throughout the selected title. (Note that edited titles that will play normally
from the beginning.)
Normal
The thumbnail video plays from the beginning of the title.
CI Information
Next Screen
This option displays a menu of CI card functions. Consult your service
provider for more information on the functions available.
Software Update
Next Screen
The Software Update function can check for and download updated system
software for the digital tuner. See Using Software Update (Digital tuner) on
page 162.
Options 2
USB
Pause Live TV
Restart USB Device If the connected USB device does not respond to the recorder, try using this
option to restart it. If the device still does not work properly try switching it off
then back on, and/or disconnecting then reconnecting the USB cable.
Confirm Printer
Use this option to confirm the make and model of the printer connected to
the recorder (does not work with all printers).
TV’s Tuner
Allows you to use the Pause Live TV feature with an AV Link-compatible TV
connected by SCART cable.
Recorder’s Tuner • Allows you to use Pause Live TV with this recorder’s internal TV tuner.
See also Pause Live TV on page 96 for more information on this setting.
160
En
HDD Sleep Mode
Proceed
Puts the HDD to sleep. Using this feature when playing DVDs or CDs allows
you to reduce noise produced by the unit, resulting in improved sound quality.
When you wake the HDD back up it will take a few seconds to load. The HDD
can be taken out of Sleep Mode by any number of actions, including:
• Turning the power off and on again.
• Pressing the HDD/DVD button (LCD page 1) and choosing the HDD.
• When a timer recording begins.
• When you try and make any changes to system settings.
Gracenote Database
Database Update
Updates the Gracenote database installed in this unit. Load the Update Disc
created with the latest data downloaded from the Pioneer website. For
details, visit the Pioneer website. (http://www.pioneer.eu)
Version
Information
Shows the current version of the Gracenote database installed in this unit.
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 161 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
The Initial Setup menu
Additional information about the TV system
settings
About the input line system
This recorder is compatible with PAL, SECAM, 3.58 NTSC
and PAL-60 TV systems. The Input Line System and Input
Colour System settings determine how the recorder
treats incoming video signals from an external input.
Please note the following points when changing the
input line system:
• If, when the Input Line System setting is changed, the
screen goes blank (due to incompatibility with your
TV), you can switch back by pressing and holding the
front panel (Stop) button then pressing
(Play)(also front panel) while the recorder is
stopped.
• When you switch the Input Line System setting the
Copy List is erased. If you switch the setting using the
(Stop) button and (Play) buttons as described
above, there is no confirmation, so please use with
care.
• You can’t mix recordings of different TV line systems
on the same disc.
15
About NTSC on PAL TV
Depending on the Input Line System setting and the
NTSC on PAL TV setting, the signal format output when
the recorder is stopped varies as shown in the table
below.
Input Line System NTSC on PAL TV
Output when
stopped
625 System
PAL
525 System
Off
On
PAL
Off
NTSC
On
PAL–60
About the input colour system
The available options of the Input Colour System setting
depend on the Input Line System setting. The table below
shows the different options available.
Input Line System
Built-in analog
tuner
External input
625 System
Auto
Auto
• When you change this setting, the Input Colour
System setting also changes (see below).
525 System
PAL
PAL
SECAM
SECAM
n/a
Auto
3.58 NTSC
PAL–60
161
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 162 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
The Initial Setup menu
15
Selecting other languages for
language options
ENTER
1
Select ‘Other’ from the language list.
This option appears in the settings for DVD Menu
Language, Audio Language, and Subtitle Language.
Using Software Update (Digital tuner)
The Software Update function can keep the built-in digital
tuner up to date with the latest system software. You can
either check for updates manually, or have the recorder
do it automatically at regular intervals.
Access the Software Update screen from the Options
menu.
There are three options available: Manual Update, Auto
Update and Technical Information.
ENTER
2
Select the language you want.
Manual Update
Initial Setup
DVD Menu Language
Basic
OSD
Digital Tuner
Audio Language
Language
Subtitle Language
Number
Auto Language
Analogue Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
English
0
5
1
4
DVD Menu Language
Subtitle Display
Language
Language
Recording
• Select by language name: Use the / buttons to
change the language.
Select Manual Update to check for updated software
immediately. If new software is found then it is
automatically downloaded and installed. The new
software will take effect the next time the recorder is
powered on.
If for some reason the new software could not be
downloaded successfully, a dialog box informs you of the
error. Press HOME MENU to exit or RETURN to return to
the previous screen.
• Select by code number: Press then use the number
buttons to enter the four-digit language code.
Note that channel information may be erased when
software update is used, and that timer recording will not
work during the update.
See Language code list on page 172 for a list of available
languages and corresponding codes.
To cancel manual update before it has completed, press
HOME MENU.
Auto Update
By default, the Auto Update option is On, which means
that periodically the recorder will check for and update
the digital tuner software if it’s available. We recommend
that you leave this option On.
If new software is found and successfully downloaded,
the recorder automatically scans for new digital
channels, informing you if any are found (this is the
equivalent of using the Add New Channel option, found
in the Digital Tuner section of the Initial Setup menu).
Technical Information
This displays the current hardware and software version
numbers of the digital tuner.
162
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 163 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Additional information
16
Chapter 16
Additional information
Minimum copying times
The table below shows the minimum HDD to DVD copying time for one hour of video.
Please note that not all discs are compatible with high-speed copying. 1 Check with the disc manufacturer for
compatibility.
Rec mode
DVD disc type
SEP
SLP
EP
LP
SP
10 h
8h
6h
4h
2h
XP
1h
DVD-R/1x
DVD-RW/1x
1x
6 mins.
7.5 mins.
10 mins.
15 mins.
30 mins.
60 mins.
DVD-RW/2x
DVD-R DL
DVD-RAM/2x
2x
3 mins.
4 mins.
5 mins.
7.5 mins.
15 mins.
30 mins.
DVD+R/2.4x
DVD+RW/2.4x
DVD+R DL
2.4x
*1
*1
*1
6.3 mins.
12.5 mins.
25 mins.
DVD-RAM/3x
DVD-RAM/5x
3x
2 mins.
2.5 mins.
3.5 mins.
5 mins.
10 mins.
20 mins.
DVD-R/4x
DVD-RW/4x
DVD+R/4x
DVD+RW/4x
4x
1.5 mins.*1
2 mins.*1
2.5 mins.*1
4 mins.
7.5 mins.
15 mins.
DVD-R/8x/16x
DVD+R/8x/16x
DVD-RW/6x
DVD+RW/8x
6x
1.25 mins.*1
1.6 mins.*1
2.2 mins.*1
3 mins.
5.5 mins.
11 mins.
Note that all times in the above table are approximate. Also that actual copy speed varies with the part of the disc being recorded.
*1 Titles recorded on DVD+R/+RW in SEP, SLP or EP modes cannot be high-speed copied.
Note
1 Depending on the disc, the copy speed may be reduced (for example, although a 6x disc is used, the copy may be made at 2x speed).
163
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 164 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Additional information
16
Manual recording modes
The table below shows the approximate recording times for different DVD types in each manual recording mode, as
well as the standard recording mode equivalents. For recording time on the HDD, see Specifications (SDVR-LX70D) on
page 176.
Rec. time*1
Single-Layer
DVD:
DVD-R/-RW
DVD+R/+RW
DVD-RAM
Level
Resolution*2
Dual-Layer
DVD:
DVD-R DL
DVD+R DL
MN 1 *3,4
802 mins.
1440 mins.
MN 2 *3,4
720 mins.
1292 mins.
MN 3 *3,4
SEP
600 mins.
1077 mins.
MN 4 *4
SLP
480 mins.
861 mins.
420 mins.
754 mins.
360 mins.
646 mins.
300 mins.
270 mins.
240 mins.
230 mins.
220 mins.
210 mins.
200 mins.
190 mins.
180 mins.
170 mins.
160 mins.
150 mins.
140 mins.
130 mins.
120 mins.
110 mins.
105 mins.
100 mins.
95 mins.
90 mins.
85 mins.
80 mins.
75 mins.
70 mins.
65 mins.
61 mins.
61 mins.
--- mins.
538 mins.
484 mins.
431 mins.
413 mins.
395 mins.
377 mins.
359 mins.
341 mins.
323 mins.
305 mins.
287 mins.
269 mins.
251 mins.
233 mins.
215 mins.
197 mins.
188 mins.
179 mins.
170 mins.
161 mins.
153 mins.
144 mins.
135 mins.
126 mins.
117 mins.
111 mins.
111 mins.
--- mins.
MN 5
*4
MN 6 *4
MN 7
MN 8
MN 9
MN 10
MN 11
MN 12
MN 13
MN 14
MN 15
MN 16
MN 17
MN 18
MN 19
MN 20
MN 21
MN 22
MN 23
MN 24
MN 25
MN 26
MN 27
MN 28
MN 29
MN 30
MN 31
MN 32
LPCM
EP
LP
SP
XP
*5
XP+
Video mode Off (HDD)
VR mode (DVD-R/-RW)
DVD-RAM
VR mode (DVD-R DL)
Video mode On (HDD)
Video mode (DVD-R/-RW)
DVD+R/+RW
Video mode (DVD-R DL)
DVD+R DL
352 x 240/
352 x 288
352 x 240/
352 x 288
352 x 480/
352 x 576
352 x 480/
352 x 576
480 x 480/
480 x 576
544 x 480/
544 x 576
720 x 480/
720 x 576
720 x 480/
720 x 576
*1
Recording time may be slightly shorter for certain disc types or recording modes.
*2
The first figure refers to when the Input Line System is set to 525 System; the second when set to 625 System.
*3
Modes MN1 to MN3 not available when using DVD+R/+RW.
*4
Titles recorded at MN6 or lower cannot be high-speed copied to DVD+R/+RW.
*5
XP+ mode is available for HDD recordings only. If set for a DVD recording, the DVD will be automatically recorded in MN32 mode.
• Levels separated by a bold line show where there is a noticeable change in picture quality.
• Audio recording in all manual recording modes is in Dolby Digital 2 ch format, except for LPCM mode, which is in Linear PCM format.
• See also Recording on page 91.
164
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 165 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Additional information
16
Troubleshooting
Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble and malfunction. If you think there is something wrong with this
component, please check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other
components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after checking the points
below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.
General
Problem
Remedy
Can’t eject a disc
• Turn off the power to this device and press and hold OPEN/CLOSE on the front of the
recorder for more than three seconds.
Can’t play a disc
• Check that the disc is a compatible format disc (page 58).
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 174).
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up).
• Check that the disc has a region code compatible with the recorder.
• Press HDD/DVD (LCD page 1) to select the DVD.
• There may be condensation in the recorder. Leave the recorder for an hour or so for the
condensation to evaporate.
• During HDD recording, you can’t play discs that are recorded with a Line System different
to the current recorder setting.
• DVD+R/+RW discs recorded using another recorder with copy-once protected recordings
will not play in this recorder.
Can’t record a disc
• Check that the disc is not an incompatible format disc (page 58).
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned with the disc tray with the label side facing
up).
• Remove the disc from the disc tray and clean it (page 174).
• Some DVD-RAM discs are not recordable until they have been initialized (page 102). This
can take up to an hour.
Remote control does not
work
• If you connected this recorder to the receiver subwoofer using the CONTROL IN jack, point
the remote control at the display unit of the receiver subwoofer to use (page 26).
• Use the remote within its operating range (page 26).
• Replace the batteries (page 26).
All settings are reset
• If the recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) while the recorder is on, all the
settings will be lost.
• Make sure that you switch the recorder into standby before unplugging the power cord.
No picture
• Check that everything is connected properly (page 8).
• Check that the connected TV and/or the AV amp/receiver is set to the correct input.
• If you are using an indoor antenna that requires power, make sure that Aerial Power in the
Initial Setup menu is set to On or Auto (page 153).
• If the aerial/antenna is not connected properly, or if it is shorted, the Aerial Power setting
will revert to Off automatically. Check the aerial connection and try making the setting again.
No sound or sound is
distorted
• Make sure that the amp/receiver or TV is set to the correct input and the volume turned up.
• There is no sound when the picture is paused, or during scanning or slow motion play.
Press (Play)(LCD page 1) to resume regular playback.
• If the sound is distorted, try cleaning the cable plugs.
Cannot switch a bilingual
programme
• During real-time copying it is not possible to switch audio channels. The main and sub
channels are both output.
The picture from the
• If the video signal from the external component is copy-protected, you cannot connect via
external input is distorted this recorder. Connect the component directly to your TV.
The picture is distorted
• Change the Input Line System setting (page 161). (You can also change it by pressing the
(Stop) button and (Play) on the front panel simultaneously with the recorder stopped.)
165
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 166 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
16
Additional information
Problem
Remedy
Screen is stretched
vertically or horizontally
• Make sure that the TV Screen Size setting (page 158) is correct for the kind of TV you have
(see also page 173).
• If you have a widescreen TV, check its aspect ratio settings.
• This recorder’s input switches into wide mode automatically according to the input signal.
When the unit connected is not compatible with VIDEO ID-1 (widescreen signalling), set the
connected component to output 4:3 aspect ratio (standard) video.
Audio/subtitle language
cannot be changed
• Note that audio and subtitle languages cannot be changed during the recording of a digital
broadcast.
• You can only use the audio track and subtitles for the language that were selected at the
time of recording a digital broadcast. The audio track and subtitles cannot be changed to
other languages.
Can’t play a disc recorded
using this recorder on
another player
• If the disc was recorded in DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R, make sure that it’s
finalized (page 101).
• Some players will not play recordable DVD discs, even when recorded in DVD-R/-RW (Video
mode) or DVD+R and finalized.
• If the disc was recorded in VR mode, the other player must be specifically RW compatible
in order to play it (page 57).
• Discs recorded with copy-once material cannot be played on non-CPRM compatible
players (page 92).
• DVD+RW discs containing only a small amount of recorded material may not play on other
players. Finalize the disc and try again.
During playback the
• When a copy-protected disc is played via a VCR, the picture will not display correctly.
picture is dark or distorted Connect the recorder directly to your TV.
Recorded contents are not • Change the recording mode to XP/SP.
clear or artefacts appear in
areas of flat colour (due to
MPEG compression; also
known as block noise)
Can’t record or does not
record successfully
• Check that there is some remaining blank space on the DVD/HDD.
• For a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R, check that the disc isn’t already finalized.
• Check the limits on the number of titles and chapters on a disc:
– HDD: 999 titles
– VR mode: 99 titles, 999 chapters per disc
– Video mode disc: 99 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title
– DVD+R/+RW: 49 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title (max 254 chapters per disc)
• Check that the source you are trying to record is not copy protected.
• For a VR formatted disc, check that the disc isn’t locked (page 147).
• Check that you are recording with the same TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) as the disc has
already been recorded in. All recordings on a disc must be in the same TV system. When
recording to the HDD, it is also necessary to set the Input Line System setting to match what
you want to record (page 161).
• The power may have failed during recording.
Timer programme doesn’t • When setting the recording channel, make sure you set the recorder’s built-in TV tuner, not
record successfully
the TV’s built-in tuner.
• When recording to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW, programmes that are
copy-once protected cannot be recorded. Use a VR mode formatted disc for copy-once
material (page 92).
• Two timer programmes may have overlapped, in which case only the earlier one will record
completely.
• The power may have failed during recording.
166
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 167 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Additional information
Problem
Remedy
After briefly unplugging
or after a power failure
the front panel display
shows ‘--:--’
• A backup battery inside the recorder keeps the clock and other settings from being reset
when there is no power to the recorder. After unplugging or a power failure, the battery keeps
all settings for a period of several minutes. Reset the clock and other recorder settings to use
the recorder again.
• To have the battery replaced, please ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or
your dealer to carry out repairs.
16
Front panel display shows • The child lock is on; turn off in order to use the recorder (page 99).
‘LOCKED’ when a button is
pressed
Can’t use One Touch Copy • Make sure that there is a recordable DVD-R/-RW loaded with some free space for recording
(HDD to DVD)
and fewer than 99 titles already on the disc. Also make sure that for a DVD-R/-RW (Video
mode) or a DVD+R, the disc isn’t finalized.
• Make sure there is a recordable DVD+R/+RW loaded with some free space for recording
and fewer than 49 titles already on the disc.
• If you delete a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc, the number of remaining recordable titles
may not decrease.
• Further recording is not possible on a finalized DVD+R. Check that there isn’t a disc menu
on the disc you’re trying to use.
• If the title currently playing contains material that is copy-once protected, One Touch Copy
will not work.
• If the currently playing HDD content was recorded in XP+ mode, the One Touch Copy
feature can’t be used.
• One Touch Copy can’t be used for titles over eight hours long when copying to DVD+R/
+RW (though you can use a DVD+R DL).
• One Touch Copy can’t be used for MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP titles when copying to
DVD+R/+RW.
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to DVD.
Can’t use One Touch Copy • Make sure that there is space available on the HDD and that there are fewer than 999 titles
(DVD to HDD)
on the HDD.
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to the HDD.
The device connected to
the USB port is not
recognized
• Check that the device is compatible with this recorder (page 67).
• Use a USB cable less than 5 m in length.
• Check that the USB cable is inserted fully.
• Check that the USB device is powered on.
• Try switching this recorder into standby mode and then back on.
• Try using the Restart USB Device option from the Initial Setup menu (page 160).
• If several USB devices (camera, USB memory, card reader, etc.) are connected at the same
time, it’s possible that only the first device connected to this recorder will be recognized.
File names are not
displayed properly.
• Files names that do not conform to the ISO8859-1 standard may not display correctly on
this recorder.
167
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 168 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
16
Additional information
HDMI
Problem
Remedy
The connected HDMI or
DVI device does not
display any picture (and
the front panel HDMI
indicator does not light)
• Try disconnecting then reconnecting the HDMI cable (while the power of both components
is on).
• Try switching the power of the HDMI/DVI device off then back on.
• Try switching off the HDMI/DVI device and this recorder. Next, switch on the HDMI/DVI
device and leave it for around 30 seconds, then switch on this recorder.
• When you connect an HDMI-compatible device make sure of the following:
– The connected device’s video input is set correctly for this recorder.
– The cable you’re using is fully HDMI-compliant. Using a non-standard cable may result in
no picture being output.
– Don’t use several HDMI cables connected together. Use a single cable to connect devices
together.
• When you connect a DVI-compatible device make sure of the following:
– The connected device’s video input is set correctly for this recorder.
– The DVI terminal on the connected device is HDCP-compatible.
– The connected device is compatible with NTSC (720 x 480i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p)
and PAL (720 x 576i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p) video input.
• If the recorder’s internal HDD is damaged or broken, there will be no HDMI output.
• Not all HDCP-compatible DVI devices will work with this recorder.
No video from the HDMI
output
• If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any
picture at all. In this case, press OPEN/CLOSE while holding down the (Stop) button on
the front panel to switch the setting.
There’s no sound from the • There is no sound when using a DVI terminal.
• Some HDMI-compatible devices do not output sound (check with the manual that came
connected HDMI or DVI
with the connected device).
device
168
En
The power automatically
turns on
• This recorder’s power may be turned on each time you turn on the power for a connected
plasma television. If you do not want this unit to be turned on in this way, set this recorder’s
HDMI Control to Off (page 159).
Can’t record video
• When using HDMI Control to record, you must make sure that the channel information for
the plasma television matches that of this recorder. If the channel information does not
match you cannot make recordings. Use the Auto Channel Setting function to set this
recorder’s channel information (page 154).
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 169 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Additional information
16
Problem
Remedy
HDMI Control does not
respond
• Verify that the HDMI cable is firmly connected (page 65).
• Check whether HDMI Control is set to On for this recorder, the receiver subwoofer and the
device connected to this recorder. For more information, refer to the operating instructions of
your plasma television and HDMI Control on page 44.
• Depending on the type of plasma television, some HDMI input terminals do not support the
HDMI Control function. For details, see the operating instructions supplied with your plasma
television.
• If you want to use an HDMI cable other than the supplied HDMI cable, use the one that
supports the HDMI 1.3 specification. The HDMI Control functions may not operate properly if
you do not use an HDMI cable that supports the HDMI 1.3 specification.
• This function may not work properly if you have multiple recorders connected to a single
plasma television or the receiver subwoofer. For more information refer to the operating
instructions of your plasma television and HDMI Control on page 44.
• Controls may not function properly in certain situations, such as immediately after you
have connect an HDMI cable, turn this recorder’s power off or remove the power cable for
this recorder or the connected component. If you experience any problems, set HDMI Control
to On for all connected units, and then display the pictures stored on this recorder on your
plasma television to improve the situations.
• Check whether the connected component supports HDMI Control or not.
• Certain functions are not supported on with plasma televisions.
• We cannot guarantee this recorder will work with HDMI Control-compatible components
other than those made by Pioneer. When using HDMI Control-compatible components
manufactured by companies other than Pioneer, set the HDMI Control to Off (page 159).
If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity, disconnect the power plug from the
outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.
If the picture freezes and the front panel and remote control buttons stop working
• Press (Stop) then try restarting playback.
• Press the front panel STANDBY/ON button to
switch the power off, then switch back on and restart
playback. If the power fails to switch off, press and
hold STANDBY/ON for five seconds until the
power switches off.
STANDBY/ON
STOP
STANDBY/ON
DV IN
USB
OPEN/
CLOSE
PLAY
STOP
REC
STOP REC
169
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 170 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
16
Additional information
On-screen displays
The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanation
of their meaning.
170
En
Message
Explanation/Action
• Initializing disc. Please wait a moment.
When you load a blank DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc, the recorder
automatically initializes it.
• Incompatible region number.
The disc loaded has an incompatible region number for the recorder
and so will not play.
• Cannot record any more titles.
• No more space for file management data.
The disc control data limit has been reached, or the maximum
number of chapters and/or titles has been reached. Erase titles/
chapters or combine chapters.
• This disc cannot be recorded. Undo the
finalization.
The disc was finalized on a non-Pioneer DVD recorder. Undo the
finalization in order to recording/editing.
• Cannot play this disc.
• This disc cannot be recorded.
• Cannot read the CPRM information.
• Could not record the information to the disc.
• Cannot edit.
• Could not initialize disc.
• Could not complete finalization successfully.
• Could not undo finalization successfully.
• Could not successfully unlock the disc.
The disc may be dirty or damaged. Take out the disc, clean it and
retry. If the error persists, use a new disc. If the error appears even
with a new disc, please ask your nearest Pioneer-authorized service
center or your dealer to carry out repairs.
• Incompatible or unreadable disc.
The disc loaded is a playback-only disc type. This display may also
appear if the disc is dirty or damaged.
• Cannot record to a disc that is not CPRM
compatible.
• Cannot record this content using Video
mode recording.
• This video cannot be recorded to DVD+R/
+RW.
The video source is copy-once protected. Use a VR mode DVD-R/-RW
disc with CPRM for recording.
• This content is copy protected.
The video source is copy-protected and cannot be recorded.
• Incorrect CPRM information.
The recorder could not read the CPRM information. The recorder
may be damaged — please ask your nearest Pioneer-authorized
service center or your dealer to carry out repairs.
• Repairing disc.
• Repairing the HDD.
During recording, the power was cut. This display appears when the
power is restored.
• Could not repair the disc.
The recorder was unable to repair the disc after a power cut. The
contents of the recording will be lost.
• Overheating has stopped operation. Press
DISPLAY to clear message.
The internal temperature of the recorder has exceeded the operating
limit. If this message reappears, please ask your nearest Pioneerauthorized service center or your dealer to carry out repairs.
• HDD optimization is recommended. This can
be done using Disc Setup.
The HDD should be optimized (basically, HDD housekeeping) to
maintain playback and recording performance.
• Please perform HDD optimization. This can
be done using Disc Setup.
The HDD is in more urgent need of optimization in order to maintain
performance.
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 171 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Additional information
16
Message
Explanation/Action
• The HDD has not been sufficiently
optimized. Please optimize again.
If this message appears repeatedly after optimizing the HDD it is
likely that there is not enough free space on the HDD for optimization
to complete properly. Please erase some titles from the HDD and
optimize again.
• An error occurred. Please consult the service
center. Note that contents on the HDD may be
erased when servicing this unit.
This message is displayed when information from the HDD cannot
be read. The HDD may be damaged or broken. Please ask your
nearest Pioneer-authorized service center or your dealer to carry out
repairs.
• The Hard Disk Drive info is incorrect. Use the
Disc Setup menu to reinitialize.
As the HDD info cannot be properly read, no new recordings can be
made. Reinitializing the HDD (page 148) may result in your being
able to make recording again. Note that reinitializing the HDD will
erase all recorded contents, including protected files.
• This signal’s TV system is different from the
recorder’s setting.
The TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) of the current channel is different
from the TV system settings of this recorder.
• Recording failed due to a TV system
mismatch. Press DISPLAY to clear message.
The timer recording failed because the TV system of the channel set
for recording was different from the setting of the recorder.
• Playback has stopped because the TV system
is different than the recording.
During recording or timer recording standby, the TV System (PAL,
NTSC, etc.) of the playback video changed, causing playback to stop
automatically.
• You are not allowed to watch this
Conditional Access Programme.
A CA module or smart card (obtained from your service provider) is
required to watch the selected programme. Insert the supplied
module or card into the Common Interface card slot on the front of
the recorder (page 17).
• There is no DV input or the input signal is
unrecordable.
No signal was detected at the DV IN jack. This may appear if a blank
section of DV tape is playing in the connected camcorder.
• No DV camcorder connected.
The camcorder is not connected properly, or the camcorder is
switched off.
• You cannot connect more than one DV
camcorder at a time.
This recorder’s DV jack supports connection to just one camcorder.
• Cannot operate the DV camcorder.
This recorder cannot operate the DV camcorder. Try switching off the
camcorder then turn it back on again.
• Could not operate the DV camcorder.
This recorder was not able to operate the DV camcorder.
• The DV camcorder is not set for playback.
Please select playback mode on the DV
camcorder.
The camcorder is in camera mode. Switch it to playback mode.
• The printer is not ready or is not connected.
Please check the printer.
This message is displayed when communication could not be
established with the printer. See the Troubleshooting section if you
do not know the cause.
• Printing has been cancelled because ...
This message is displayed when there is a printer error during
printing. After checking the printer for the cause of the error, either
reconnect the printer and start the printing job again, or select “Yes”
to resume printing (select “No” to cancel the print job). See also the
operating instructions that came with your printer for possible
causes of print errors.
171
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 172 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
16
Additional information
Front panel displays
The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanation
of their meaning.
Message
Explanation/Action
• E01
The HDD may be damaged or broken. Please ask your nearest
Pioneer-authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repairs.
• E02
As the HDD info cannot be properly read, no new recordings can be
made. Reinitializing the HDD (page 148) may result in your being
able to make recording again. Note that reinitializing the HDD will
erase all recorded contents, including protected files.
Language code list
Language (Language code letter), Language code
Japanese (ja), 1001
English (en), 0514
French (fr), 0618
German (de), 0405
Italian (it), 0920
Spanish (es), 0519
Chinese (zh), 2608
Dutch (nl), 1412
Portuguese (pt), 1620
Swedish (sv), 1922
Russian (ru), 1821
Greek (el), 0512
Polish (pl), 1612
Czech (cs), 0319
Norwegian (no), 1415
Afar (aa), 0101
Abkhazian (ab), 0102
Afrikaans (af), 0106
Amharic (am), 0113
Arabic (ar), 0118
Assamese (as), 0119
Aymara (ay), 0125
Azerbaijani (az), 0126
Bashkir (ba), 0201
Byelorussian (be), 0205
Bulgarian (bg), 0207
Bihari (bh), 0208
Bislama (bi), 0209
Bengali (bn), 0214
Tibetan (bo), 0215
Breton (br), 0218
Catalan (ca), 0301
Corsican (co), 0315
Welsh (cy), 0325
Danish (da), 0401
172
En
Bhutani (dz), 0426
Esperanto (eo), 0515
Estonian (et), 0520
Basque (eu), 0521
Persian (fa), 0601
Finnish (fi), 0609
Fiji (fj), 0610
Faroese (fo), 0615
Frisian (fy), 0625
Irish (ga), 0701
Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704
Galician (gl), 0712
Guarani (gn), 0714
Gujarati (gu), 0721
Hausa (ha), 0801
Hindi (hi), 0809
Croatian (hr), 0818
Hungarian (hu), 0821
Armenian (hy), 0825
Interlingua (ia), 0901
Interlingue (ie), 0905
Inupiak (ik), 0911
Indonesian (in), 0914
Icelandic (is), 0919
Hebrew (iw), 0923
Yiddish (ji), 1009
Javanese (jw), 1023
Georgian (ka), 1101
Kazakh (kk), 1111
Greenlandic (kl), 1112
Cambodian (km), 1113
Kannada (kn), 1114
Korean (ko), 1115
Kashmiri (ks), 1119
Kurdish (ku), 1121
Kirghiz (ky), 1125
Latin (la), 1201
Lingala (ln), 1214
Laotian (lo), 1215
Lithuanian (lt), 1220
Latvian (lv), 1222
Malagasy (mg), 1307
Maori (mi), 1309
Macedonian (mk), 1311
Malayalam (ml), 1312
Mongolian (mn), 1314
Moldavian (mo), 1315
Marathi (mr), 1318
Malay (ms), 1319
Maltese (mt), 1320
Burmese (my), 1325
Nauru (na), 1401
Nepali (ne), 1405
Occitan (oc), 1503
Oromo (om), 1513
Oriya (or), 1518
Panjabi (pa), 1601
Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619
Quechua (qu), 1721
Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813
Kirundi (rn), 1814
Romanian (ro), 1815
Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823
Sanskrit (sa), 1901
Sindhi (sd), 1904
Sangho (sg), 1907
Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908
Sinhalese (si), 1909
Slovak (sk), 1911
Slovenian (sl), 1912
Samoan (sm), 1913
Shona (sn), 1914
Somali (so), 1915
Albanian (sq), 1917
Serbian (sr), 1918
Siswati (ss), 1919
Sesotho (st), 1920
Sundanese (su), 1921
Swahili (sw), 1923
Tamil (ta), 2001
Telugu (te), 2005
Tajik (tg), 2007
Thai (th), 2008
Tigrinya (ti), 2009
Turkmen (tk), 2011
Tagalog (tl), 2012
Setswana (tn), 2014
Tonga (to), 2015
Turkish (tr), 2018
Tsonga (ts), 2019
Tatar (tt), 2020
Twi (tw), 2023
Ukrainian (uk), 2111
Urdu (ur), 2118
Uzbek (uz), 2126
Vietnamese (vi), 2209
Volapük (vo), 2215
Wolof (wo), 2315
Xhosa (xh), 2408
Yoruba (yo), 2515
Zulu (zu), 2621
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 173 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Additional information
16
Country/Area code list
Country/Area, Country/Area code, Code letter
Argentina, 0118, ar
Australia, 0121, au
Austria, 0120, at
Belgium, 0205, be
Brazil, 0218, br
Canada, 0301, ca
Chile, 0312, cl
China, 0314, cn
Denmark, 0411, dk
Finland, 0609, fi
France, 0618, fr
Germany, 0405, de
Hong Kong, 0811, hk
India, 0914, in
Indonesia, 0904, id
Italy, 0920, it
Japan, 1016, jp
Republic of Korea, 1118, kr
Malaysia, 1325, my
Mexico, 1324, mx
Netherlands, 1412, nl
New Zealand, 1426, nz
Norway, 1415, no
Pakistan, 1611, pk
Philippines, 1608, ph
Portugal, 1620, pt
Russian Federation, 1821, ru
Singapore, 1907, sg
Spain, 0519, es
Sweden, 1905, se
Switzerland, 0308, ch
Taiwan, 2023, tw
Thailand, 2008, th
United Kingdom, 0702, gb
USA, 2119, us
Screen sizes and disc formats
When viewing on a standard TV or monitor
Screen format of disc
Setting
Appearance
16:9
4:3 (Letter Box)
The programme is shown in widescreen with black bars
at the top and bottom of the screen.
4:3 (Pan & Scan)
The sides of the programme are cropped so that the
picture fills the whole screen.
4:3 (Letter Box)
4:3 (Pan & Scan)
The programme is presented correctly on either setting.
4:3
When viewing on a widescreen TV or monitor
Screen format of disc
Setting
Appearance
16:9
16:9
The programme is presented in widescreen.
4:3
16:9
Your TV will determine how the picture is presented —
check the manual that came with the TV for details.
173
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 174 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
16
Additional information
Damaged discs
Handling discs
When holding discs of any type, take care not to leave
fingerprints, dirt or scratches on the disc surface. Hold
the disc by its edge or by the center hole and edge.
Damaged or dirty discs can affect playback and
recording performance. Take care also not to scratch the
label side of the disc. Although not as fragile as the
recorded side, scratches can still result in a disc
becoming unusable.
Discs spin at high speed inside the recorder. If you can
see that a disc is cracked, chipped, warped, or otherwise
damaged, don’t risk using it; you could end up damaging
the recorder.
This recorder is designed for use with conventional, fully
circular discs only. Use of shaped discs is not
recommended for this product. Pioneer disclaims all
liability arising in connection with the use of shaped discs.
Should a disc become marked with fingerprints, dust,
etc., clean using a soft, dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly
from the center to the outside edge. Do not wipe with a
circular motion.
If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol, or a
commercially available CD/DVD cleaning kit to clean a
disc more thoroughly. Never use benzine, thinner or
other cleaning agents, including products designed for
cleaning vinyl records.
Storing discs
Although CDs and DVD discs are more durable than vinyl
records, you should still take care to handle and store
discs correctly. When you’re not using a disc, return it to
its case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs in
excessively cold, humid, or hot environments (including
under direct sunlight).
Don’t glue paper or put stickers onto the disc, or use a
pencil, ball-point pen or other sharp-tipped writing
instrument. These could all damage the disc.
For more detailed care information see the instructions
that come with discs.
Do not load more than one disc into the recorder.
174
En
Cleaning the pickup lens
The HDD/DVD recorder’s lens should not become dirty in
normal use, but if for some reason it should malfunction
due to dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneerauthorized service center. Although lens cleaners are
commercially available, we do not recommend using
them since some may damage the lens.
Cleaning the recorder’s exterior
When cleaning the glossy surface of the cabinet, gently
wipe it with the provided cleaning cloth.
If you use a dusty or hard cloth or if you rub the cabinet
hard, the surface of the product will be scratched.
If you clean the surface of the cabinet with a wet cloth,
water droplets on the surface may enter into the product,
resulting in malfunction.
Condensation
Condensation may form inside the recorder if it is
brought into a warm room from outside, or if the
temperature of the room rises quickly. Although the
condensation won’t damage the recorder, it may
temporarily impair its performance. For this reason you
should leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature for
about an hour before switching on and using.
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 175 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Additional information
16
Hints on installation
Moving the recorder
We want you to enjoy using this recorder for years to
come, so please bear in mind the following points when
choosing a suitable location for it:
If you need to move the recorder, first remove the disc, if
loaded, and close the disc tray. Next, press STANDBY/
ON to switch the power to standby, checking that the
POWER OFF indication in the display goes off. Wait at
least two minutes. Lastly, disconnect the power cord.
Never lift or move the recorder during playback or
recording — discs rotate at a high speed and may be
damaged.
Do...
Use in a well-ventilated room.
Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table,
shelf or stereo rack.
Don’t...
Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or
humidity, including near radiators and other heatgenerating appliances.
Resetting the recorder
If you need to, you can reset the recorder to all its factory
settings.
Place on a window sill or other place where the
recorder will be exposed to direct sunlight.
1
Use in a dusty or damp environment or in a room
where it will be exposed to excessive cigarette smoke.
2 Using the front panel controls, press and hold
(Stop) and press STANDBY/ON.
The recorder turns off with all settings reset.
Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other
component in your stereo system that becomes hot in
use.
Make sure that the recorder is on.
Use near a television or monitor as you may
experience interference — especially if the television
uses an indoor antenna.
Use in a kitchen or other room where the recorder
may be exposed to smoke or steam.
Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with cloth —
this may prevent proper cooling of the unit.
Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large
enough to support all four of the unit’s feet.
175
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 176 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
16
Additional information
Specifications (SDVR-LX70D)
General
Power requirements. . . . . . . . . .220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 W
Power consumption in standby mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.69 W
(Front panel display: off)
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 kg
Dimensions . . . . . . 420 mm (W) x 80 mm (H) x 286 mm (D)
Operating temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +5 °C to +35 °C
Operating humidity . . . . . . .5 % to 85 % (no condensation)
TV system . . . . . . . NTSC (external input only)/PAL/SECAM
Readable discs
DVD-Video, DVD-RW, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD+RW, DVD-RAM,
Video CD, Super VCD, CD, CD-R/-RW (WMA, MP3, JPEG,
CD-DA, DivX)
Recording discs and formats
DVD-R/-RW: VR mode and Video mode
DVD+R/+RW: +VR mode
DVD-RAM: VR mode
DVD-R DL: VR mode and Video mode
DVD+R DL: +VR mode
Video recording format
Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.5 MHz
Compression format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MPEG
Audio recording format
Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 kHz
Compression format . . . . . . . . Dolby Digital or Linear PCM
(uncompressed)
Recording time
HDD (250 GB)
XP+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 36 h
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 53 h
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 106 h
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 212 h
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 319 h
Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 425 h
Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 532 h
Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 36 h to 711 h
DVD-R/-RW, DVD+R/+RW, DVD-RAM
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 2 h
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 4 h
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 6 h
Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 8 h
Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 10 h
(DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM only)
Manual Mode (MN)
DVD-R/-RW/-RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 1 h to 13 h
DVD+R/+RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 1 h to 8 h
176
En
DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 1 h 51 m
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 3 h 35 m
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 7 h 11 m
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 10 h 46 m
Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 14 h 21 m
Super Extended Play (SEP). . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 17 h 57 m
(DVD-R DL only)
Manual Mode (MN)
DVD-R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m to 24 h
DVD+R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 1 h 51 m to 14 h 21 m
Timer
Programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 month/32 programmes
Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quartz lock (24-hour digital display)
Tuner (analog)
Receivable channels
SECAM B/G
PAL B/G
VHF (low)
VHF (high)
Hyper
UHF
Frequency
47 MHz to 89 MHz
Channel
E2 to E4
X to Z
104 MHz to 300 MHz E5 to E12
S1 to S20
M1 to M10
U1 to U10
302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41
470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69
SECAM L
PAL I
Frequency
44 MHz to 89 MHz
104 MHz to 300 MHz
Channel
A to C
X to Z
D to J
11, 13
S1 to S20
302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41
470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69
SECAM D/K
PAL D/K
VHF (low)
Frequency
49 MHz to 65 MHz
Channel
FB, FC1, FC
Frequency
49 MHz to 94 MHz
Channel
R1 to R5
VHF (high)
104 MHz to 300 MHz
F1 to F6
B to Q
104 MHz to 300 MHz
R6 to R12
S1 to S20
Hyper
UHF
300 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41
470 MHz to 862 MHz 21 to 69
302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41
470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69
STEREO
B/G - A2
I - NICAM
L - NICAM
B/G - NICAM
Tuner (digital)
Receiving system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .DVB-T (2 K/8 K COFDM)
Tuner VHF/UHF . . . . . . VHF band III (174 MHz to 230 MHz)
UHF band IV, V (470 MHz to 862 MHz)
Auto Channel Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999 ch, Auto Preset,
Auto Label, Auto Sort
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stereo MPEG layer I/II
Audio Decoder
. . . . . . . . .Sampling frequencies: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
This product’s digital tuner has been confirmed for use in the
following countries: Belgium, France, Germany, Italy, Spain,
Denmark, Finland, Netherlands, Sweden, Switzerland, UK.
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 177 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Additional information
16
Input/Output
Antenna
. . . . . . . . .75 Ω IEC 169-2 connector for VHF/UHF in/out (analog)
. . . . . . . . . 75 Ω IEC 169-2 connector for VHF/UHF in/out (digital)
Video input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV2
Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector
Video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1
Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector
RGB input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV2
Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector
RGB output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1
Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector (AV1)
Audio input
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV2 L/R
During audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V rms
(Input impedance: more than 22 kΩ)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector
Audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1
During audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V rms
(Output impedance: less than 1.5 kΩ)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector (AV1)
Control input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Mini jack
Digital audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coaxial
G-LINK™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Mini jack
Common Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CA module
DV input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-pin (front)
(i.LINK/IEEE 1394 standard)
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type A (front), Type B (front)
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-pin
This product includes FontAvenue ® fonts licenced
by NEC Corporation. FontAvenue is a registered
trademark of NEC Corporation.
Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with permission
from Microsoft Corporation.
AV Connectors (21-pin connector assignment)
AV connector input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-pin connector
This connector provides the video and audio signals for
connection to a compatible colour TV or monitor.
PIN no.
AV1 (RGB)-TV / AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 2/R out / Audio 2/R out
2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Audio 2/R in
11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G out / G in
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 1/L out / Audio 1/L out
6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Audio 1/L in
15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R or C out / R or C in
4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND
17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND
7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B out / B in
19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video out or Y out / Video out
20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Video in or Y in
8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status
21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND
Note: The specifications and design of this product are subject
to change without notice, due to improvement.
177
En
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 178 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
16
Additional information
Music recognition technology and related data are provided by
Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry standard in music
recognition technology and related content delivery. For more
information, please visit www.gracenote.com.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright ©
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 20002007 Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or
more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680;
#6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,
#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pending. Some services
supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent:
#6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote.
The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the “Powered by
Gracenote” logo are trademarks of Gracenote.
This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc.
of Emeryville, California (”Gracenote”). The software from
Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) enables this application to
perform disc and/or file identification and obtain music-related
information, including name, artist, track, and title information
(“Gracenote Data”) from online servers or embedded databases
(collectively, “Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other
functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the
intended End-User functions of this application or device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal noncommercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or
transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any
third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE
DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE
SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will
terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your license
terminates, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote
reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership rights. Under
no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide. You agree that
Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agreement
against you directly in its own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries
for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned
numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count
queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more
information, see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy
for the Gracenote service.
The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are
licensed to you “AS IS.” Gracenote makes no representations or
warranties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy of any
Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote
reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to
change data categories for any cause that Gracenote deems
178
En
sufficient. No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or
Gracenote Servers are error-free or that functioning of Gracenote
Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote
is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional
data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future
and is free to discontinue its services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.
GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL
BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.
02SDVRLX70D_EN.book 180 ページ 2007年7月18日 水曜日 午前10時9分
Discover the benefits of registering your product online at
http://www.pioneer.co.uk (or http://www.pioneer.eu )
PIONEER CORPORATION
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270
K002_B_En
Published by Pioneer Corporation.
Copyright © 2007 Pioneer Corporation.
All rights reserved.
<ARB7384-A>
Printed in

advertisement

Key Features

  • 700 watts of power for a powerful and immersive sound experience
  • 12-inch woofer for deep and impactful bass
  • Slim and compact design for easy placement
  • Wireless connectivity for easy setup and control
  • Multiple input and output options for connecting to other devices
  • Automatic room calibration for optimal sound quality

Related manuals

Frequently Answers and Questions

How do I connect the Pioneer SX-LX70SW to my other devices?
The Pioneer SX-LX70SW can be connected to other devices using a variety of input and output options, including HDMI, optical digital, and analog audio.
How do I calibrate the Pioneer SX-LX70SW to my room?
The Pioneer SX-LX70SW features an automatic room calibration system that will adjust the sound output to match the acoustics of your room.
What is the warranty for the Pioneer SX-LX70SW?
The Pioneer SX-LX70SW comes with a one-year limited warranty.
Download PDF

advertisement